GL RULES Loading Gear 2012 Gl_vi-2-2_e-1

8/15/2019 GL RULES Loading Gear 2012 Gl_vi-2-2_e-1

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gl-rules-loading-gear-2012-glvi-2-2e-1 1/190

Rules for Classification and Construction

VI Additional Rules and Guidelines

2 Loading Gear

2 Loading Gear on Seagoing Ships and Offshore Installations

Edition 2012



The following Rules come into force on 1 August 2012.

Germanischer Lloyd SE

Head OfficeBrooktorkai 18, 20457 Hamburg, Germany

Phone: +49 40 36149-0

Fax: +49 40 36149-200

[email protected]

www.gl-group.com

"General Terms and Conditions" of the respective latest edition will be applicable

(see Rules for Classification and Construction, I - Ship Technology, Part 0 - Classification and Surveys).

Reproduction by printing or photostatic means is only permissible with the consent of

Germanischer Lloyd SE.

Published by: Germanischer Lloyd SE, Hamburg



Table of Contents

Section 1 Instructions for UseA. General ............................................................ .............................................................. ............. 1- 1

B. Basic Requirements for Loading Gear ................................................................ ....................... 1- 3

C. General Definitions .............................................................. ...................................................... 1- 4

D. Submission and Examination of the Technical Documentation (Examination of Drawings)........ 1- 6

Section 2 Materials

A. General ............................................................ .............................................................. ............. 2- 1

B. Selection of Materials ............................................................................. ................................... 2- 1

C. Manufacture and Testing ....................................................................... ..................................... 2- 2

D. Materials for Welded Components ............................................................. ................................ 2- 4

E. Materials for Hydraulic Cylinders .................................................................... .......................... 2- 7

F. Forgings .................................................................... ............................................................ ..... 2- 9

G. Steel Castings ............................................................ ........................................................... ...... 2- 10

H. Bolts and Nuts ............................................................. ......................................................... ...... 2- 12

Section 3 Design and Calculation Principles

A. General ............................................................ .............................................................. ............. 3- 1

B. Design Principles ................................................................. ...................................................... 3- 1

C. Calculation principles ...................................................................... ........................................... 3- 5

D. Proof of Structural Safety .................................................................. ......................................... 3- 9

E. Proof of safety against overturning ............................................................. ............................... 3- 10

F. Proof of fatigue strength ................................................................ ............................................. 3- 11

G. Proof of suitability for use ......................................................................... ................................. 3- 15

H. Joints ............................................................. ............................................................... .............. 3- 16

I. Special structural elements ......................................................................... ................................ 3- 20

Section 4 Cranes and Supporting Structures

A. General ............................................................ .............................................................. ............. 4- 1

B. Crane groups ...................................................... ............................................................ ............ 4- 1

C. Design Loads ............................................................. ............................................................ ..... 4- 2

D. Hoist load coefficients ...................................................................... .......................................... 4- 6

E. Load combinations and partial safety factors .................................................................. ........... 4- 9

F. Proofs ................................................................ ........................................................... .............. 4- 12

G. Requirements for design and equipment ............................................................ ........................ 4- 13

Section 5 Lifts and Lifting Platforms

A. General ............................................................ .............................................................. ............. 5- 1

B. Design Principles ................................................................. ...................................................... 5- 1

C. Design Requirements ...................................................................... ........................................... 5- 4

D. Examination of Drawings and Supervision of Construction ................................................ ....... 5- 7

E. Tests and Examinations on Board ....................................................................... ....................... 5- 9

F. Lift Documentation ....................................................................... ............................................. 5- 10

VI - Part 2

GL 2012

Table of Contents Chapter 2

Page 3



Section 6 Special Loading Gear and Means of Transport

A. General ................................................................... ........................................................... .......... 6- 1

B. Rope and Chain Hoists .............................. ................................................................. ................ 6- 1

C. Ramps and Car Decks ................................................................ ................................................. 6- 3D. Loading Gear for Research Work .......................... ................................................................. .... 6- 6

E. Industrial Cargo-Handling Vehicles ................................................................... ........................ 6- 6

F. Means of Conveying Persons ............................................................ .......................................... 6- 7

Section 7 Loose Gear and Interchangeable Components

A. General ................................................................... ........................................................... .......... 7- 1

B. Loose Gear ............................................................ ............................................................. ......... 7- 1

C. Interchangeable Components ................................................................. ..................................... 7- 8

D. Marking of Loose Gear and Interchangeable Components ...................................................... ... 7- 15E. Wear, Damage, Repair ................................................................ ................................................ 7- 18

Section 8 Ropes and Rope Accessories

A. General ................................................................... ........................................................... .......... 8- 1

B. Wire Ropes ..................................................... ............................................................ ................ 8- 1

C. Fibre Ropes ........................................................... ............................................................. ......... 8- 5

D. Rope-end Attachments ................................................................ ................................................ 8- 6

E. Tests and Examinations ............................................................. ................................................. 8- 6

F. Documentation .............................................................. ............................................................. . 8- 8

Section 9 Mechanical Parts

A. General ................................................................... ........................................................... .......... 9- 1

B. Design Criteria and Operational Requirements ........................................................................... 9- 1

C. Power Drives ....................................................................... ..................................................... .. 9- 2

D. Slewing Gears and Slew Rings ............................................................................. ...................... 9- 2

E. Winches ....................................................... .............................................................. ................. 9- 3

F. Hydraulic Systems ............................................................ ......................................................... . 9- 5

G. Protective Measures and Safety Devices ................................................................ .................... 9- 6

H. Examination of Drawings and Supervision of Construction ....................................................... 9- 7

I. Documentation ............................................................. .............................................................. . 9- 8

Section 10 Electrical Equipment

A. General ................................................................... .......................................................... ........... 10- 1

B. Design Criteria and Operational Requirements ........................................................................... 10- 1

C. Drives and Brakes ............................................................ ......................................................... .. 10- 2

D. Cables and Lines ............................................................ ........................................................... .. 10- 2

E. Switches ............................................................ ................................................................ .......... 10- 4

F. Protective Measures and Safety Devices ................................................................ .................... 10- 4

G. Examination of Drawings and Supervision of Construction ....................................................... 10- 5

H. Documentation ................................................................ .......................................................... .. 10- 6

Chapter 2

Page 4

Table of Contents VI - Part 2

GL 2012



Section 11 Construction of Steel Components

A. General ............................................................ ............................................................. .............. 11- 1

B. Requirements applied to Manufacturers .............................................................. ....................... 11- 1

C. Design Details ................................................................... ......................................................... 11- 3

D. Types of Welds .................................................................................................. ........................ 11- 6

E. Workmanship and Testing of Weld Joints .......................................................... ....................... 11- 9

F. Examination of Drawings and Supervision of Construction ....................................................... 11- 11

G. Documentation ...................................................................... ..................................................... 11- 12

Section 12 Technical and Operational Safety Requirements

A. General ............................................................ ............................................................. .............. 12- 1

B. Design Requirements .............................................................. ................................................... 12- 1

C. Equipment ......................................................... ............................................................ ............. 12- 3

D. Safety Devices ........................................................... ........................................................... ...... 12- 4

E. Passive Protective Measures ........................................................................ .............................. 12- 6

F. Stowage and Lashing Devices .............................................................................. ...................... 12- 6

G. Operational Requirements ............................................................................ .............................. 12- 7

Section 13 Testing and Examination of Loading Gear

A. General ............................................................ ............................................................. .............. 13- 1

B. Supervision of Construction .............................................................. ......................................... 13- 2C. Initial Test and Examination ........................................................ .............................................. 13- 7

D. Periodic Tests and Examinations ........................ ..................................................................... .. 13- 9

E. Extraordinary Tests and Examinations ....................................................................................... 13- 12

F. Wear, Damage, Repair ................................................................................................. .............. 13- 13

G. Loading Gear Documentation ....................................................................................... ............. 13- 15

Annex A Calculation of Dynamic Forces due to Motions of the Ship

Annex B Hook Load for Subsea Operations

Annex C Wind Loads, Form and Sheltering Coefficients

Annex D Rigging Plan

VI - Part 2

GL 2012

Table of Contents Chapter 2

Page 5





Section 1

Instructions for Use

A. General

1. Application of Rules

1.1 These "Rules for Loading Gear on SeagoingShips and Offshore Installations", in short "Rules forLoading Gear", are applied by Germanischer Lloyd(GL) in all cases where the Society is commissionedto assess loading gear in accordance with the scope of3. They constitute the basis for Certification and,

where required, Classification of loading gear by GL,see 4.

1.2 GL's Head Office is exclusively entitled tointerpret these Rules.

1.3 Any liability incurred under the "GeneralTerms and Conditions" shall be limited to the scope oftest and examination as defined in 4. and other Sec-tions. The operational and functional capacity of theloading gear remain the sole responsibility of themanufacturer or operator respectively.

2. Entry into force

2.1 These Rules enter into force on 1.8.2012,with a transitional period until 31.7.2014

2.2 Lifting appliances whose design or manufac-ture commenced before 1.8.2012 are subject to the

provisions of the "Guidelines for the Construction andSurvey of Lifting Appliances", 1992 Edition, in short"Guidelines for Lifting Appliances" which finallycease to be applicable on 31.7.2014.

3. Scope

3.1 These Rules apply specifically to all loadinggear as defined in C.3 on seagoing ships and offshoreinstallations. Where national regulations permit, andan appropriate agreement is concluded, they may also

be applied, as and where relevant, to loading gear andloose gear on board inland navigation vessels or on-shore.

3.2 These Rules do not apply to:

– launching gear for lifesaving appliances

– launching gear for diving equipment

– structural parts of ramps and car decks, seeSection 6, C.2.2.1

– dredging appliances which are not loading gear

3.3 For existing lifting appliances, where GL hasgiven approval to the technical documentation accord-ing to the "Guidelines for Lifting Appliances 1992",these "Rules for Loading Gear" apply only to new

parts and repairs, as well as for tests and examinations.

4. Certification and Classification of loadinggear

The Certification and Classification of loading gear

includes the following examination steps which areharmonized with each other:

– examination of the technical documentation

– supervision of construction

– initial tests and examinations

– periodic tests and examinations

– extraordinary tests and examinations as required

4.1 Certification of loading gear

4.1.1 General notes

4.1.1.1 The certification of loading gear on ships andoffshore installations is not a part of ship Classifica-tion or Classification of an offshore installation. Thisapplies also to the periodic confirmation and renewalof the loading gear certification.

4.1.1.2 Certification is a precondition for operationand comprises loading gear as a complete unit. Forthat purpose, in the course of manufacture, GL testcertificates or manufacturers' certificates shall also beissued for assemblies, ropes, accessories, componentsand manufactured loading gear, if required.

4.1.1.3After the initial test and examination, Certifi-

cation is completed by issuing a test certificate for theload test and the examination documentation.

4.1.1.4 Certification is a prerequisite for periodictests and examinations and requires a Register book ofloading gear or a special certificate confirming thetests and/or examinations performed.

4.1.1.5 The purpose of Certification of loading gear is

to provide evidence of safety provisions for the handling

staff, i.e. it aims to protect all persons who are insideloading gear or in its working area or danger area.

4.1.1.6 The following requirements refer to new

loading gear. For existing loading gear, GL's HeadOffice determines the scope of tests and examinationsfor Certification case by case. Existing Certificationcan e.g. be accepted and continued.

VI - Part 2GL 2012

Section 1 Instructions for Use Chapter 2Page 1–1

A



4.1.2 Ship loading gear operating in the port

and onboard seagoing ships

Prerequisites for GL Certification are:

– examination of technical documentation

– control of manufacture and examination prior todispatch at the manufacturer's or in the subcon-tractors works.

– existence of test certificates for wire ropes, ac-cessory and machinery components, insofar asrequired

– test and examination on the ship before it is putinto operation

4.1.2.1 For the attestation and documentation of alltests and examinations, GL forms are used which are

based on ILO specimens and which are internationallyrecognized (ILO Certification).

Where differing national forms are required, these will be issued in addition to the GL forms.

4.1.2.2 In accordance with ILO regulations, the Cer-tification of loading gear shall be confirmed by annualexaminations and shall be renewed by five-yearlyexaminations in conjunction with a load test.

4.1.3 Offshore loading gear

The prerequisites in 4.2.1 apply to Certification, how-

ever with the following deviations:

4.1.3.1 Tests, examinations and the scope of attesta-tion are extended to selected electrical and additionalmachinery components, see Section 10, Table 10.1 and Section 9, Table 9.1.

4.1.3.2 For confirmation and renewal of the Certifi-cation, alternative periods and dates may be agreedwith the operator of the installation to those in 4.1.2.2or may be necessary as a result of national regulations.

4.1.4 Floating cranes

Depending on their allocation, floating cranes aretreated as ship loading gear acc. to 4.1.2 or as offshoreloading gear acc. to 4.1.3.

4.1.5 Ship loading gear not used for cargo-handling

4.1.5.1 The conditions for GL Certification dependon the national regulations.

4.1.5.2 For the attestation and documentation of alltests and examinations, GL uses, depending on thecircumstances or legal status, its own forms and addi-tionally also national forms, if entitled to do so.

4.1.5.3 For the confirmation and renewal of Certifi-cation, the requirements in 4.1.2.2 apply. Deviationsmay arise due to the legal status nationally.

4.1.6 Special cases

4.1.6.1 If commissioned correspondingly, GL mayalso certify loading gear onboard ships which are notclassified by GL.

4.1.6.2 Where loading gear on ships and offshoreinstallations which are not classified by GL is not to

be certified by GL, nonetheless in any case the struc-tural parts stated in 4.1 are to be tested and examined.

4.2 Classification of loading gear

4.2.1 General notes

By special application, any type of loading gear can beclassified by GL.

This Classification is an expanded form of Certifica-tion of loading gear. The requirements of 4.1 apply intheir entirety.

4.2.1.1 The Classification of loading gear accordingto GL exceeds the safety provisions for the handlingstaff and aims in addition to protect the operator fromeconomic loss.

Tests, examinations and the scope of attestation willtherefore be extended beyond Certification on selectedelectrical and other machinery components, see Sec-tion 10,Table 10.1 and Section 9, Table 9.1.

4.2.1.2 Classification is concluded by issuing theClass Certificate. For confirmation and renewal, therequirements for certified loading gear apply, see4.1.2.2.

4.2.1.3 The conditions acc. to 4.2.2 refer to newloading gear. For existing loading gear, GL's HeadOffice determines the scope of tests and examinationsfor Certification case by case.

4.2.2 Conditions for Classification

Classification requires Certification as well as addi-tional measures, as described in 4.2.1.1.

4.2.3 Class Certificate

After completion of all tests and examinations andloading gear Certification by a GL Surveyor, the op-erator receives a GL "Class Certificate for LoadingGear" from GL's Head Office.

4.2.4 Obligation to classify

Classification of loading gear is optional in principle,

but mandatory for ships where the Class designationindicates the installation of loading gear, as e.g. withfloating cranes with the Class Notation FLOATINGCRANE.

Chapter 2Page 1–2

Section 1 Instructions for Use VI - Part 2GL 2012

A



4.3 Differentiation from the requirements inB.2.1

The structural elements stated in the following are partof the ship Classification or the Classification of off-

shore installations; However, they are to be dimen-sioned acc. to these Rules for Loading Gear:

– structure of the ship's hull or the offshore instal-lation in the range of the loading gear.

– crane columns

– crane boom supports

– masts and posts of derrick boom systems

– foundations and fastenings

– lift rails

– lift shafts

– guide rails for goods lifts and lift platforms

B. Basic Requirements for Loading Gear

For lifts and lift platforms, special loading gear andmeans of transport, loose gear as well as structuralcomponents and accessories, the provisions of therespective Sections apply.

1. Provisions used

1.1 Design and calculation

1.1.1 The provisions of these Rules are essentially based on recognized standards and design fundamen-tals in a form interpreted by GL.

1.1.2 In addition to 1.1.1, these Rules include pro-visions for special features on ships and offshoreinstallations such as e.g. inclinations of the ship or

platform, increased wind load and seaway effects, as

well as other structural features for adjusting to themaritime environment.

1.1.3 Calculations based on established scantlingrules for loading gear will be recognized by GL, if thestress level according to these Rules is complied withand ship specific particulars are considered.

1.2 Accident prevention

1.2.1 The provisions for accident prevention inthese Rules are based on the Code of Practice "Safetyand Health in Dock Work" issued by the InternationalLabour Organization (ILO).

1.2.2 In addition to 1.2.1 these Rules embody fur-ther special accident prevention measures.

1.3 Checks and examinations

1.3.1 The provisions contained in these Rules relat-ing to the initial and periodic testing and examinationof loading gear on ships are based on ILO Convention

152 "Convention Concerning Occupational Health andSafety in Dock Work".

1.3.2 Loading gear for offshore installations aretreated by GL in a manner similar to that stated in1.3.1 unless subject to special agreements or differingnational regulations.

1.4 Systems of certification

The certification systems used by GL for loading gearare described in Section 13, G.

2. Other applicable provisions

The following Rules, Guidelines and standards complement, where relevant or upon agreement, the provi-sions of these Rules:

2.1 Rules for Classification and constructionand guidelines of GL

2.1.1 GL Rules I – Ship Technology

Part 1 – Seagoing Ships

– Chapter 1 – Hull Structures

– Chapter 2 – Machinery Installations

– Chapter 3 – Electrical Installations

2.1.2 GL Rules II – Materials and Welding

Part 1 – Metallic Materials

Part 3 – Welding

2.1.3 GL Rules IV – Industrial Services

Part 6 – Offshore Technology

– Chapter 4 – Structural Design

2.1.4 GL Rules VI – Additional Rules andGuidelines

Part 3 – Machinery Installations

– Chapter 9 – Guidelines for the Approval ofManufacturers of Hose Assem-

blies and Compensators

Part 5 – Pumps

– Chapter 1 – Guidelines for the Design, Con-struction and Testing of Pumps

Part 6 – Modular Certification System – Chapter 2 – Guidelines for the Inspection of

Mechanical and Electronical Pro-ducts

VI - Part 2GL 2012


B

http://gl_i-1-1_e.pdf/





http://gl_iv-6-4_e.pdf/


http://gl_vi-5-1_e.pdf/


















Part 7 – Guidelines for the Performance of Type Ap- provals

– Chapter 2 – Test Requirements for Electri-cal/Electronic Equipment and Sys-tems

– Chapter 6 – Test Requirements for ElectricalMachinery

– Chapter 8 – Test Requirements for Compo-nents and Systems of MechanicalEngineering and Offshore Tech-nology

– Chapter 9 – Test Requirements for PressureVessels and Heat Exchangers

2.2 Standards

ISO, EN and DIN standards or other basic calculation

documents as mentioned in the text.

3. National regulations

3.1 National regulations for the Certification ofloading gear and the attestation of structural elementsand components may deviate in various ways frominternational regulations, on which these Rules are

based.

GL applies national regulations if required or uponagreement. In addition these Rules can be taken as areference.

3.2 For loading gear not used for cargo handling,only national regulations apply. The handling of thisloading gear is described in A.4.1.5 and in Section 13,G.

4. International regulations

4.1 For loading gear which is used for cargohandling on ships, the regulations of ILO apply, whichare part of these Rules in respect to accident preven-tion as well as tests and examinations, see 1.2.1 and1.3.1.

4.2 For passenger lifts on fixed offshore installa-tions within Europe the European Lifts Directive ap-

plies.

C. General Definitions

Additional or special definitions can be found in thefollowing Sections.

1. Seagoing shipsAll water craft regardless of their shape or purpose, ifthey are permitted to operate in international or coastalwaters.

2. Offshore installations

Fixed structures supported by the seabed, or floatingunits supported by buoyancy forces, used for offshoreexploration as well as the production and storage ofhydrocarbons.

3. Loading gear

Generic term for all gear for lifting, handling, transporting or conveying goods and raw materials, withthe exception of loose gear.

Apart from special loading gear and means of transport, in accordance with Section 6, this term essen-tially includes cranes, lifts, lifting platforms and der-rick boom systems.

Various loading gear are defined below as follows:

3.1 Ship loading gear

General term for all rigidly mounted loading gear onships which are designed for operation under harbourconditions. Loading gear also operating under seago-ing conditions are to be dimensioned like offshoreloading gear.

3.2 Offshore loading gear

General term for all rigidly mounted loading gear onoffshore installations and floating cranes, where appli-

cable.

3.3 Floating cranes

General term for cranes used for support and transpor-tation, rigidly mounted on a floating structure de-signed for this purpose.

3.4 Derrick boom systems

Lifting and handling gear where the derrick booms areswung round by ropes.

3.5 Cargo handling gear

Ship loading gear used for cargo handling, normallyoperated by harbour personnel (stevedores)

3.6 Loading gear not used for cargo-handling

Loading gear for ships or offshore installations usedfor internal ship operation and normally operated bythe crew (e.g. engine-room cranes, trolleys, loadinggear for hatch covers, for provisions and equipmentand for supporting hoses).

3.7 LiftsPower-driven devices with a guided lift car for thetransport of persons and/or goods between specific

points.

Chapter 2Page 1–4


C
























3.8 Lifting platforms

Power-driven devices without a cabin, with guided platform, for the transport of goods between variable positions.

Transportation of persons is permitted up to a maxi-mum operating height of 1,8 m.

4. Loose gear

Means by which loads can be attached to loading gear but which do not form part either of the loading gearor of the load. They include devices and steel struc-tures such as:

– grabs

– spreaders

– lifting magnets

– traverses

– heavers

– hook blocks (complete)

5. Accessories

Load-bearing, not rigidly attached, interchangeable parts which may be integral components of loadinggear and loose gear as well as employed individually,such as:

– hooks, blocks, shackles, swivels, rings, chains,claws, clamps, pliers, load fastening ropes(slings/strops) and lifting straps

6. Equipment for conveying persons

Equipment for conveying persons such as e.g. working baskets or landing booms (St. Lawrence Seaway booms)

7. Nominal load (LNe)

7.1 Nominal load is the designation for themaximum permissible useful load of loading gear andloose gear.

7.2 Loading gear and loose gear can have differ-ent nominal loads depending on varying equipmentcondition or operational conditions, cable tackle sys-tems or load radii.

8. Safe working load (SWL)

8.1 Safe working load is the international desig-nation for the nominal load by ILO. The abbreviationSWL is used for marking the loading gear, loose gearand accessories.

8.2 The permissible load of accessories is also

designated SWL.

8.3 The unit of SWL is specified in tons [t] orkilograms [kg].

9. Useful load (LN)

9.1 Useful load is the load which may be directlylifted by the supporting component (e.g. cargo hook orgrab) of the loading gear, by the lift car of a lift, by the

platform of a lifting platform or by loose gear, see Fig.1.1 to 1.3

9.2 The useful load consists of the load to betransported and, where applicable, also of the deadload of the loose gear, see Fig. 1.1.

10. Hoist load (LH)

10.1 The hoist load consists of the useful load andthe dead load portion of the loading gear, which areused to carry the useful load.

10.2 The dead load portions (LEA) of the hoistload of a crane are composed of the weights of ahook block or a grab and a rope weight portion, seeFig. 1.1.

10.3 The dead load portion of the hoist load of alift consists of the car weight, the dead load portion ofa lifting platform consists of the platform and a weight

portion of the scissor lift mechanism, see Fig. 1.2 and1.3.

11. Dead loads (LE)

11.1 Dead loads are the weights of all the fixedand mobile components of loading gear and loose gear

permanently present during operation.

11.2 For the purpose of marking, the dead loads ofloose gear are designated as weight (WT) by the ILO,see Section 7, D.3.

11.3 The unit of WT is specified in tons [t] or

kilograms [kg].

12. Test load (LP)

12.1 The test load is a load increased by a speci-fied amount relative to the nominal load, at which theload test has to be performed.

12.2 The test load (LPdyn) of loading gear is the testload which is to be raised, lowered and braked bymotor during the test using the drives (dynamic test-ing).

12.3 The test load (LPstat) of a component or loosegear is the load to be statically applied in the loadingtest (static test).

VI - Part 2GL 2012


C



13. Load radius

13.1 The load radius is the horizontal distancefrom the cargo runner to the heel of a derrick or asheer crane boom, or from the pivot axle of a single or

double crane using horizontal loading gear as the basis.

13.2 In the case of derrick booms, the load radiusis defined by specifying the angle of inclination of thederrick boom relative to horizontal.

14. Strength

The ability of a material or component to withstandelastic failure or fracture.

15. Significant wave height (H1/3)

The average of the 1/3 highest wave heights where seaconditions are constant for a short time, normally 3hours.

16. Marking

General designation for information, permanentlyattached to structural parts, accessories, components,loading gear, loose gear and, when applicable, toropes. They include e.g.:

– manufacturer's plate

– technical information

(permanently attached e.g. by impact stamps ormetal plates, or movable e.g. attached to ropes

by small wire-fixed metal plates as well as bymarking strips or marking fibres woven intoropes)

– stamping

(marking by impact stamps, mandatory e.g. as a proof of tests and/or examinations as well as acorrelation to the test certificates)

– lettering

(information on loading gear and loose gearabout nominal loads, load radius, sequentialnumber on ships or offshore installations andwhere applicable on dead loads)

17. Certificate

General designation for the confirmation of testsand/or examinations of structural parts, ropes, acces-sories, loose gear, components and loading gear by(test) certificates.

18. Certification

Certification is the designation in each case of thewhole system of all required certificates for loadinggear and loose gear, based on international, national orGL provisions, as a precondition for operation.

19. Classification

Classification is the Certification of loading gear withan increased number of components, resulting in theissuance of a Class Certificate

20. Surveys

The services of a GL Surveyor, rendered for theevaluation and confirmation of the operational safetyof loading gear and loose gear, are designated as Sur-veys in the GL ship documentation.

21. Designation of components

In these Rules for Loading Gear, the designationsapplied to components are those shown in Fig. 1.4 to1.7.

D. Submission and Examination of the Tech-nical Documentation (Examination ofDrawings)

The examination of the technical documentation is thefirst step of Certification of loading gear (see A.4.1).

For lifts and lifting platforms, special loading gear andmeans of transport, loose gear as well as structural

components and accessories, the technical documentsare to be submitted which are described in the respec-tive Sections.

1. General notes

Examination of the technical documentation is manda-tory for loading gear which is newly built.

1.1 Technical documentation is examined to ver-ify the calculated safety provided against failure, tocheck the accident prevention measures, and to verifycompliance with the design and contractual conditions

where these have been specially agreed.

1.2 Technical documentation examined by GL based on the "Rules for Loading Gear" allows exactreplication, provided it does not conflict with newfindings and/or experience. Examination of the techni-cal documentation based on the superseded "Guide-lines for Lifting Appliances" for further production isto be agreed with GL case by case.

1.3 GL may waive examination of the technicaldocumentation for loading gear produced in serieswhich is not used for cargo handling, if the loading

gear is legally certified or recognized ( e.g. as an approved type), and if the manufacturer provides evi-dence of static strength and, where required, of fatiguestrength by recognized and documented tests.

Chapter 2Page 1–6


D



2. Form of submission

To facilitate a smooth and efficient approval processdrawings and other documents shall be submitted

electronically via GLOBE 1. In specific cases andfollowing prior agreement with GL they can also besubmitted in paper form in triplicate.

3. Requirements for approval documents

3.1 Test documentation shall contain all the dataand information needed for examination. This includesdimensions, details of materials, and welding and thetests applied.

Parts lists, material specifications, welding and test procedures, etc. shall accompany the documentation.

3.2 In the case of standardized parts, or parts

which have been type-tested by GL, it is normallysufficient to refer to the relevant standard or type-testnumber, indicating the proposed size and type of unitwith details of the material and (heat) treatment, whereapplicable.

3.3 Calculations shall be set out in such a waythat they can be easily interpreted and are traceable. In

particular, design loads, system dimensions, input andoutput data, maximum values, bearing reactions and,if applicable, safety from overturning shall be clearlyindicated.

The calculations to be submitted are required for con-

trol purposes. Examination of the calculations by GLis carried out only upon special agreement.

3.4 From the approval documents, the functionsof the loading gear or loading gear components shall

be completely apparent. Otherwise function descrip-tions shall also be submitted.

3.5 The manufacturer shall ensure that the approval documents are ready for examination at the proper time, even if they are prepared by sub-contractors.

3.6 The client shall provide the manufacturerwith all the necessary details concerning the proposedoperating conditions for the loading gear, e.g. the typeof ship or installation, operational area, environmentalconditions, cargoes to be handled, etc.

4. Approval documents for newly manufac-tured loading gear

The following lists for newly manufactured loadinggear do not have any claim to completeness. On theother hand, they are only applicable within the respec-tive relevant scope.

––––––––––––––

1 Detailed information about the secured GL system GLOBEcan be found on GL's website www.gl-group.com/globe.

4.1 Derrick boom system

For documents to be submitted for these systems,reference is made to the "Guidelines for Lifting Appli-ances".

4.2 Loading gear in general

4.2.1 Documents for approval

4.2.1.1 Structural parts

– crane booms, crane housings, crane columns,supporting structures

– crane boom supports, sea lashings

– foundations and rigidly attached fittings

– crane bridges, trolleys, gantries, bogies, run-ways, crane rails

– stopper, derailment guard, devices to preventoverturning

– material specifications

– welding and test plans

– accessory parts, if not standardized (hooks, blocks, shackles etc.)

– rope-sheaves which are not manufactured in acc.with or generally in line with standards or type-approved

4.2.1.2 Mechanical engineering – slew rings, with bolting system and limit load

diagram

– rotary bearings such as king pins and rollers

– load-bearing hydraulic cylinders with their asso-ciated safeguard against pressure loss

– diagrams for hydraulic or pneumatic devices

– spindles, rack bars

– winch drums with rope fixings and winch bolt-ing

4.2.1.3 Further documents

– overview drawing of the loading gear

– overview drawing of loading gear used for cargohandling including their arrangement and mark-ings on the ship (rigging plan)

– information on the loading gear such as variableequipment conditions, nominal loads, load radii,hoist and luffing speeds, rope lengths and hookheights.

4.2.2 Documents for information

– details of manufacturer, client and shipyard

– details of proposed operational and environ-mental conditions

VI - Part 2GL 2012


D



– details of ropes (make/strength), end connectionof ropes, cable tackle system, rope-sheaves

– nominal data on electric main drive motor forthe electric load analysis of the ship

– strength calculations

– details of type tests and type approvals

– details of nominal sizes (SWL) and standards onwhich standardized accessories are based

4.3 Offshore cranes


4.3.1.1 Steel structures

– see list given in 4.2.1.

– platforms, accesses, ladders

– design and fixing of cabin

4.3.1.2 Mechanical engineering

see list given in 4.2.1.2

– complete winches

– complete slewing and swinging mechanisms andtravelling gear

– swell compensator and/or swell absorbing sys-tems

4.3.1.3 Electrical engineering

– overview drawing of electrical installation (e.g.wiring diagram, single line diagram)

– circuit diagram including part list

– overview of devices with GL type-approval

– overview of security-oriented devices and con-trols

– flow chart of control

– function description for all security installations

such as emergency shut-down, limit switch,overload protection devices etc.

– lighting plan including emergency power supply

– type of protection of motors and switch gear

– complete information on explosion protection

4.3.1.4 Further documents

– useful load / load radius diagram(s)


– see list given in 4.2.2

– nominal data for prime mover

– details of protection devices to prevent over-speed

4.4 Loading gear to be classified



– see list given in 4.3.1.1

– steering stands, if any



– hydraulic motors and pumps for nominal powerover 50 kW

– ventilators and heat exchangers



– control consoles and switch cabinets


– see list given in 4.3.2

– function descriptions and manuals, if required

5. Documents for approval for identical re-productions

The following documents are to be submitted for iden-tical reproductions:

– overview drawings of the loading gear

– list of drawings of all structural elements subjectto approval which are used for the productionincluding following information:

a) drawing number

b) diary number of the initial GL approval

– further documents, to be agreed with GL

6. Documents for approval of existing loading

gear

If existing Loading gear has been certified or classi-fied by recognized organizations or societies, GL canwaive approval of the technical documentation, oth-erwise the following requirements apply.

6.1 If necessary, the drawings are to be procuredfrom the manufacturer, or reproduced by taking meas-urements with the participation of a GL Surveyor,where appropriate. Missing certificates concerning therequired material properties (material test certificates)have to be completed upon agreement with GL.

6.2 In each individual case the GL Head Office

decides if parts of the examination of technical docu-mentation can be dispensed with. GL Head Office willalso, if required, again determine and fix the SWLand/or load radius.

Chapter 2Page 1–8


D

http://-/?-

http://-/?-



7. Essential changes and repairs

7.1 Essential changes are, amongst others, anincrease in nominal load, a change of load radius aswell as changes to load-bearing structural components

on existing loading gear.

7.2 Essential repairs are alterations or the ex-change of load-bearing structural elements

7.3 In the case of essential changes and repairs, besides documentation for the components to benewly installed, drawings of the components whichare affected by the changes shall also be submitted.

7.4 If necessary, changed rigging plans shall also be submitted.

8. Stamping and validity of the approveddocuments

8.1 Documents subject to examination receive an"Examined" stamp. If the structural components to be

examined are part of the ship's Classification, theyreceive an "Approved" stamp.

8.2 Documents for information receive a "Noted"stamp or the inscription:

"For Information only"

8.3 Documents stamped "Examined" or "Approved"are binding for the production. Later modificationsrequire renewed examination by GL.

Fig. 1.1 Crane with traverse (schematic)

VI - Part 2GL 2012


D



Fig. 1.2 Passenger lift (schematic)

Fig. 1.3 Scissor lift (schematic)

Chapter 2Page 1–10


D



Fig. 1.4 Heavy load crane

No. Item

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

crane column

slewing ring

jib foot bearing

crane house

rope sheaves

crane cabin

luffing rope (main hoist)

hoist rope (main hoist)

side plate

hook block (main hoist)

jib

lettering

hoist rope (auxiliary hoist)

hook block (auxiliary hoist)

cargo hook (main hoist)

jib head

16

VI - Part 2GL 2012


D



Fig. 1.5 Slewing crane with pendant ropes

No. Item

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

crane column

slewing ring

crane house

crane cabin

jib

jib foot bearing

rope lowering guard

hoist rope

luffing rope

rope sheaves

lower cargo block

grab

lettering



D



Fig. 1.6 Slewing crane with luffing cylinder

No. Item

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

crane column

slewing ring

base plate

luffing cylinder

crane house

jib foot bearing

jib

lettering

jib head

hydraulic motor

hoist winch

hoist rope

lower cargo block

cargo hook

VI - Part 2GL 2012


D



Fig. 1.7 Floating crane (sheer crane)

No. Item

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

910

pontoon

wheel house

main frame (A-frame)

main frame bearing

main frame bracing

guide for main frame bracing

span pendant

span bracing

bearing for span bracingspan tackle

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

standing block for span tackle

span winch

ram horn hook

lower purchase block

hoisting tackle for main frame

upper purchase block

hoisting ropes of main frame tackles

hoisting winch for main frame tackles

flying jib

span pendant for flying jib

No. Item

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

2930

flying jib bracing

adjusting pendant for flying jib

standing block for adjusting pendant

adjusting piece

bearing for adjusting pin

adjusting tackle for flying jib

pad eye

winch for adjusting tackle

ram horn hooklower purchase block

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

hoisting tackle of flying jib

upper purchase block

guide sheave for hoisting rope

hoisting rope of flying jib tackles

winch for flying jib tackles

auxiliary hoist

hoisting rope of auxiliary hoist

winch for auxiliary hoist

bouncing back prevention



D



Section 2

Materials

A. General

1. This Section contains provisions for the se-lection, manufacture and testing as well as the specifi-cation of steel materials for various loading gear andloose gear components. They are based on the GLRules, Parts 1 and 3 in Section 1, B.2.1.2,with theexception of GL Rules for Structural Design (IV-6-4),see B.1.6.

2. Materials not covered by this Section, see listin B.1.5, are, as far as possible, to be dealt with inaccordance with the GL Rules, acc. to recognizedstandards or by agreement.

3. Suitable standardized steels which are notcovered in Tables 2.2 - 2.4 may also be used uponagreement with GL

4. In the following, the GL Rules stated in 1. arereferred to as GL Rules for Materials or as GL Rulesfor Welding.

B. Selection of Materials

1. Selection criteria

1.1 The selection of materials shall be carried outtaking all material properties into consideration, andGL's approval is normally effected by means of ap-

proved drawings.

1.2 When selecting materials of normal strength,higher strength and high strength steel for the variousloading gear and loose gear components, the following

criteria are to be applied:

– effect of the components on the mechanicalstrength of the assembly

– type and magnitude of the load (static or dy-namic loading, internal stresses in the compo-nent, stress concentrations, direction of thestress relative to the structure of the material)

– design temperature (see Section 3, B.3.)

– chemical composition and weldability

– mechanical properties of the material (dimen-

sioning of components) – toughness of the material (resistance to brittle

fracture at design temperature, as verified by thenotched-bar impact test)

– properties of the material perpendicular to thesurface of the product (resistance to lamellarfracture)

It may be appropriate to apply further criteria to theselection of materials.

1.3 For the application at temperatures below -10 °C and in consideration of Section 3, B.3., steelsare to be used which have sufficient toughness at thesetemperatures, as verified by the notched-bar impact

test at the prescribed temperature.

1.4 If a component is subject to multi-axial stresses, e.g. on greater material thicknesses and large volumewelding connections, steels with improved propertiesin the direction of thickness shall be selected.

1.5 Other materials, such as stainless steels, caststeel, aluminium alloys, timber or plastics shall bechosen and used in accordance with the criteria statedin 1.2 and in consideration of their properties, as andwhen applicable.

1.6 For materials intended to be used as crane

columns for offshore cranes, the particular require-ments of the GL Rules for Structural Design (IV-6-4) are to be observed (see Section 1, B.2.1.3).

2. Categorization of components

2.1 Depending on their relevance to the overallsafety of the structure, components are to be allocatedto the following 3 categories, see Table 2.1.

2.2 The categorization of components according to

the criteria of Table 2.1 shall take place at the design

stage, and be submitted with the documents for approval.

2.3 Components not specifically mentioned inTable 2.1, shall be categorized in accordance with theloading conditions.

3. Strength categories

3.1 Materials for welded components are to besubdivided into the following strength categories onthe basis of their minimum yield strength:

– normal strength materials with minimum yieldstrengths up to 285 N/mm2

– higher strength materials with minimum yieldstrengths over 285 N/mm2 up to 390 N/mm2

– high strength materials with minimum yield

strengths above 390 N/mm2

VI - Part 2GL 2012

Section 2 Materials Chapter 2Page 2–1

B






Table 2.1 Categorization of components into categories of order

Category of order Component description Component 1 (Examples)

1st order Components essential for the total safety

of the structure as well as its safe

operation and which, where applicable,are exposed to local or also multi-axial

stresses in addition to global stresses.

– crane boom

– crane housing

– crane columns

– foundations

– hydraulic cylinders for lifting gear and

luffing gear as well as for telescopiccrane booms

– derrick heel bearing and rotary bearing

– screws for slew rings

– load-bearing components of loose gear

– axes

– winch drums

– winch frame

2nd order Components essential for safe operation

and functional capability.

– hydraulic cylinders for swinging

mechanisms – fittings

– lateral wind bracing

– rope-sheaves

– hoisting eyes

3rd order Components subjected to low loads, or

of minor importance respectively, and

which cannot be allocated to the 1st or

2nd category of order.

– cabins

– stairs

– platforms

– reinforcements

– consoles

1 For fasteners such as bolts and screws the category of order of the joined components is applicable. In case of differing categories of the

joined components, the higher category is to be chosen.

3.2 The strength category selected for the component concerned, or the material allocated to thiscategory, is to be indicated in the documents for ap-

proval. The same applies where the material is re-quired to meet special conditions.

When selecting materials, it shall be borne in mindthat a decline in the mechanical characteristics is to beexpected as the product thickness increases.

C. Manufacture and Testing

1. Manufacturer's approval

Rolling-mill products, forgings and castings as well as

bolts and nuts for components of 1st and 2nd orderloading gear and loose gear shall only be produced bythose manufacturers approved by GL or recognizedorganizations.

Application for approval is to be made in writing toGL and is normally based on a factory test and a prod-uct test. The scope of testing for this purpose is deter-mined case by case.

2. Requirements for materials and products

2.1 Manufacturing

All materials and products are to be manufactured inaccordance with sufficiently tested procedures whichguarantee that the required properties are achieved.

2.2 Chemical composition and required prop-

erties

All materials and items manufactured from them

which are to be categorized as 1st

or 2nd

order compo-nents according to Table 2.1 are to comply with therequirements of this Section or other applicable provi-sions with respect to chemical composition and me-chanical properties.

2.3 Supply condition and heat treatment

All products are to be supplied in the required heat-treated condition. Where the final heat treatment isonly carried out at the final manufacturer, the supplycondition of the pre-material shall be appropriatelydocumented in the test certificates.

2.4 Absence of defectsMaterials and products shall not show defects whichmay adversely affect the use or further processing ofthe material more than insignificantly.

Chapter 2Page 2–2

Section 2 Materials VI - Part 2GL 2012

C



2.5 Weldability

Materials intended for the manufacture of weldedconstructions shall be weldable in terms of applyingcustomary workshop procedures. If welding is only

possible under special conditions, the conditions shall be determined in consultation with GL and verified bya weldability test.

3. Testing

3.1 Chemical composition

The chemical composition of the materials is normallyto be verified by the manufacturer by means of heatanalysis, and shall include all elements for which limitvalues are set in this Section or in other applicable

provisions, or which are added on as alloys in order to

achieve the required mechanical properties.

In general, the manufacturer's certificate is accepted as proof of the chemical composition.

3.2 Mechanical and technological properties

3.2.1 When the mechanical and technological properties are tested, the general procedures and testsamples shall be used in accordance with GL Rules forPrinciples and Test Procedures (II-1-1), Section 2. Test requirements and results are to be presented ininternational (SI) units.

3.2.2 Materials and products for 1st order compo-nents are to be covered by GL Material Certificates or

by inspection certificates 3.2 as per EN 10204.

For materials and products for 2nd and 3rd order components, testing by the manufacturer may be agreed.

3.3 Dimensions and absence of defects

3.3.1 All products shall be checked by the manu-facturer for compliance with the prescribed dimen-sions, surveyed in respect of possible defects and, if

required, presented to a GL Surveyor.

Unless specially agreed in the following Sections, theGL Surveyor will carry out a random examination ofthe dimensions and the surface conditions as deemednecessary.

3.3.2 Where non-destructive tests are required forthe various types of products, they shall be performed

by the manufacturer in accordance with the GL Rulesfor Principles and Test Procedures (II-1-1), Section 3.

The results as well as the particulars of the test proce-dure shall be evaluated in accordance with recognizedacceptance criteria and attested by a certificate.

Products not complying with the requirements shall beset aside by the manufacturer.

3.4 Proof of mechanical properties

3.4.1 The results of the required tests on materials

and products of 1st order components shall be certified by GL in accordance with the GL Rules for Principlesand Test Procedures (II-1-1), Section 1, H.2.1 (A-typeCertificate), if not specified otherwise in these Rules.

3.4.2 The results of the required tests on materials

and products of 2nd order components may be attested by a certificate according to the GL Rules forPrinciples and Test Procedures (II-1-1), Section 1,H.1.2 (B-type Certificate), e.g. inspection certificate3.1 as per EN 10204.

3.4.3 The material certificates of products for com-

ponents of 1st and 2nd order shall include specific

details on manufacturing method, composition, heattreatment, mechanical properties and marking.

3.4.4 Materials and products for 3rd order compo-nents may be certified non-specifically by the manu-facturer in accordance with the GL Rules for Princi-

ples and Test Procedures (II-1-1), Section 1, H.1.1 (C-type Certificate), e.g. test report 2.2 in accordancewith EN 10204. Corresponding equivalent certificatesmay be accepted.

3.5 Retesting

Where the certificates for materials or products areinsufficient, or their identification or correlation withthe test certificates is not properly possible, GL mayask for retests on the delivery under GL's supervi-sion.

Type and scope of the tests will be determined case bycase based on the Rules for Materials.

3.6 Marking

3.6.1 Materials and products are to be marked bythe manufacturer in such a way that a proper identifi-cation on the basis of the material certificates can bemade.

Materials and products which have been tested underGL's supervision also receive test stamps according toGL Rules for Principles and Test Procedures (II-1-1),Section 1, F.

3.6.2 Cast steel and forgings shall be marked withthe manufacturer's stamp, an abbreviation for the casttype and a mark or code number for the melting

charge (e.g. the last three digits of the melting chargenumber). Any additional markings are a matter ofagreement between customer and manufacturer of thematerial.

VI - Part 2GL 2012


C

http://gl_ii-1-1_e.pdf/




























D. Materials for Welded Components

1. General note

The following requirements apply to plates, profiles, bars and hollow sections, which are intended for the

manufacture of welded 1st and 2nd order loading gearand loose gear components.

2. Selection of materials

2.1 The criteria and provisions set out in B. areapplicable. Steel materials are to comply with therequirements in 3.

2.2 Products made of aluminium or aluminiumalloys shall comply with the GL Rules for Non-Ferrous Metals (II-1-3), Section 1, A. or the require-ments set out in the relevant standards or approvedmaterial specifications, respectively.

2.3 For design temperatures TE down to and

including -10 °C, the normal strength, higher strengthand high strength materials set out in the Tables 2.2,2.3 and 2.4 can be used, taking into consideration thethickness-related requirements for the material tough-ness

Table 2.2 Suitable materials for welded components in strength category "Normal strength"

Applicable product thickness for designtemperatures down to -10 °C

Components belonging to one of the order

categories set out in Table 2.1

Material groupGL Rules,

Material standard

Strength class or

steel grade,

respectively

1st order 2nd order 3rd order

GL-A ≤ 12,5 mm ≤ 25 mm

GL-B ≤ 25 mm ≤ 50 mm

GL-D ≤ 50 mm over 50 mm

normal strength hull

structural steels

GL Rules for

Materials (II-1-2),

Section 1, B.

GL-E over 50 mm n o p a r t i c u l a r

p r o v i s i o n s

Table 2.3 Suitable materials of strength category "Higher strength" for welded components

Applicable product thickness for design

temperatures down to -10 °C



Material group

GL Rules,

Material

standard

Strength class or steel

grade, respectively


GL-A32

GL-A36

GL-A40

≤ 25 mm ≤ 50 mm

GL-D32

GL-D36

GL-D40

≤ 50 mm over 50 mm

GL-E32

GL-E36

GL-E40

over 50 mm

higher strength hull

structural steels

GL Rules for

Materials (II-1-2),

Section 1, B.

GL-F32

GL-F36

GL-F40

over 50 mm

n o p

a r t i c u l a r p r o v i s i o n s

Chapter 2Page 2–4


D








Table 2.4 Suitable materials of strength category "High strength" for welded components

Applicable product thickness for design

temperatures down to -10 °C



Material groupGL Rules,

Material standard

Strength class or

steel grade,

respectively


GL-A420 / A460

GL-A500 / A550

GL-A620 / A690

≤ 25 mm ≤ 50 mm

GL-D420 / D460

GL-D500 / D550

GL-D620 / D690

≤ 50 mm ≤ 70 mm

GL-E420 / E460

GL-E500 / E550

GL-E620 / E690

≤ 70 mm

high strength steels

for weldedconstructions,

hull structural steels

GL Rules for

Materials (II-1-2),Section 1, B.2.1.2

GL-F420 / F460

GL-F500 / F550

GL-F620 / F690

≤ 70 mm

b y s p e c i a l a g r e e m e n t

Table 2.5 Percentage limits for the chemical composition of normal strength and higher strength carbon

and carbon manganese steels

C Si Mn P S Cr Mo Cu Ni Al Other

0,22 0,55 1,60 0,04 0,04 0,30 0,08 0,30 0,40 0,08 1

1 Nb max. 0,05 %, V max. 0,10 %, Ti max. 0,02 %

Nb + V + Ti max. 0,12 %

3. Requirements for steel materials forwelded components

3.1 Production method

The steels are to be produced in accordance with a

method approved by GL. The melting process shall be

made known to GL. The steels shall be cast fully killed.


3.2.1 For normal strength and higher strength car-

bon and carbon-manganese steels, the chemical composition shall not exceed the maximum content givenin Table 2.5 in the heat analysis.

3.2.2 For evaluation of the weldability or suscepti- bility to cold cracking, respectively, the carbonequivalent Cäq or the Pcm-value shall be determined

by the following equations:

[ ]äq

Mn Cr Mo V Ni CuC C %

6 5 15

+ + += + + +

[ ]cm

Si Mn Cu Ni Cr Mo VP C 5B %

30 20 20 60 20 15 10

= + + + + + + + +1

––––––––––––––1 Value for determining the preheating temperature and cold crack

sensitivity

The values determined by the above equations are notto exceed the values given in Table 2.6.

3.2.3 For high strength or alloyed steels, abovestrength class 460, the provisions of GL's approvedmaterial specifications apply.

3.3 Delivery condition and heat treatment

3.3.1 For normal strength and higher strength steelsthe provisions of the GL Rules for Steel and Iron Ma-terials (II-1-2), Section 1, B.5. or Section 1, B.2.1.2 apply, respectively.

3.3.2 High strength steels are to be delivered in principle in a heat-treated condition or treated by a GLapproved method, e.g. thermo-mechanically formedaccording to the GL Rules for Steel and Iron Materials(II-1-2), Section 1, B.5. or Section 1, D.3.3, respec-tively.

3.3.3 For austenitic, stainless steels, the provisionsof the GL Rules for Steel and Iron Materials (II-1-2),Section 1, B.2.1.2 apply.

VI - Part 2GL 2012


D





















Table 2.6 Weldability requirements

Carbon equivalent [%]Strength category Strength class

general TM-rolledPcm [%]

235 by specialagreementnormal strength

275

0,45

0,36

315 0,36

355 0,38higher strength

390

0,45

0,40

420 0,48 0,45

460 0,53 0,46high strength

over 460 by special agreement

by special

agreement

3.4 Mechanical properties

3.4.1 The requirements of the GL Rules for Steel and Iron Materials (II-1-2), Section 1, B.4.2, Section 1,C.5.2 or Section 1, D.3.4 apply, as well as the re-quirements of the relevant standards or approved ma-terial specifications.

3.4.2 The requirements relating to tensile strength,yield strength or 0,2 % proof stress, respectively,elongation and reduction in area at fracture are to be

verified by tests.

3.5 Impact energy

3.5.1 The requirements relating to impact energydepend on the category of order of the componentunder consideration, see B.2., the product thickness,the yield strength and the design temperature. Therequirements shall be determined in accordance withTables 2.8 and 2.9.

3.5.2 Material selection shall be made based on thematerial specification, such that the requirements can

be met by it. For design temperatures down to –10 °C,the applicable product thicknesses for normal strength,higher strength and high strength materials are givenin the Tables 2.2, 2.3 and 2.4.

3.5.3 The requirements relating to impact energy ofsteels apply similarly to components which are un-welded, tension-stressed, notched or otherwise sub-

jected to a 3-axial stress state and are to be verified as prescribed by tests with an ISO-V-specimen.

3.6 Characteristics in direction of thickness

Where steel plates and wide flats are required to haveenhanced properties in the direction of thickness, theGL Rules for Steel and Iron Materials (II-1-2), Section1, I. shall be observed.

3.7 Test of surface finish and dimensions

3.7.1 The requirements of the GL Rules for Steeland Iron Materials (II-1-2), Section 1, A.5. and A.6. orthe requirements of the relevant standards or approvedmaterial specifications, respectively, apply.

Compliance with the requirements is to be confirmed by the manufacturer of the material.

3.7.2 The manufacturer shall check the productswith respect to their external finish and dimensions.

Surface defects may be removed mechanically, weldrepairs are not permitted.

3.8 Non-destructive tests

3.8.1 Plates and wide flats with enhanced properties

in the direction of thickness shall be subjected to an ultra-sonic test. They shall meet the requirements of Test Class 2, laid down in the "Stahl-Eisen-Lieferbedingun-gen 072" or of Test Class S2/E3 according to EN 10160.

The test width of the rim zone depends on the prod-uct thickness, but should have a minimum width of50 mm.

3.8.2 Flats products with a product thickness of t ≥ 15 mm which are used for the manufacture of connec-

tion flanges and rings for 1st order components, shallundergo an ultrasonic surface test. They shall meet therequirements of Test Class 2, laid down in the "Stahl-Eisen-Lieferbedingungen 072" or of Test Class S2 inaccordance with EN 10160. The test grid used shallnot exceed 100 mm.

3.8.3 Connection flanges and rings made of flat

products with a product thickness t ≥ 40 mm shallundergo a non-destructive test according to F.3.6.

4. Proof of mechanical properties of pipes

The mechanical properties of pipes shall be certifiedin accordance with C.3.4.

Chapter 2Page 2–6


D












































Table 2.7 Requirements for impact energy

Impact energy KV 1 [J] min.Strength

categoryStrength class

longitudinal transverse

235 27 20normal strength 275 29 21

315 31 22

355 34 24higher strength

390 41 27

420 42 28

460 46 31

500 50 33

550 55 37

620 62 41

high strength 2

over 690 69 46

1 Mean value for 3 specimens. There may be one lower value but not less than 70 % of the mean value.

2 Up to 70 mm thickness, larger thicknesses upon special agreement.

Table 2.8 Test temperatures for the notched bar impact test (welded components)

Test temperature Tp [°C]

Components belonging to one of the order categories set out in Table 2.1Product thickness t [mm]


t ≤ 12,5 − 1 − 1

12,5 < t ≤ 25 T p = TE + 10 2 − 1

25 < t≤

50T

p = T

E – 10 T

p = T

E + 10

50 < t ≤ 70 T p = TE – 20 T p = TE + 10

over 50 T p = TE – 30 3 T p = TE – 10

No special provisions 1

1 The requirements stated in the GL Rules for Materials, Steel and Iron Materials (II-1-2), Section 1 or in the relevant standards or

approved material specifications apply

2 TE = design temperature

3 Generally, test temperatures below -60 °C are not required

E. Materials for Hydraulic Cylinders

1. General notes

1.1 The following provisions apply to pipes in-tended for the manufacture of cylinder jackets of 1stand 2nd order hydraulic cylinders.

1.2 Where cylinder jackets are manufacturedfrom flat products by rolling and fusion welding, therequirements of this Section apply as and where rele-vant to the basic material. In addition, the GL Rulesfor Welding shall be observed.


2.1 For the selection of material, the selection cri-teria and provisions laid down in B. apply. The selected

materials shall comply with the requirements in 3.

2.2 Special steels or pipes manufactured by coldrolling shall comply with a material specification

approved by GL.

3. Requirements


3.1.1 For the manufacture of welded hydrauliccylinders, carbon and carbon-manganese steels shall

preferably be used, the chemical composition of whichcomplies with the limit values set out in D.3.2. Thecarbon equivalent Cäq shall not exceed 0,45.

3.1.2 The requirements of the GL Rules for Steeland Iron Materials (II-1-2), Section 2, B.4.1 or Section2, D.3.1 apply, respectively.

VI - Part 2GL 2012


E













3.1.3 Compliance with the requirements is to beverified by the material manufacturer. Where the basematerial is not molten at the pipe manufacturer, themanufacturer's heat analysis of the base material can

be accepted. For special steels, the properties stated in

the approved specifications apply.


3.2.1 For welded hydraulic cylinders, the provi-sions of the GL Rules for Steel and Iron Materials (II-1-2), Section 2, B.3 or Section 2, D.2. apply.

3.2.2 For hydraulic cylinders which are not pro-duced by welding, cold-rolled pipes can be used up toa wall thickness of 15 mm and design temperaturesdown to and including –10 °C, if the requirementsrelating to impact energy set out in 3.5 are achievedand elongation A is 15 % as a minimum.


3.3.1 The requirements of the GL Rules for Steeland Iron Materials (II-1-2), Section 1, B.3.2 or therequirements of the relevant standards or approvedmaterial specifications apply, respectively.

3.3.2 The requirements relating to tensile strength,yield strength or 0,2 % proof stress, respectively,elongation and reduction in area at fracture are to beverified by tests.

3.3.3 Testing of the mechanical properties of 1st

order components is to be carried out in the presenceof a GL Surveyor.

3.4 Technological Test

3.4.1 Pipes with longitudinal weld seams andseamless pipes of grade GL-R 490 shall undergo oneof the ring test examinations specified in the GL Rulesfor Steel and Iron Materials (II-1-2), Section 2, A.8.5.

3.4.2 In the case of fusion-welded pipes with anouter diameter over 200 mm, a weld seam bend test inaccordance with the GL Rules for Design, Fabricationand Inspection of Welded Joints (II-3-2), Section 5, D.shall be carried out, applying a bending mandrel di-

ameter of 3 times wall thickness t.

3.5 Impact energy

3.5.1 The requirements relating to impact energydepend on the order category of the component underconsideration, see B.2., the product thickness and thedesign temperature and are to be verified by ISO-Vspecimen tests.

Testing of the mechanical properties of 1st order components is to be carried out in the presence of a GLSurveyor.

3.5.2 For product thicknesses up to and including25 mm, the GL Rules for Steel and Iron Materials (II-1-2), Section 2, B.3.4 apply, or the requirements of theother applicable standards or approved material speci-fications.

3.5.3 Unless otherwise specified, the materialsused shall have an impact energy of 41 J (longitudinalspecimen) or 27 J (transverse specimen) at a test tem-

perature as per Table 2.9.

3.5.4 For pipes manufactured by hot rolling up to a product thickness of 10 mm, the impact energy testmay be dispensed with. Below 6 mm an impact energytest is not generally required.


3.6.1 The requirements of the GL Rules for Steeland Iron Materials (II-1-2), Section 2, A.4. and A.5. and the requirements of the relevant standards or ap-

proved material specifications, respectively, apply.

Table 2.9 Test temperature for the notched bar impact test (hydraulic cylinders)

Test temperature Tp [°C]

Order categories of componentsProduct thickness t [mm]

1st order 2nd order

t ≤ 25 − 1 − 1

25 < t ≤ 50 T p = TE – 10 2 − 1

50 < t ≤ 70 T p = TE – 20 2 T p = TE – 10

over 50 T p = TE – 30 3 T p = TE – 10

1 The requirements stated in the GL Rules for Materials, Steel and Iron Materials (II-1-2), Section 2 or the requirements of the other

applicable standards or approved material specifications apply


3 Generally, test temperatures below -60 °C are not required

Chapter 2Page 2–8


E




































Compliance with the requirements shall be confirmed by the manufacturer of the material. Finally, pipes for

1st order cylinder jackets shall be submitted in theirdelivery condition to the Surveyor.

3.6.2 The manufacturer shall check the productswith respect to their external finish and dimensional

properties. Weld repairs are not allowed.

3.7 Non-destructive test

All pipes shall be subjected to non-destructive testsalong their total length according to the GL Rules forSteel and Iron Materials (II-1-2), Section 2, B.4.6. Thesuccess of the test shall be confirmed by the manufac-turer.

3.8 Tightness test

All pipes shall be tested for leaks by the manufacturer.The success of the test shall be confirmed by themanufacturer.

4. Proof of mechanical properties

4.1 Mechanical properties of pipes shall be certi-fied in accordance with C.3.4.

4.2 Based on a special approval, diverging from

C.3.4.1, proof of mechanical properties of 1st orderhydraulic cylinders may also be furnished by certify-ing in accordance with the GL Rules for Principlesand Test Procedures (II-1-1), Section 1, H.1.2 (B-typeCertificate), e.g. inspection certificate 3.1 as per EN10204.

F. Forgings

1. General notes

1.1 The provisions of this Section apply to steel

forgings and rolled or forged slewing rings as well asfor rolled or forged bars for piston rods of hydrauliccylinders. The slewing rings shall conform to a speci-fication approved by GL.

1.2 For rolled or forged bars for the manufactureof bolts and nuts with proof of mechanical propertiesthe requirements specified in H. apply.


For the selection of materials, the selection criteria and provisions stated in B. apply. Accordingly, slewing

rings are considered to be 1st order components.

The selected materials shall comply with the followingrequirements.

3. Requirements


3.1.1 The requirements of the GL Rules for Steeland Iron Materials (II-1-2), Section 3, B.4.1 apply.

For special steels and slewing rings the properties inthe approved specifications apply.

3.1.2 Where forgings are to be used in weldedstructures, preference is to be given to carbon andcarbon-manganese steels whose chemical compositionmeets the limit values stated in D.3.2. The carbonequivalent Cäq thereof shall not exceed 0,45.

3.1.3 Compliance with the requirements is to beverified by the manufacturer of the material. Wherethe base material is not molten at the forge shop, themanufacturer's heat analysis of the base material can

be accepted.


The provisions of the GL Rules for Steel and IronMaterials (II-1-2), Section 3, B.3 apply.


3.3.1 The requirements of the GL Rules for Steel

and Iron Materials (II-1-2), Section 3, B.4.2 and therequirements of the other relevant standards or ap-

proved material specifications apply, respectively.


3.3.3 Testing of the mechanical properties of 1st order components shall be carried out in the presenceof a GL Surveyor.

3.4 Impact energy

3.4.1 For design temperatures down to and includ-ing -10 °C, the requirements of the GL Rules for Steeland Iron Materials (II-1-2), Section 3, B.4.3 and therequirements of the other relevant standards or ap-


3.4.2 Unless otherwise specified, for design temperatures below -10 °C the requirements according toTable 2.10 apply.

3.4.3 The requirements related to impact energyare to be verified by tests with ISO-V specimens.Testing of the impact energy of 1st order componentsis to be carried out in the presence of a GL Surveyor.

VI - Part 2GL 2012


F





























Table 2.10 Impact energy requirements for forgings with design temperatures below -10 °C

Minimum impact energy

KV 1

[J]

Components belonging to one

of the order categories set out

in Table 2.1

longitudinal transverse

Test temperature

TP [°C]

1st order 41 (29) 27 (19) TE – 10 2

2nd order 41 (29) 27 (19) TE + 10

3rd order No special requirements 3

1 Mean value for 3 specimens. One individual value may be below the mean value, but not less than the individual values given in

brackets


3 The requirements stated in the GL Rules for Materials, Steel and Iron Materials (II-1-2), Section 3 or the requirements of the otherapplicable standards or approved material specifications apply


3.5.1 The manufacturer shall check the forgings atevery stage of the process with respect to their exter-nal finish and dimensional properties. Forging defectsshall be eliminated if they are not removed by thesubsequent mechanical treatment. Weld repairs are not

permitted.

3.5.2 Finally, forgings for 1st order componentsshall be submitted in the delivery condition to a GLSurveyor.


3.6.1 Forged or rolled rings shall be subjected to anultrasonic test by the manufacturer and, where appli-cable, also to a surface crack test. The tests shall becarried out in accordance with the GL Rules for Steel

and Iron Materials (II-1-2), Section 3, G.

3.6.2 The results of the non-destructive tests shall be documented by the manufacturer. The test reportsshall be presented to a GL Surveyor.


The mechanical properties of forgings shall be certi-fied in accordance with C.3.4. Diverging from this,

proof of the mechanical properties of slewing rings ofships' cranes of types A or B, and of bars for piston

rods, may be attested by a certificate in accordancewith the GL Rules for Principles and Test Procedures(II-1-1), Section 1, H.1.2, e.g. inspection certificate3.1 as per EN 10204.

G. Steel Castings

1. General notes

The provisions in this Section apply to steel castingsfor use in welded constructions.


For the selection of materials, the selection criteria and provisions stated in B. apply. The selected materialsare to comply with the following requirements.

3. Requirements


3.1.1 The requirements of the GL Rules for Steeland Iron Materials (II-1-2), Section 4, B.4.1 apply.

Compliance with the requirements is to be verified bythe manufacturer of the material by means of heatanalyses.

3.1.2 Where steel castings are to be used in weldedstructures, preference is to be given to carbon andcarbon-manganese steels whose chemical compositionmeets the limit values stated in D.3.2. The carbonequivalent Cäq thereof shall not exceed 0,45.

3.1.3 For alloyed steel castings, the propertiesstated in the approved specifications apply.


The requirements of the GL Rules for Steel and IronMaterials (II-1-2), Section 4, B.3 apply.



G
























3.3.1 The requirements of the GL Rules for Steeland Iron Materials (II-1-2), Section 4, B.4.2 and therequirements of the other relevant standards or ap-



3.3.3 Testing of the mechanical properties of 1st order components shall be carried out in the presenceof a GL Surveyor.

3.4 Impact energy

3.4.1 For design temperatures down to and in-cluding -10 °C the requirements of the GL Rules forSteel and Iron Materials (II-1-2), Section 4, B.4.3 and the requirements of the other relevant standardsor approved material specifications apply, respec-tively.

3.4.2 For design temperatures below –10 °C therequirements of Table 2.11 apply, unless otherwisespecified.

3.4.3 The requirements related to impact energyare to be verified by tests with ISO-V specimens.

Testing of the impact energy of 1st order components

shall be carried out in the presence of a GL Sur-veyor.


3.5.1 The manufacturer shall check the steel cast-ings with respect to their external finish and dimen-sional properties. Casting defects shall be eliminated,if they are not removed by the subsequent mechanicaltreatment. The GL Rules for Steel and Iron Materials(II-1-2), Section 4, A.13 are to be observed.

Repair of defects by means of welding requires approval by GL.

3.5.2 Finally, forgings for 1st order componentsshall be submitted in the delivery condition to a GLSurveyor


Steel castings for 1st order components shall be subjected to an ultrasonic test by the manufacturer and,where applicable, also to a surface crack test.

The tests are to be carried out in accordance with theGL Rules for Steel and Iron Materials (II-1-2), Section4, G. The test reports shall be presented to a GL Sur-veyor during the inspection of the steel castings.


The mechanical properties of the steel castings shall be certified in accordance with C.3.4.

Table 2.11 Impact energy requirements for steel castings for design temperatures below -10 °C

Components belonging

to one of the order categories

set out in Table 2.1

Minimum impact

energy

KV 1

[J]

Test temperature

TP [°C]

1st order 27 (19) TE – 10 2

2nd order 27 (19) TE + 10

3rd order no special requirements 3

1 Mean value for 3 specimens . One individual value may be below the mean value, but not less than the individual values given in

brackets


3 The requirements stated in the GL Rules for Material Steel and Iron Materials (II-1-2), Section 4 or the requirements of the other

applicable standards or approved material specifications apply

VI - Part 2GL 2012


G





















H. Bolts and Nuts

1. General note

The provisions of this Section apply to bolts and nuts,

and to non-alloyed and alloyed steel bars used in theirmanufacture. The scope includes all bolts and nuts

with nominal tensile strengths of > 600 N/mm2, forwhich a quality certificate is required.

2. Manufacture

2.1 Bolts and nuts can be produced by hot or coldforming, or by machining. Hot-formed and cold-formed bolts and nuts shall undergo heat treatment.

2.2 Heat treatment can be dispensed with in thecase of hot-formed bolts and nuts made of non-alloyed

steels, if they are to be used at normal ambienttemperatures in accordance with Table 2.12 and a uni-form structure is brought about by the hot-forming

process.

3. Requirements

3.1 Bolts and nuts shall comply with the re-quirements of the GL Rules for Steel and Iron Materi-als (II-1-2), Section 6, C.2. or with the requirements ofrecognized standards.

3.2 Notwithstanding 3.1, machining steels with

enhanced S-, P- or Pb contents may be used for boltsand nuts, provided that no requirements relating toheat resistance or impact strength at low temperaturesexist.


For the chemical composition, the requirements of theGL Rules for Steel and Iron Materials (II-1-2), Section6, C.4.1 apply. In addition, the carbon content of thesteels shall not exceed 0,55 %, as established by prod-

uct analysis.

3.4 Elongation at fracture

The elongation at fracture A shall conform to thecharacteristic values for the strength class or steelgrade. It shall in any case not be less than 8 % forferritic steels, or 30 % for austenitic steels.

3.5 Impact energy

The impact energy shall conform to the characteristicvalues of the steel grade, but shall, at a minimum,meet the requirements stated in Table 2.12.

3.6 Expansion (of nuts)

The expansion of ferritic steel nuts shall be at least 4 %

with non-machining forming processes, and at least 5 %

with machining methods. The expansion requirements

for austenitic steel nuts are to be specially specified.


Bolts used for the assembly of 1st order componentsare to be subjected to a crack test by the manufacturer.

The results of the non-destructive tests shall be docu-mented by the manufacturer.


The mechanical properties of bolts and nuts are to becertified in accordance with C.3.4.

Table 2.12 Impact energy requirements for bolts and nuts

Minimum impact energyService or design

temperature 1

Steel grade or

nominal tensile

strengthKV

[J]

KU

[J]

Test temperature

Tp [°C]

< 800 N/mm2 32 30

≥ 800 N/mm2 32 30

≥ 1000 N/mm2 25 25 f e r r i t i c

≥ 1200 N/mm2 18 20

-10 °C

austenitic 41 −

alloyed and tempered 41 −

non-alloyed 41 −

+20 °C

Below -10 °C to -55 °C all 41 − 10 °C below lowest design

temperature

1 at increased temp.. > +50 °C

- alloyed and tempered: KV 52 J – Tp +20 °C



H













Section 3

Design and Calculation Principles

A. General

1. This Section contains provisions of generalvalidity governing the design and calculation of load-ing gear on seagoing ships and offshore installations.

The special provisions contained in the followingSections of these Rules for Loading Gear are to beobserved additionally or with priority, respectively.

2. Calculations acc. to established calculation principles or standards, e.g. acc. to EN 13001 or EN13852, may be accepted, if the particular properties ofseagoing ships, as stated in these Rules, have beentaken into consideration.

B. Design Principles

1. General notes

1.1 Prerequisites for the design

1.1.1 Determination and specification of the oper-ating and seagoing conditions on which the design is

based are in principle the responsibility of the cus-tomer and the manufacturer. The shipyard is to beconsulted as well. The specifications decided upon areof considerable importance for the reliable operationand expected service life.

1.1.2 The intended use of ships and loading gear,the shipping routes and the operational area, high ship

speeds and the shape of the ship's hull are to be con-sidered as required.

1.2 Design criteria for operating loading gear

Essential design criteria, in addition to the statementsin 2. to 5., are in particular:

– the total service life, i.e. the number of loadingcycles within the expected service life

– the loading condition, i.e. the relative or per-centage frequency at which the various hoistloads are reached or exceeded in the total ser-vice life

– the type of service, e.g. operation as generalcargo, grab or offshore crane

1.3 Design criteria for the status "out of op-eration"

1.3.1 Essential criteria for the design are, in rela-tion to 1.2, increased inclinations of the supportingstructure and increased wind loads, as well as shipaccelerations.

1.3.2 In particular cases, loads caused by vibrationsare to be considered which may be generated e.g. by

ship machinery or seagoing influences.

2. Environmental conditions

2.1 Special attention is to be given to the opera-tion site, weather conditions, humidity, dust, aggres-sive media, oil and salt-bearing air, exhaust gases andexhaust gas heat, vibrations, etc., if known or speci-fied by contract.

2.2 Machinery and electrical installations are to be dimensioned with respect to temperature and hu-midity at least for the following limit values, if no

stricter limit values are specified:

a) in enclosed spaces

– air temperature: 0 °C to +45 °C

– relative air humidity: 80 %

b) on the open deck

– air temperature: –25 °C to +45 °C

– relative air humidity: 80 % and influenceof salt spray

2.3 Vibrations are in general not part of dimen-sioning of the loading gear. Where loading gear is

prone to vibrations, vibration analyses are to be per-formed.

2.4 Where necessary, manufacturer, ship yard oroperator have to specify the environmental conditionsin particular.

3. Design temperature

3.1 Definitions

3.1.1 The design temperature is the mean value ofthe lowest daily average temperature in the operationalarea of the crane. The definitions of 3.1.2 to 3.1.4apply

VI - Part 2GL 2012

Section 3 Design and Calculation Principles Chapter 2Page 3–1

B



3.1.2 The daily average temperature is the meanvalue of day and night temperature.

3.1.3 The lowest daily average temperature is thelowest value of daily average temperature measured

during one year.

Where the duration of operation is limited with respectto seasons of the year, the lowest value of daily aver-age temperature measured during the period of opera-tion is to be used.

3.1.4 The mean value of the lowest daily averagetemperature is the statistical mean value measuredduring an observation period of at least 20 years.

3.2 Ship loading gear

3.2.1 The design temperature which is, amongstother things, decisive for the material selection, shall

be at least – 10 °C.

3.2.2 Where the design temperature is specified below – 10 °C, this has to be explicitly noted by theshipyard or the manufacturer of the loading gear inthe drawings or further documents submitted to GLfor approval. It also has to be considered with respectto material selection and processing (welding) as wellas with respect to dimensioning of systems sensitive tolow temperatures.

3.2.3 In extreme cases loading gear may be oper-ated at an environmental temperature which is lowerthan design temperature. In this case, the followingconditions are to be complied with:

– The environmental temperature shall not be lessthan 20 °C below design temperature and

– the environmental temperature shall not be lessthan the permissible low temperature. The per-missible low temperature is the temperature be-low which the average air temperature overmany years does not fall on more than 9 days

per year (2,5 % of the days per year).

3.3 Offshore loading gear

3.3.1 The provisions of 3.2 also apply to offshoreloading gear, with the statements in 3.3.2 being takeninto consideration.

3.3.2 Loading gear on offshore installations are to be dimensioned for the same environmental conditionsas the installation itself, i.e. for the same design tem-

perature.

3.4 Floating cranes

The provisions of 3.2 also apply to floating cranes.

4. Load assumptions

4.1 General notes

4.1.1 Ship loading gear is subject to other and partly greater loads than loading gear onshore. Thisincludes amongst others ship inclinations, seagoingaccelerations as well as increased wind loads.

4.1.2 For the design, in principle all loads are to beconsidered which act upon the loading gear in the"out of operation" state.

4.1.3 The design as well as the calculation anddimensioning of all loading gear is to be based on thefollowing load assumptions, if applicable.

4.1.4 The following Sections of these Rules forLoading Gear may contain further load assumptionswhich are then to be observed additionally or given

preference where applicable, for the loading gearunder consideration.

4.1.5 Where loading gear is exposed to specialloads which are not stated in these Rules for LoadingGear, then these are to be taken as a basis for designand dimensioning.

Special loads are to be indicated expressly by theshipyard or manufacturer of the loading gear in thedrawings or other documents submitted to GL forapproval. Regarding the proof acc. to C.8., the partialsafety factor to be considered is to be agreed with GL.

4.2 Dead loads

4.2.1 Dead loads acc. to Section 1, C.11. are to becalculated using recognized standards such as e.g. EN1991-1-1, or are to be determined by weighing.

4.2.2 Dead loads are calculated by multiplying themass by the acceleration of gravity g = 9,81 m/s².

4.3 Dynamic forces

4.3.1 Dynamic forces due to drives

4.3.1.1 The acceleration of loading gear componentsand/or useful loads due to drives generates positive ornegative dynamic forces, depending on definition,which are to be calculated as follows:

force [N] = mass [kg] · acceleration [m/s2]

4.3.1.2 Braking forces due to drives are to be as-sumed as negative dynamic forces.

4.3.1.3 Dynamic forces due to drives may normally be assumed as quasi-static loads. They are specified inSection 4, C.2.4 as dimensioning loads.

Chapter 2Page 3–2

Section 3 Design and Calculation Principles VI - Part 2GL 2012

B



4.3.2 Seagoing dynamic forces

4.3.2.1 Horizontal dynamic forces due to motions ofa floating body are to be considered for loading gearused in sea or offshore operations in accordance with

the method described in Section 4, C.2.5.

4.3.2.2 Vertical dynamic forces due to motions of afloating body are to be considered if the calculation ismade in acc. with Section 4, C.2.5.1. If Annex A isapplied, they are included in the method used therein;if Table 4.2 is applied, they may be ignored.

4.3.2.3 Seagoing dynamic forces may be assumed asquasi-static loads.

4.4 Inclinations of the supporting structure

4.4.1 Loading gear in operation

4.4.1.1 Loading gear is to be dimensioned for opera-tion at the static minimum inclinations acc. to Table3.1.

Exceptions from this provision are defined in 4.4.1.6.

4.4.1.2 Dynamic loads due to motions of the support-ing structure are to be considered in acc. with Section4, C.2.5.

4.4.1.3 Static inclinations α (= heel) and β (= trim)are to be assumed to be acting simultaneously.

4.4.1.4 Simplifying, it may be assumed that heel andtrim are superimposed as follows:

2 2ε ≈ α + β

The resulting angle ε is to be assumed to have themost unfavourable direction.

Table 3.1 Static minimum inclinations

Static minimum inclinationType of floating

bodyHeel angle Trim angle

Ships and similar

floating bodies 1 ± 5° ± 2°

Pontoons / barges ± 3° ± 2°

Floating docks ± 2° ± 2°

Semisubmersibles ± 3° ± 3°

Fixed platforms ± 1° ± 1°

1 To be applied also for floating storage and offloading vessels(FSOs) or floating production, storage and offloading units

(FPSOs)

4.4.1.5 The values of Table 3.1 assume sufficientstability of the floating body. Where larger inclina-tions are to be expected during crane operation, thenthese are to be taken as the basis.

4.4.1.6 In special cases, to be proven by measure-ments or calculations, the values may be lower thanthose in Table 3.1.

For dimensioning, the ship inclinations which aredetermined are to be increased by 1 ° heel and 0,5 °trim.

4.4.2 Loading gear out of operation.

4.4.2.1 For the calculation of dynamic forces in the"out of operation" state, the dynamic ship inclinationsas well as the respective ship accelerations are to beobserved.

For this purpose, the dynamic ship inclinations acc, toAnnex A, Table A.1 are to be assumed

4.4.2.2 Simplifying, the calculation of dynamic

forces may be performed acc. to Annex A.

4.5 Wind loads

4.5.1 General notes

4.5.1.1 Ship and offshore loading gear shall in gen-eral only be operated up to a mean wind speed ofapproximately 80 % of the dimensioning wind speed.

At higher wind speeds, the loading gear is to be takenout of operation and to be stowed in the stowing posi-tion.

4.5.1.2 Simplifying, the statements in 4.5.2 and 4.5.3are based on a constant mean wind speed acting in anyassumed direction and height.

4.5.1.3 Static or dynamic calculations of wind loadsin accordance with recognized rules or standards, orcalculations with suitable wind load parameters, may

be accepted by GL

4.5.2 Calculation of wind load

The wind load LW acting on a structure is to be as-sumed to have the most unfavourable direction and is

to be calculated using the following formula:

W f wL q c A= ⋅ ⋅ [N]

q =6,1

v2

[N/m2] (dynamic pressure)

v = wind speed acc. to 4.5.3 [m/s]

cf = form coefficient acc. to 4.5.4

Aw = wind area

4.5.3 Wind speeds

4.5.3.1 The determination of wind load is to be basedon the wind speeds acc. to Table 3.2.

VI - Part 2GL 2012


B



Table 3.2 Wind speeds

Wind speedMode of operation

of the loading gear in operation out of operation

Ship loading gear

at harbour operation 20 m/s 50 m/s 1

Ship loading gearat sea operation

25 m/s 50 m/s 1

Offshore loading gear 25 m/s 63 m/s

1 Not to apply for topped cranes

4.5.3.2 For topped ship cranes out of operation, thewind speed is to be calculated as a function of heightacc. to the following formula:

[ ]0,15

hv = 44 50 m/s

10

⎛ ⎞⋅ ≥⎜ ⎟⎝ ⎠

L

hL = height of the centre of area of the crane

boom above waterline [m]

4.5.3.3 The wind speed v is assumed to be constantalong the height.

4.5.3.4 Floating cranes are to be treated like ship'sloading gear.

4.5.4 Form coefficients

The form coefficients may be determined acc. toAnnex B or simplified as follows:

cf = 1,6 for rolled profiles and box girders

cf = 1,3 for rectangular areas of closed super

structures like e.g. engine houses

cf = 1,2 for cylindrical structural elements

4.5.5 Wind areas located behind one another

The wind loads of areas located behind one another may

be determined acc. to Annex B or simplified as follows:

For wind loads of areas located behind one another,the wind load of the respective area lying behind may

be assumed to be 75 % of the area lying in front. From

the 9th area onwards, the wind load remains constantat 10 %.

4.5.6 Wind load on the useful load

4.5.6.1 The wind load acting on the useful load is to be calculated acc. to 4.5.2, based on the largest windarea of the useful load and acting in the most unfa-vourable direction.

4.5.6.2 Where a more precise information on theuseful load is not available, the wind load may becalculated using the following values for cf · Aw:

N f w N

L 50 t : c A 1, 2 L≤ ⋅ = ⋅ [m2]

N f w NL 50 t : c A 8,5 L> ⋅ = ⋅ [m2]

L N = useful load [t]

4.6 Snow and ice loads

4.6.1 The manufacturer has to specify by agree-ment with the client. if, and to what extent, snow andice loads are to be considered for individual operating

conditions. Generally, cranes with ice accretion shallnot be operated.

4.6.2 Where ice accretion is to be considered, andno empiric or specified values are available, simpli-fied, a general ice accretion of 3 cm thickness may beassumed for all parts of the construction which areexposed to the weather conditions.

4.6.3 The specific weight of the ice is assumed to

be 700 kg/m3. the specific weight of snow is assumed

to be 200 kg/m3.

4.6.4 In the case of ice load, the wind load is to be

related to the area increased by ice accretion.

4.7 Loads due to temperature

Parts of the structure or other structural elementswhich cannot expand or contract freely shall beavoided, if possible. Otherwise, the lower and uppertemperature is to be agreed with GL and the tempera-ture loads are to be considered in the calculatedstrength analyses.

5. Special provisions

5.1 Conveyance of persons in the harbour

The following provisions imply safety devices whichare required in principle in Sections 9, 10 and 12 suchas e.g.

– emergency shut-down switches or buttons

– control elements return automatically to theneutral position

– load and load moment reducing motions whensafety devices apply

5.1.1 The nominal load (L Ne)of loading gear for the

conveyance of persons shall be at least twice the sumof the dead load and nominal load for the means of

conveyance of persons used.

5.1.2 The maximum lowering and hoisting speedfor the conveyance of persons shall not exceed 0,5m/s. The control system shall be capable of observingthis speed limitation.

5.1.3 At a lowering speed of more than 0,3 m/s, thecontrol system shall be capable of setting-down gentlythe means of conveying persons.

5.1.4 Means of conveying persons are to be at-

tached to the loading gear by secured shackles or otherapproved fixed connections. Hinged fasteners (e.g.spring-loaded) or handling means of conveyance of

persons using crane loading hooks are not permissible.

Chapter 2Page 3–4


B



Hooks which automatically release life-saving appli-ances are also not permissible.

5.1.5 Hoisting and luffing winches of loading gearfor conveying persons are to be equipped with a me-

chanical second brake. The second brake shall beindependent of the primary brake.

5.1.6 If hydraulic cylinders are used for luffing,knuckling or telescoping of the boom, they have to beequipped with redundant hydraulic restriction systems.Alternatively two independent hydraulic cylinders can

be used of which each single one shall be capable tohold the nominal load resulting from the conveyanceof persons, if the other hydraulic cylinder fails.

5.1.7 Special devices shall be provided to rescue passengers from a means of conveying persons in case

of the failure of the drive.

5.2 Conveyance of personnel at sea

For the conveyance of personnel at sea the provisionsof 5.1 apply, with the exception of 5.1.2 and 5.1.3. Inaddition the following provisions are to be observed:

5.2.1 Aside from an emergency, the followingenvironmental conditions are to be adhered to unlessdeviating conditions are agreed upon:

– average wind speed : ≤ 10 m/s

– significant wave height : ≤ 2 m

– visibility conditions : daylight

5.2.2 Offshore cranes and, if provided for the con-veyance of personnel, also shipboard cranes for opera-tions at sea, shall be equipped with a manual switchwhich allows switching between "normal operation"and "conveyance of personnel".

5.2.3 Cranes according to 5.2.2 shall comply withthe following conditions in the "conveyance of per-sonnel" mode, if applicable:

– automatic de-activation of safety systems forrelease of the cargo runner (emergency systemfor hooking on of cargo hooks)

– automatic de-activation of active or passive heavecompensators. These are, however, permissiblefor the handling of work boats, if they are ad-

justed to these boats.

– in addition to the main power supply an emer-gency power supply shall be available to ensuremain functions of the crane (lifting, luffing,slewing, telescoping and knuckling) at a mini-

mum speed of 10 % of the nominal operationalspeed in the mode "conveyance of personnel".Exceptions (e.g. very large cranes) are individu-ally to be agreed with GL.

5.3 Sea lashing

5.3.1 All mobile parts of loading gear, such asderricks, crane booms, trolleys, gantries etc., shallhave a special park and stowage position, where they

can be lashed to be seaworthy.Exceptions like e.g. free hanging or topped crane

booms require approval by GL case by case.

5.3.2 Special stowage positions are to be providedfor mobile loading gear. They are to be selected suchthat the prospective loads, like e.g. ship accelerations,wind and wash, are minimized.

5.3.3 The loading gear, as well as their support andlashing devices, shall be sufficiently dimensioned forthe loads in the "out of operation" state.

C. Calculation principles

1. Basic requirements

1.1 All strength analyses shall correspond togenerally recognized rules of statics, dynamics andstrength of materials.

1.2 Details on system measurements, sections,materials used etc. in the drawings shall agree with the

corresponding calculations.

1.3 Mobile loads are to be assumed in the mostunfavourable positions for the structural element con-sidered.

1.4 Where, non-linear relations, inherent to thesystem, exist between loads and stresses, the stressdetermination is to be performed acc. to the 2nd order

theory for γ p-fold loads with consideration of defor-

mations.

1.5 Calculations acc. to 2nd order theory are to

be based on a reduced value for dimensioning theYoung's modulus:

Ed = Ek / γm

Ed = dimensioning value of Young's modulus

Ek = significant value of the Young's modulus

γm = partial safety factor for resistance values acc. to

8.4.3

Explanations on this can be found in 8.1 and 8.2.

2. Proofs required

2.1 Normally, the following proofs are to besubmitted for all loading gear:

VI - Part 2GL 2012


C



– proof of structural safety acc. to D.

– proof of stability acc. to E.

– proof of fatigue strength acc. to F.

– proof of suitability for use acc. to G.

2.2 The following Sections of these Rules forLoading Gear may contain more detailed and/or addi-tional information on proofs required for the loadinggear considered there.

3. Materials

3.1 General notes

3.1.1 The materials intended for use are to be indi-cated in the calculation.

3.1.2 Tables 2.2 to 2.4 in Section 2 show a selec-tion of steels generally approved by GL for plates and

profiles.

Other steels may be approved.

3.1.3 Regarding the materials for machinery ele-ments, axes, shafts, bolts etc. as well as for non-ferrous metals, the GL Rules for materials apply, seeSection 1, B.2.1.2.

3.1.4 Regarding bolts and nuts, the provisions inSection 2, H. apply.

3.2 Calculated yield strength

3.2.1 General notes

3.2.1.1 The strength analyses acc. to these Rules forLoading Gear refer as a failure criterium to the yieldstrength of the material.

3.2.1.2 For metallic materials without significant yieldstrength R eH, the yield strength R p0,2 is used instead.

3.2.1.3 To avoid brittle fracture, the materials usedshall be sufficiently ductile.

This means that the failure of a structural element dueto overload may possibly be indicated sooner by large plastic deformations.

3.2.1.4 For less ductile materials with a small ratio oftensile strength R m over yield strength R eH, additional

safety against reaching or exceeding the tensilestrength is stipulated.

This is achieved in strength analyses by taking intoconsideration a reduced value for the yield strength –the calculated yield strength f yr .

3.2.2 Steels

3.2.2.1 The calculated yield strength f yr is deter-

mined as follows:

f yr = 0,83 · R m ≤ R eH (or. ≤ R p 0,2)

R m = tensile strength [N/mm2]

R eH = yield strength [N/mm2]

R p 0,2 = 0,2 %-yield strength [N/mm2]

3.2.2.2 Where austenitic steels are used with a ratio

R p 0,2/R m ≤ 0,5,, subject to special approval by GL,for

dimensioning, the 1 %-yield strength R p 1,0 may by

applied instead of R p 0,2 .

3.2.3 Aluminium alloys

3.2.3.1 If aluminium alloys suitable for seawater,stated in the GL Rules for Materials are used, the yieldstrength is calculated as follows:

f yr = 0,37 · (R p 0,2 + R m) ≤ R p 0,2

R m = tensile strength [N/mm²]

R p 0,2 = 0,2 %-yield strength [N/mm²]

3.2.3.2 In the case of welded connections, the respec-tive mechanical properties in the welded condition areto be assumed. If these values are not available, thecorresponding values in the soft condition are to beassumed.

4. Section values

4.1 Hole weakening by bolts

4.1.1 The sections to be considered are the netsections (including hole deduction) for all structuralelements stressed by tension.

4.1.2 A calculated deduction due to holes may bedispensed with for all sections stressed by pressureand shear, if:

– the maximum hole clearance is 1 mm and

– the deformations of the structure are not to belimited.

4.1.3 Where the conditions acc. to 4.1.2 are complied

with, the section values of sections which are subject to

bending, may be determined, simplified, as follows:

For the tension side, the net section and for the compression side, the gross section, is to be taken. For thecentre of gravity, the centre of gravity of the grosssection is to be assumed.

4.1.4 Elastic deformations are normally to be de-termined using the gross sections.

4.2 Effective breadth of plating

When determining section values, the effective

breadth of plating is to be taken into consideration, ifnecessary. The calculation of the effective breadth of

plating may e.g. be conducted in acc. with Eurocode 3(EN 1993-1-5).

Chapter 2Page 3–6


C



5. Particularities

5.1 Local stresses

The local stresses in the area of force transmissions and

discontinuities such as e.g. diversions of force, steps of

a section, cut-outs etc., see Fig. 3.1, are to be proven

separately and superimposed on the global stresses.

Notes regarding local stresses due to wheel loads may be taken from I.5.

5.2 Tie rods

Tie rods which may be subject to compressive stressesdue to small deviations from the regular load assump-tions, are to be proven in the same way as compres-sion members.

6. Verification procedures

6.1 General note

In these Rules, the methods of "permissible stresses"and "partial safety factors" are allowed to be used forverification.

6.2 Method of permissible stresses

The method of permissible stresses is not generallyapplicable and therefore shall not be used if one ormore of the following structural characteristics exist:

a) non-linearity between loads and stresses (compres-sion-stressed structural elements with major defor-

mations requiring proof acc. to 2nd order theory)

b) dead loads with a favourable effect (counter-weights / overhanging engine houses)

c) pre-stresses due to:

– weights (besides b), in particular mobileweights)

– ropes / tension elements

– bolts (in general, only relevant in special cases)

d) loading gear is not fixed and stability againstturn-over has not been proven by tests

6.3 Partial safety factor method

The partial safety factors method is generally applicable. It enables weighting of different loads and is thestandard proof of these Rules.

7. Proof by the method of permissible stresses

7.1 General notes

7.1.1 The method of permissible stresses is only

applicable under certain prerequisites. It is regarded to be a "special case" within the method of partial safetyfactors, see 6.2 and 6.3.

7.1.2 Depending on the type of design, differing

results are possible with the two methods of proof. Therefore, GL reserves the right, in individual cases, to

apply a proof using the method of partial safety factors.

7.2 Proof formats

Without partial safety factors, the following proofformats exist:

yr zul

S

f

σ = γ

yr zul

S

f

3τ =

γ ⋅

Fig. 3.1 Examples for local force transmissions and discontinuities

VI - Part 2GL 2012


C



f yr = calculated yield strength acc. to 3.2

γS = global safety factor, depending on the load

combinations acc. to Section 4, Tables 4.4 und 4.5.

load combination I : γS = 1,48

load combination II : γS = 1,34

load combination III: γS = 1,22

8. Proof by the method of partial safety fac-tors

8.1 General notes

The method of partial safety factors distinguishes

between safety factors γm relating to resistance values

and safety factors γP relating to loads.

8.2 Definitions

8.2.1 Loads

8.2.1.1 Loads is the term for all external influenceswhich impact on a structure.

8.2.1.2 Loads can e.g. be dead loads, hoisting loads,dynamic loads, temperature changes or enforced de-formations.

8.2.1.3 The loads to be considered in each individualcase are regulated in the following Sections for the

respective loading gear.

8.2.2 Stresses

8.2.2.1 Stresses is the term for the effects of loads ona structure.

8.2.2.2 Stresses can e.g. be stresses and deforma-tions.

8.2.2.3 Stresses are marked by the index "S“.

8.2.3 Load bearing capacities

8.2.3.1 Load bearing capacities is the term for the

permissible limit values of a stress.

8.2.3.2 Load bearing capacities are marked by theindex "R“.

8.2.4 Resistance values

Resistance values are material properties like e.g.yield strength, tensile strength and Young's modulus,

by which e.g. load bearing capacities and stiffness ofcross-sections are calculated.

8.2.5 Characteristic values

8.2.5.1 Characteristic values of loads or resistancevalues do not include safety factors.

8.2.5.2 Characteristic values are marked by the index"k".

8.2.6 Dimensioning values

8.2.6.1 Dimensioning values of loads L are the char-acteristic values, increased by the partial safety factor

γP:

Ld = γP · Lk

8.2.6.2 Dimensioning values of resistance valuesWG are the characteristic values, reduced by the par-

tial safety factor γm:

WGd = WGk / γm

8.2.6.3 Dimensioning values are marked by the index"d“.

8.3 General proof format

In general, the degree of utilization (stress/utilizationratio) is to be calculated. The proof is demonstrated ifthe degree of utilization is not larger than 100 %.

As an alternative, stress and utilization can be compared directly. The proof is demonstrated if the stressis not larger than the utilization.

Sd / R d ≤ 1 or Sd ≤ R d

Sd = dimensioning value of load, determined from

the impacts multiplied by varying partial safety

factors γP

R d = dimensioning value of load bearing capacity,

determined from the resistance values, divided

by the partial safety factor γm

8.4 Partial safety factors

8.4.1 For the calculation, the loads which loadinggear is exposed to, are increased by partial safetyfactors of varying magnitude.

8.4.2 The partial safety factors for loads are givenin Section 4, together with the load combinations to be

verified.

8.4.3 The partial safety factor for resistance values

γm is always:

γm = 1,10

unless stated otherwise in individual cases.

8.5 Load combinations

8.5.1 Loads acting simultaneously acc. to B.4., areto be increased by the partial safety factors acc. to 8.4and to be superimposed in load combinations.

8.5.2 Notes and explanations regarding load combinations are given in the following Sections in con-nection with the required proofs.

Chapter 2Page 3–8


C



D. Proof of Structural Safety

1. General notes

1.1 The following statements shall be observed

for load bearing structural elements made of steel andaluminium, as well as for special machinery elements

1.2 Calculation and dimensioning of machineryelements which are not dealt with, may be performedusing recognized standards or generally recognizedtechnology rules.

2. Scope of proofs

2.1 General notes

2.1.1 The ultimate strength analysis consists of two partial proofs:

– the general stress analysis acc. to 2.2 and

– the proof of stability acc. to 2.3

2.1.2 The internal forces and moments on whichthe proof of the structural element being considered,cross-section or a weld/bolt are based, shall include allimpacting static and dynamic load components.

2.1.3 The proofs of structural safety are to beshown in each case for the most unfavourable loadcombination acc. to C.8.5.

2.1.4 If load combinations are not taken into con-sideration or proofs not carried out, this is to be sub-

stantiated in writing, unless the reasons for doing soare obvious.

2.2 General stress analysis

The general stress analysis is the proof of safetyagainst reaching the calculated yield strength acc. toC.3.2.

2.2.1 General notes

2.2.1.1

The designations of axes of structural elements used inthese Rules, as well as forces and moments which may

have an impact on a structural element, are illustratedin Fig. 3.2.

Fig. 3.2 Axes of structural elements and possible

loads

Fx,y,z = Force in direction of the respective axis

[N]

Mx,y,z = Moment around the respective axis [Nmm]

σx,y = Normal stress in direction of the respectiveaxis [N/mm2]

τ = Shear stress [N/mm2]

2.2.2 Equivalent stresses

2.2.2.1 Where normal and shear stresses act simulta-neously in a cross-section, the equivalent stress σv is

to be calculated from the respective allocated stresses.

Spatially oriented stresses are to be broken down to

the co-ordinate system acc. to Fig. 3.2.

2.2.2.2 Generally, the equivalent stress σv

is to becalculated acc. to the distortion energy theory

(v. MISES) as follows:

2 2 2 2 2 2v x y z x y x z y z xy xz yz3 3 3σ = σ +σ +σ −σ ⋅σ −σ ⋅σ −σ ⋅σ + ⋅ τ + ⋅ τ + ⋅ τ

2.2.2.3 In the case of biaxial stresses, the calculation

of σv is simplified as follows:

2yx

2y

2xv 3 τ⋅+σ⋅σ−σ+σ=σ

2.2.2.4 In the case of uniaxial stresses, the calcula-tion of σv is simplified as follows:

22v 3 τ⋅+σ=σ

2.2.3 Format of the strength analysis

2.2.3.1 The strength analysis is to be performed for both the individual stress components as well as theequivalent stresses, analogous to C.8.3 as follows:

σSd / σRd ≤ 1 σSd ≤ σRd

τSd / τRd ≤ 1 or τSd ≤ τRdσv.Sd / σRd ≤ 1 σv,Sd ≤ σRd

σSd dimensioning values of the stresses (loads)

τSd based on the impacts multiplied by σv,Sd partial safety factors γP.

yr Rd

m

f σ =

γ

yr Rd

m

f

3τ =

γ ⋅

f yr = calculated yield strength C.3.2

γm = partial safety factor acc. to C.8.4.3

dimensioning values of the per-missible stresses (load bearingcapacity)

VI - Part 2GL 2012


D



2.2.3.2 Where more accurate strength analyses acc.to recognized calculation methods, e.g. acc. to themethod of finite elements are conducted or where testresults exist, GL may, depending on the facts, agree toan increase of the locally permissible stresses.

2.3 Proof of stability

2.3.1 Proof of calculated safety against lateral buckling, lateral torsional buckling or buckling is to beconducted acc. to a recognized calculation principle orstandard for all essential combinations of loads.

2.3.2 Proofs of stability for steel constructions may be conducted acc. to Eurocode 3 (EN 1993-1-1, EN1993-1-3, EN 1993-1-5, EN 1993-1-7).

2.3.3 Proofs of stability for aluminium alloy con-

structions may be conducted acc. to Eurocode 9 (EN

1999-1-1, EN 1999-1-4, EN 1999-1-5).

2.3.4 Proofs of stability for constructions made ofaustenitic steel may be conducted acc. to Eurocode 3(EN 1993-1-4).

2.3.5 When applying Eurocodes for stability proofs, the following is to be taken into consideration:

– Instead of safety factor γM1 according to the

Eurocode, the value γm acc. to C.8.4.3 is to be

used. – Instead of the yield strength, the calculated yield

strength f yr acc. to C.3.2 is to be used.

E. Proof of safety against overturning

1. General notes

1.1 Loading gear and parts of loading gear not

connected integrally to the residual structure, are to besufficiently safe against overturning at all times.

For mobile loading gear, also whereat operating on acircular track, safety against overturning is to be prov-en in all cases.

1.2 Safety against overturning of loading gear isa measure of its resistance to overturning and driftinge.g. by wind and/or inclinations of the supportingstructure.

The many factors which influence safety against over-turning in the longitudinal and transverse directions

include dead load and dead load distribution, trackgauge, wheel base, Safe Working Load and load ra-dius, motor and braking power, and the deformationswhich occur under load.

1.3 Loading gear which travels on rails shall beequipped with devices to prevent overturning, andshall generally be stable even without such devices.

1.4 Proof of safety against overturning ensures

safe working, if the equipment is normally and care-fully operated.

It should be noted that the danger of overturning aris-ing from inexpert or incorrect operation cannot be precluded, no matter how stringent the conditions for proof of safety against overturning.

2. Proof of safety against overturning

With regard to safety against overturning, a distinctionis made between loading gear on rails and fork lifttrucks.

Where the danger of overturning exists for parts ofnon- mobile loading gear, the proof is to be demon-strated analogously to 2.1.

2.1 Loading gear on rails

2.1.1 Mathematical proof is regarded as sufficientfor the safety against overturning of loading gear onrails.

This proof is to be conducted using the method of partial safety factors acc. to C.8.

Thereby the partial safety factors for loads acc. to

C.8. are generally to be considered.

2.1.2 Loading gear is deemed to be sufficientlysafe against overturning if - relative to the respectivemost unfavourable tilting edge - in the most unfavour-able proof and in consideration of the partial safetyfactors, the sum of restoring moments is larger thanthe sum of overturning moments.

The following condition is to be observed:

0,1M

M

Ki

St≥

∑

∑

∑ StM = sum of restoring moments

∑ KiM = sum of overturning moments

2.1.3 Where desirable or necessary, e.g. in the caseof existing lifting appliances, proof of safety againstoverturning may also be provided by a special loadingtest.

This test shall in each case be agreed with GL, whowill also determine the magnitude of the test load and

the nature of the test (static and/or dynamic).

2.1.4 Devices to prevent overturning are to bedimensioned for the overturning moment which would



E



result from twice the static hoist load, or where liftingappliances without prevention devices are not safeagainst overturning, in accordance with the forcesoccurring in operation.

2.2 Fork lift trucks

2.2.1 The safety against overturning of fork lifttrucks shall be determined on an inclinable platformfor each new type.

On the basis of the results obtained from these meas-urements, the manufacturer shall, on demand. reviseand certify the conditions ensuring stable operationon inclined planes (due to inclinations of the ship, orthe camber and sheer of decks).

F. Proof of fatigue strength

1. General notes

1.1 The proof of sufficient fatigue strength, i. e.the strength against crack initiation under dynamicloads during operation, is useful for judging and re-ducing the probability of crack initiation of structuralmembers during the design stage.

Due to the randomness of the load process, the spread-ing of material properties and fabrication factors andto the effects of ageing, crack initiation cannot be

completely excluded during later operation. Therefore,among other things, periodical surveys are necessary.

1.2 The fatigue strength analysis is to be con-ducted acc. to GL Rules for Hull Structures (I-1-1),Section 20 taking into account 2. to 5. or, subject toagreement with GL, acc. to another recognized basiccalculation principle.

1.3 Low cycle fatigue problems in connectionwith fracturing of structural elements have to be spe-cially considered.

2. Application

2.1 The fatigue strength analysis is in principlerequired for all structural elements, connections andsupporting structures of loading gear which are ex-

posed to dynamic loads for the operating states "inoperation" and "out of operation" and may be de-manded by GL for any type of crane or operationalcondition.

2.2 The provisions stated here are applicable toconstructions made of normal and higher-strength hullstructural steels, austenitic steels as well as aluminium

alloys. Other materials such as high-strength structuralsteel and cast steel can be treated, upon agreementwith GL, in an analogous manner by using appropriatedesign S-N curves.

3. Stress range spectrum

3.1 Definitions

3.1.1 The stress range spectrum of a design detail

describes the frequency of the different stress rangesto be expected at that location during the lifetime ofthe loading gear.

3.1.2 The standard stress range spectrum of loadinggear describes the frequency of the different useful loads

to be handled during the lifetime of the loading gear.

3.1.3 Regarding the fatigue strength analysis, it shall be taken into consideration that the standard stressrange spectrum of loading gear and the stress rangespectrum of a design detail may be different in termsof form of spectrum and particularly in terms of num-

ber of load cycles or stress cycles, respectively.

3.2 Stress range spectrum for the operatingcondition "in operation"

3.2.1 Regarding the fatigue strength analysis forthe operating condition "in operation", loading gearare normally to be categorized in groups correspond-ing to the standard stress range spectra S0 to S7 acc. toFig. 3.3.

3.2.2 Where the operating conditions are preciselyknown, individual, clearly separated from each other,structural groups or elements may or must be catego-rized differently.

3.2.3 The number nmax of stress cycles during

operation is to be provided by the manufacturer.

3.2.4 The stress spectra S0 to S6 are defined by thefollowing equation (see Fig. 3.3):

( )maxmax nlg

nlg1 p1 −+=⎟⎟

⎠

⎞⎜⎜⎝

⎛

σΔσΔ κ

κ

Δσ = stress range

Δσmax = maximum stress range of the spectrum acc.

to 4.

n = number of stress cycles

nmax = total number of stress cycles

κ = 5,1) plog()8,2 p5,2(

1+

⋅−⋅

p = coefficient acc. to Table 3.3

For p = 0, κ = 1,5 is to be assumed.

Table 3.3 Coefficients for the calculation of the

κ-value

Spectrum S0 S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6

p 0/7 1/7 2/7 3/7 4/7 5/7 6/7

VI - Part 2GL 2012


F








3.2.5 Applicable for the stress range spectrum S7:

max

ΔσΔσ

= 1 = constant

Fig. 3.3 Standard stress range spectra

3.2.6 Where the operating conditions of loadinggear are exactly known, individually determined stressrange spectra may be used for the fatigue strength

analysis, based on calculated cumulative damageratios. The individual stress range spectra are to be

proven by the manufacturer.

3.3 Stress range spectra for the operatingcondition "out of operation"

The fatigue strength analysis for the operating condi-tion "out of operation" is to be conducted for thestraight-line spectrum A acc. to Fig. 3.3 and a totalnumber of stress cycles nmax = 5 · 10

7.

4. Calculation of the maximum stress range

4.1 The maximum stress range for a construction

detail is to be calculated from the highest maximumstress σmax and the lowest minimum stress σmin in this

detail:

Δσmax = σmax - σmin

4.2 The maximum upper stress σmax and the

minimum lower stress σmin are to be determined each

from loads of the most unfavourable magnitude, loca-

tion and direction acting on the loading gear in themost unfavourable position.

Thereby all partial safety factors are to be set γ p = 1.

5. Proof

5.1 Calculation of the cumulative damageratio

5.1.1 Where the fatigue strength analysis is basedon the calculated cumulative damage ratio, the partialdamages Di caused by the operating conditions "in

operation" and "out of operation" are to be determinedas follows:

∑=

=K

1k k

k i

N

nD

K = total number of blocks of the stress range

spectrum for summation (in general, K ≥ 20)

nk = number of stress cycles in block k

Nk = number of endured stress cycles determined

from the corrected S-N curve (see GL Rulesfor Hull Structures (I-1-1), Section 20) taking

Δσ = Δσk

Δσk = stress range of block k

For this purpose, in the operating condition "in opera-tion", standard stress range spectra acc. to 3.2.4 or3.2.5 or individually determined stress range spectraacc. to 3.2.6 may be applied. For the operating condi-tion "out of operation", the straight-line stress rangespectrum acc. to 3.3 is to be applied.

5.1.2 The proof of fatigue strength is demonstratedif, for the total cumulative damage ratio D, the follow-ing condition is met:

1DD i ≤= ∑

5.2 Permissible stress range

5.2.1 The fatigue strength analysis may be per-formed based on the permissible maximum stressranges. For this purpose, in the operating condition "inoperation", standard stress range spectra acc. to 3.2.4 or 3.2.5 are to be applied, for the operating condition"out of operation", the straight-line stress range spec-trum acc. to 3.3.

The requirements stated in the following are applicable for fatigue strength analyses conducted separatelyfor the operating conditions "in operation" and "out ofoperation".

A superposition of the damages caused by the operat-ing conditions "in operation" and "out of operation" isnot required, provided that the maximum stress rangecaused by the operating condition "out of operation"does not exceed 10 % of the maximum stress range

caused by the operating condition "in operation".Otherwise the fatigue strength analysis is to be con-ducted on the basis of the calculated cumulative dam-age ratios acc. to 5.1 or upon agreement with GL.



F



Table 3.4 Factor f n for the determination of the permissible stress range for welded joints (m0 = 3)

Number of stress cycles nmax Stress

spectrum2·10

4 5·10

4 10

5 3·10

5 6·10

5 10

6 3·10

6 6·10

6 10

7 5·10

7 10

8

S0 16,54 12,94 10,68 7,84 6,44 5,58 4,09 3,36 2,91 1,95 1,67

S1 12,63 9,70 7,87 5,68 4,61 3,97 2,84 2,32 2,01 1,37 1,19

S2 10,25 7,75 6,23 4,43 3,57 3,04 2,15 1,74 1,51 1,05 0,92

S3 8,36 6,23 5,00 3,52 2,82 2,40 1,68 1,34 1,16 0,82 0,72

S4 6,93 5,16 4,12 2,88 2,30 1,95 1,36 1,08 0,93 0,66 0,58

S5 5,92 4,38 3,48 2,44 1,94 1,64 1,14 0,91 0,77 0,56 0,48

S6 5,13 3,78 3,02 2,09 1,66 1,40 0,98 0,78 0,66 0,47 0,41

S7 4,70 3,45 2,75 1,91 1,51 1,27 0,89 0,70 0,59 0,43 0,37

Table 3.5 Factor f n for the determination of the permissible stress range for free edges of plates with

m0 = 3,5


spectrum2·10

4 5·10

4 10

5 3·10

5 6·10

5 10

6 3·10

6 6·10

6 10

7 5·10

7 10

8

S0

9,34

12,51 1

8,18

10,19 1

7,39

8,73 1

6,20

6,77 1

5,48

5,74 1 4,96 3,91 3,33 2,96 2,09 1,84

S17,75

9,831

6,68

7,871

5,95

6,6514,85 4,20 3,72 2,82 2,38 2,11 1,51 1,34

S26,65

8,091

5,68

6,381

4,97

5,3413,94 3,33 2,90 2,17 1,82 1,61 1,17 1,05

S35,62

6,651

4,75

5,201

4,14 3,20 2,66 2,30 1,71 1,41 1,25 0,93 0,83

S44,75

5,551

4,00

4,301

3,50 2,62 2,17 1,88 1,38 1,14 1,00 0,76 0,68

S5 4,074,73

1

3,403,66

1

3,00 2,22 1,83 1,59 1,16 0,95 0,84 0,63 0,56

S63,54

4,121

2,96

3,171

2,60 1,91 1,57 1,36 1,00 0,82 0,71 0,54 0,48

S73,25

3,771

2,70

2,901

2,35 1,74 1,43 1,23 0,90 0,74 0,64 0,49 0,43

1 for ΔσR < 125 [N/mm2]

(ΔσR FAT class acc. to GL Rules for Hull Structures (I-1-1), Section 20, Table 20.3)

VI - Part 2GL 2012


F



Table 3.6 Factor f n for the determination of the permissible stress range for free edges of plates with

m0 = 4


spectrum 2·104 5·104 105 3·105 6·105 106 3·106 6·106 107 5·107 108

S0

7,78

8,831

10,072

6,85

7,321

8,482

6,20

6,621

7,452

5,28

5,601

5,982

4,73

5,001

4,36

4,581 3,65 3,22 2,93 2,19 1,95

S1

6,47

6,931

8,092

5,62

6,001

6,682

5,02

5,361

5,802

4,18

4,431

3,72

3,881 3,39 2,75 2,40 2,17 1,61 1,45

S2

5,54

5,941

6,742

4,75

5,071

5,522

4,21

4,491

4,732

3,56

3,631 3,04 2,75 2,17 1,86 1,68 1,27 1,15

S3

4,67

5,00 1 5,60

2

3,97

4,24 1

4,532

3,493,72

1

2,85 2,48 2,24 1,72 1,46 1,32 1,01 0,92

S4

3,95

2,241

4,702

3,33

3,561

3,772

2,91

3,111

2,37 2,05 1,83 1,40 1,18 1,06 0,83 0,75

S5

3,39

3,631

4,012

2,84

3,041

3,202

2,48

2,661

2,01 1,74 1,54 1,17 0,99 0,88 0,69 0,63

S6

2,963,17

1

3,492

2,472,65

1

2,782

2,15

2,301

1,73 1,50 1,33 1,01 0,85 0,75 0,6 0,54

S7

2,70

2,901

3,192

2,25

2,411

2,542

1,96

2,111

1,58 1,37 1,20 0,92 0,77 0,68 0,54 0,49

1 for ΔσR < 150 [N/mm2]

2 for ΔσR < 140 [N/mm2]

(ΔσR FAT class acc. to GL Rules for Hull Structures (I-1-1), Section 20, Table 20.3)

Table 3.7 Factor f n for the determination of the permissible stress range for free edges of plates with m0 = 5


spectrum2·10

4 5·10

4 10

5 3·10

5 6·10

5 10

6 3·10

6 6·10

6 10

7 5·10

7 10

8

S0 7,29 6,42 5,83 4,96 4,47 4,14 3,49 3,14 2,91 2,30 2,09

S1 6,07 5,26 4,71 3,94 3,52 3,23 2,69 2,40 2,21 1,75 1,60

S2 5,19 4,46 3,95 3,27 2,88 2,63 2,17 1,92 1,77 1,42 1,30

S3 4,38 3,71 3,27 2,67 2,35 2,14 1,74 1,53 1,41 1,14 1,06

S4 3,71 3,11 2,73 2,21 1,94 1,76 1,42 1,24 1,14 0,94 0,87

S5 3,17 2,66 2,33 1,88 1,64 1,49 1,20 1,05 0,95 0,79 0,73

S6 2,77 2,31 2,01 1,63 1,42 1,28 1,03 0,90 0,81 0,68 0,63

S7 2,53 2,11 1,84 1,48 1,29 1,16 0,93 0,81 0,73 0,61 0,57



F



Table 3.8 Factor f n for the straight-line stress

spectrum with nmax = 5 · 107

Welded joints Free edges of plates

m0 = 3 m0 = 5 m0 = 4 m0 = 3,5

3,53 3,63 3,66 3,65

5.2.2 The maximum stress range of the spectrum

shall not exceed the permissible value Δσ p :

Δσmax ≤ Δσ p

Δσmax = maximum stress range acc. to 4.

Δσ p = permissible maximum stress range acc. to5.2.1

5.2.3 The maximum permissible stress ranges areto be calculated by the following formula:

Δσ p = f n ⋅ ΔσRc

ΔσRc = corrected FAT class acc. to 5.2.4

f n = factor for the shape and extent of the spec-

trum acc. to Tables 3.4 to 3.8

5.2.4 The corrected FAT class is to be calculated asfollows:

ΔσRc = f m · f R · f w · f i · f t · ΔσR

ΔσR = FAT class acc. to GL Rules for HullStructures (I-1-1) Section 20, Table20.3, as well as EN 1993-1-9

f m, f R , f w, f t = correction coefficients for the influence

of material, mean stress, shape of weldand plate thickness acc. to GL Rulesfor Hull Structures (I-1-1), Section 20

f i = correction coefficient for the influence

of the importance f i of the structural el-ement acc. to Table 3.9.

G. Proof of suitability for use

1. General notes

1.1 Loading gear as well as its structural ele-ments and equipment is to be such designed and di-mensioned, that its safety and proper functioning is

not adversely affected or endangered by one or moreof the influences stated hereafter:

– deformations

(e.g. formation of large amplitudes of vibration, bending loads on hydraulic cylinders of tele-scopic beams)

– vibrations

(e-g- generated by simultaneous operation ofseveral loading gear drives, by ship machineryor influences of sea state)

– heat

(e.g. expansion, overheating of drives or brakes)

– highest position of crane boom

(see Section 12, B.1.1)

1.2 Suitability for use is to be demonstrated inthe course of the initial testing on board.

Table 3.9 Influence of the importance f i of a structural element on the fatigue strength analysis

"Not safe to operate" structural elementAccessibility

"Safe to operate"

structural elementNo hazard to persons Hazard to persons

Accessible structural

elements1,0 0,9 0,83

Badly accessible

structural elements0,95 0,87 0,8

"Safe to operate" structural elements are parts with restricted consequences of a failure, i.e. where the local breakage of a structural element

does not result in the failure of the structure or fall-down of the load.

"Not safe to operate" structural elements are parts, where the local breakage of a structural element results in immediate failure of the structureof fall-down of the load.

VI - Part 2GL 2012


G










2. Permissible deformations

2.1 Compression members

2.1.1 The uniform deflection of compression mem-

bers under permissible load shall not be larger than therod length divided by 250.

2.1.2 The uniform deflection of unloaded compres-sion members or compression members loaded by thedead load, which are 1st order structural elements,shall not be larger than the rod length divided by 500.

2.1.3 The uniform deflection of unloaded compres-sion members or compression members loaded by thedead load, which are 2nd order structural elements,such as e.g. wind installations or framework stiffenersshall not be larger than the rod length divided by 350.

2.2 Tension members

The uniform deflection of unloaded tension membersshall not be larger than the rod length divided by 50.

H. Joints

1. Proof of weld joints

1.1 Prerequisites

The strength of welding consumables is to be equal toor higher than that of the structural elements to beconnected.

For further general prerequisites see Section 11.

1.2 General strength analysis

1.2.1 General notes

1.2.1.1 Weld stresses are to be calculated using

γ p-fold loads (see C.6).

1.2.1.2 Weld thicknesses, which are the basis of thestrength analysis, are given in Section 11, D. for vari-ous shapes of welds.

1.2.2 Welds located in the plate plane

The permissible stress of welds located in the plate plane is the dimensioning value of the permissiblestress of the adjoining plate acc. to D.2.2.3.1.

1.2.3 Fillet welds

For fillet welds, the strength analysis may be con-ducted acc. to the GL Rules for Hull Structures (I-1-1), see Section 1, B.2.1.1, or acc. to a recognized basic

principle of calculation or standard.

1.2.4 Plates loaded by tension transversely to the

direction of rolling

1.2.4.1 Where improved properties in thickness di-rection are required for plates and wide flat bar steel,

the following minimum requirements apply for thereduction of area after fracture, Z, which is the meanvalue of 3 tensile test samples, to be taken with theirlongitudinal axis perpendicular to the surface of the

product.

Zmin = 25 %

Of these, one single value may be less than 25 %, butnot less than 20 %.

1.2.4.2 Where structural elements are exposed toincreased loads, a minimum value of 35 % (lowestsingle value 25%) may be required, see Eurocode 3(EN 1993-1-10).

1.3 Proof of fatigue strength

Regarding the proof of fatigue strength, the statementsin F. apply.

2. Proofs for bolted connections

2.1 General notes

2.1.1 Bolted connections are to be dimensionedacc. to recognized guidelines, basic principles of cal-

culation or standards, which possibly also allow for afatigue strength analysis for the bolts.

2.1.2 The approaches acc. to 2.2 and 2.3 in principle imply that:

– connected areas are secured against distortion, e.g. by use of at least 2 bolts

– contacting areas are smooth and free from grease

– the use of bolts of strength class 12.9 is agreedwith GL

2.2 Gusset connections with fitting-bolts (Fit-

ting-bolt shear connections)

2.2.1 Definition

In the case of fitting-bolt shear connections, the loadsto be carried are transferred by form-fitting. Theseforces generate shear stresses in the bolts and bearingstresses at the gussets.

2.2.2 Construction notes

2.2.2.1 Fig. 3.5 shows a typical gusset connection. Ifit is intended to be constructed as a fitting-bolt shear

connection, the following notes shall be observed: – The clearance between bolt and drilling hole

shall correspond to the tolerance classes h13 andH11 (or less) acc. to ISO 286-2.



H



– Bolt shafts shall be as long as the thickness ofthe parts to be connected. Where, due to the cyl-indric shaft length, it is not possible to tightenthe bolts, washers are to be used.

– Controlled pre-stressing of bolts is not required,however a suitable securing device against loos-ening.

– A special surface treatment of the contact areasis not required.

– Forces to be transferred may at the maximum bedistributed over 5 (strength classes 4.6 and 5.6)or 3 (strength classes 8.8, 10.9 and possibly12.9) bolts per row, to be arranged one after an-other in the direction of force.

2.2.2.2 Regarding the edge and hole distances acc. to

Fig. 3.5, the limit values acc. to Table 3.10 apply.

Table 3.10 Limit values for edge and hole dis-tances

Min. Max. 1

Edge distances

e1 and e2 1,5 · d 4 · t + 40 mm

Hole distances

p1 and p2 3,0 · d

The lesser value of: 14 · tor 200 mm

1 t – thickness of the thinnest external plate

2.2.3 Permissible stresses for bearing stress andshearing-off

2.2.3.1 For the bearing stress of structural elementsmade of steel as well as for the shearing-off of bolts,the following permissible stresses apply:

σzul =7,0

R

m

eH

⋅γ⋅ασ (bearing stress)

τzul =

m

s,eH

3

R

γ⋅⋅ατ (shearing-off)

R eH = yield strength of structural elements and/or

gussets acc. to material standard (nominalvalue)

R eH,s = yield strength of bolts acc. to Table 3.11

2.2.3.2 Correction coefficients ασ, ατ:

a) Multishear bolt connections

ασm = minimum of:

– 1e

3 d⋅

, or

– 1 p0,25

3 d−

⋅

, or

–m,s

m

R

R , or

– 1,0

ατm = 1,0

R m,s = tensile strength of bolts acc. to Table 3.11

[N/mm2]

R m = tensile strength of structural elements acc. to

material standard (nominal value) [N/mm2]

b) Single-shear bolt connections

ασe = 0,78 ⋅ ασm

ατe = 0,77

Table 3.11 Strength values of bolts

Strength class 4.6 5.6 8.8 10.9 12.9

R eH,s [N/mm2] 240 300 640 900 1080

R m,s [N/mm2] 400 500 800 1000 1200

2.2.4 Proofs for transmissible bolt forces

2.2.4.1 To determine the largest bolt forces for theexample in Fig. 3.5, the following forces are to beadded geometrically:

ΔFx,d =6

F d,x

ΔFz,d =6

F d,z

ΔFM,d =y,d z,d

2 21 2

M F a

4 0, 25 p p

+ ⋅

⋅ ⋅ +

2.2.4.2 For the most unfavourably stressed fitting- bolts on a connection or joint, the following proofs forshearing-off of bolts and bearing stresses of the con-

nected parts are to be provided:

bearing stresses: Fr,d ≤ ds ⋅ tmin ⋅ σzul

shearing-off: Fr,d ≤ As ⋅ nf ⋅ τzul

Fr,d = largest resulting bolt force (rectangular to the bolt axis) acc. to 2.2.4.1

ds = shaft diameter of the fitting-bolt (nominaldiameter + 1,0 mm)

tmin = smallest effective plate thickness

As = cross-section area of shaft of fitting-bolt

nf = number of effective shear areas

(single-shear or multishear)

σzul, τzul = permissible stresses acc. to 2.2.3 [N/mm2]

VI - Part 2GL 2012


H



2.2.4.3 In the case of a dynamic shear load, the fa-tigue strength analysis is to be conducted for the mostunfavourably loaded fitting-bolt as follows:

Stress spectra are to be determined acc. to F.

The maximum stress range of the shear stress Δτmax isto be determined acc. to F. for the shaft cross-sectionof the fitting-bolt.

The design S-N curve for shear stress of fitting-bolts isshown in Fig. 3.4.

The fatigue strength analysis may be conducted on the basis of calculated damage ratios acc. to F.

As an alternative, the fatigue strength analysis may beconducted on the basis of permissible stress ranges forthe standard spectra S0 to S7 acc. to F. as follows:

Δτmax ≤ f n· f i · ΔτR

Δτmax = maximum stress range of the shear stress forthe shaft cross-section of the fitting-bolt

ΔτR = reference value for the stress range of theshear stress at 2·106 stress cycles;

ΔτR = 100 N/mm2

f n = factor for the shape and extent of the spec-trum acc. to Table 3.12

fi = influence of the importance of the structuralelement acc. to Table 3.9

Fig. 3.4 Design S-N curve for shear load of fit-ting-bolts

2.2.5 Proofs for structural elements and gussets

The strength analyses for the structural elements andgussets connected with each other is to be based onthe cross-sections designed for tension, compression,shear and bending acc. to C.4.

For the permissible stresses, see D.2.2.

2.3 Gasset connections with prestressed bolts

(friction-grip connections)

2.3.1 Definition

With friction-grip connections, the forces to be sus-tained are submitted by friction between the contact

areas (frictional locking).Fitting-bolts with the normal clearance do not effectany increase in the transmissible forces.

Table 3.12 Factor f n for standard stress range spectra S0 to S7 acc. to F. and design S-N curve acc. to

Fig. 3.4

Number of stress cycles nmaxStress

spectrum2·10

45·10

4 10

5 3·10

5 6·10

5 10

6 3·10

6 6·10

6 10

7 5·10

7 10

8

S0 7,29 6,42 5,83 4,96 4,47 4,14 3,49 3,13 2,88 2,24 2,01

S1 6,07 5,26 4,71 3,94 3,51 3,23 2,69 2,38 2,18 1,67 1,51

S2 5,19 4,46 3,95 3,27 2,88 2,63 2,16 1,91 1,73 1,32 1,19

S3 4,38 3,71 3,27 2,67 2,35 2,14 1,74 1,53 1,38 1,03 0,94

S4 3,71 3,11 2,73 2,21 1,94 1,76 1,42 1,24 1,13 0,82 0,76

S5 3,17 2,66 2,33 1,88 1,64 1,49 1,20 1,05 0,95 0,69 0,62

S6 2,77 2,31 2,01 1,63 1,42 1,28 1,03 0,90 0,81 0,59 0,53

S7 2,53 2,11 1,83 1,47 1,28 1,16 0,93 0,81 0,73 0,53 0,46



H



2.3.2 Construction notes

Fig. 3.5 shows a typical gusset connection. For con-struction purposes, the following notes shall be ob-served:

– Bolt holes shall not exceed the shaft diameter bymore than1,0 mm.

– The bolts are to be pre-stressed by controlled procedures and under consideration of the dis-

persion of the installation force to the maximuminstallation force FMmax = αs ⋅ R eH,s ⋅ Aσ,where Aσ is the stress cross-section of the bolt.Preferably, the pre-stress coefficient is αs = 0,7.Well-founded deviations in the range of 0,6 ≤ αs

≤ 0,8 may be permitted.

– Up to a thread diameter of 30 mm, the pre-stressmay be effected by the application of a torque.

With larger diameters, hydraulic lengthening is to be applied.

– For the contact areas, a special surface treatmentis required acc. to 2.3.3.

– Casting compound for compensation of uneven-nesses in the contact areas is not permissible.

– Only bolts of strength class 8.8, 10.9 and possibly 12.9 may be used.

– The forces to be submitted may be distributedover 3 rows of bolts at a maximum.

– The hole distances shall comply with the re-

quirements acc. to 2.2.2.2.

– Only one plate of a gusset connection may havea plate thickness which is equal to, or higherthan, the bolt diameter.

– Bolts of strength class 12.9 require a highlyaccurate layout in the supporting areas underthe head and nut.

2.3.3 Friction coefficient µ

The friction coefficient depends on the surface treat-ment and is to be selected as follows:

µ = 0,50 for surfaces:

– of shining metal layers, steel shot or sand blast-ed without unevennesses

– steel shot or sandblasted and covered with alu-minium

– steel shot or sandblasted and metal covered by ametal cover made of a zincic material, which ef-fects a friction coefficient of at least 0,5.

µ = 0,40 for surfaces

– steel shot or sand blasted and coated with a50 µm to 80 µm thick alkali-zinc-silicate layer


– shiny metallic, cleaned with a steel brush or byflame deseaming


– free of rust, oil and dirt.

2.3.4 Proof of transmissible forces

A sufficient slide resistance is to be proven for themost unfavorable bolt in a connection or joint, seeexample in 2.2.4.1, using the following condition:

Fr,d ≤ Fμ,d · nr

Fμ,d = s eH Setz aA m

1R A F F

1,25σ

⎡ ⎤ μ⋅α ⋅ ⋅ − Δ −⎢ ⎥α γ ⋅⎣ ⎦

Fμ,d = force transmissible by friction in 1 frictionarea

nr = number of effective friction area

Aσ = stress section-area of the bolt acc. to Table

3.13.

Fa = external tension force in the direction of the

bolt axis

µ = friction coefficient acc. to 2.3.3

ΔFSetz = loss of pre-stress force by setting acc. to I.1.4.2

αA = tightening factor of the tightening procedure

used: αA = FM,max/FM,min

FM,max = maximum installation force in considerationof the dispersion of installation force for thetightening procedure used

FM,min = minimum installation force in considerationof the dispersion of installation force for thetightening procedure used

Additionally, sufficient resistance against shearing-offand bearing pressure acc. to 2.2 is to be proven, in-cluding the calculation of the shear capability of thestress cross-section Aσ .

2.3.5 Proof of surface pressure under head and

nut of the bolt

For material S 235 and, where applicable, also for S355, proof of the permissible surface pressure under

the head or nut of the bolt respectively, is to be tocarried out in the following way:

zul, pa

d,aeHs

A

FAR σ≤

Φ⋅+⋅⋅α σ

If proof cannot be provided, tempered washers shall be used.

σ p zul = permissible surface pressure in acc. with

Table 3.14 [N/mm2]

Aa = smallest contact surface of the bolt head or nut,

considering bore diameter and chamfers [mm2]

Fa,d = Dimensioning value of the external tensile

force in the direction of the bolt axis

Φ = tensioning factor acc. to I.1.3.2

VI - Part 2GL 2012


H





– Bolt holes may be larger than the shaft diameter

ds by the value Δd:

Δd ≤ 0,1 ⋅ ds ≤ 3,0 mm

– In general, the bolt distance shall not be largerthan 6 ⋅ ds.

– In general, the span length of bolts shall be at

least 3 ⋅ ds .

– At least 3 threads shall remain free.

– The bolts are to be pretensioned by controlled

procedures. The degree of utilization ν of the yield

strength R eH,s of the bolt in the mounted condition

is preferably in the range 0,7 ≤ ν ≤ 0,9. Well-founded deviations may be permitted.

– Up to a thread diameter of 30 mm, pretensionmay be conducted by application of a torque, inthe case of larger diameters hydraulic lengthen-ing is required.

– The contact surfaces require a special surfacetreatment acc. to H.2.3.3.

– Casting compound for compensation of uneven-nesses of the contact areas is not permissible, un-less otherwise stated by slewing bearing makers.

– Only bolts of strength class 8.8, 10.9 and possibly 12.9 may be used.

– Bolts of strength class 12.9 require a highlyaccurate layout in the supporting areas under thehead and nut.

1.3 Forces acting on a flange connection

1.3.1 Fig. 3.6 shows a typical flange connectionwith its essential dimensions and the proportionalexternal axial force Fa per bolt sector.

The external axial force Fa acting on the individual bolt location of the flange connection may normally be determined by means of elastomechanics from the

operational loads of the gusset connection.

In the case of an excentric load, the compensating lineof action of the external axial force has the distance

aers from the bolt axis. The distance aers is to be de-

termined from the location of the zero point of the

bending moment curve of the system, which is the

nearest to the bolt.

1.3.2 The external force Fa in the connecting parts

(tension force) acts as an additional load on the

prestressed bolt and reduces the surface pressure in the

parting line. The force ratio Φ governs the portion of

the external axial force, which acts on the bolt addi-tionally to the prestressing force, as well as the re-

maining portion, which discharges the tensioned struc-tural elements.

Fig. 3.6 Flange connection

The force ratio Φ depends on the resiliences of the bolt and the tensioned structural elements, the excentricityof the tensioning and/or the external operational forceas well as the leading-in of the force. The reliable

determination of Φ is therefore complex and shall in principle be conducted by way of measurement tech-niques or based on recognized calculation procedures.

Provided that the bending of the bolt due to the excen-tricity of the tensioning and the bending of the bolt

due to the excentricity of the external axial force Fa donot superimpose each other in the same direction, Φ

may be approximately calculated as follows:

for proofs in 1.4.1, 1.4.3, 1.5.1 and H.2.3.5

0 for proofs in 1.4.2 and 1.5

α⎧Φ = ⎨

⎩

s p

pm δ+δ

δ⋅γ=α

2

s

k

s

s

d

l

E

4⋅

⋅π

=δ

( )

⎥⎥⎦

⎤

⎢⎢⎣

⎡

−⋅

−⋅+

−

−⋅−⋅

⋅π=δ

2swA

wA

2s

2A

wAk

p p

ddD

dD2

dD

dD2l

E

4

⎟ ⎠

⎞⎜⎝

⎛ += w

k A d

2

l,f ,gminD

δs = axial resilience of the bolt [mm/N]

δ p = axial resilience of the tensioned structural

elements [mm/N]

lk = clamping length [mm]

ds = shaft diameter of the bolt [mm]

VI - Part 2GL 2012


I



Es = Young's modulus of the bolt [N/mm2]

E p = Young's modulus of the tensioned structural

elements [N/mm2]

dw = head bearing diameter [mm]

g = flange dimension acc. to Fig. 3.6 [mm]

f = bolt distance [mm]

1.4 Proofs for the external tension force Fa of

the bolt

The proofs described in the following apply to boltconnections with an external axial force Fa acc. to1.3.1 provided that:

– Tensioned structural elements form simple pris-matic bodies.

– The load on the bolt is proportional to the exter-nal axial force.

– Where external loads are absent, the surface pres-sure in the parting line of the prestressed bolt connection is to a large extent evenly distributed.

A surface pressure in the parting line of the pre-stressed bolt connection, to a large extent evenly dis-tributed, may normally be assumed if the dimensionsof the parting line are as follows:

g < dw+tf

tf = thickness of the thinner flange plateBolt connections which are in addition to an externalaxial force or solely loaded by an external bendingmoment, are to be proven separately.

1.4.1 Proof of yield strength of the bolt

In the mounted condition, the following condition is to be observed:

FM,max ≤ FM,zul

2

G2

2

s,eHzul,M

155,1d

P

d

d

2

331

R AF

⎥⎥⎦⎤

⎢⎢⎣⎡ ⎟⎟

⎠ ⎞⎜⎜

⎝ ⎛ μ⋅+

⋅π⋅⋅⋅+

⋅⋅ν=

σ

σ

Where torsion-free tightening procedures are applied,the permissible installation force FM,zul is as follows:

M,zul eH,sF A R σ= ν ⋅ ⋅

FM,max = maximum installation force

FM,zul = permissible installation force

R eH,s = yielding strength of the bolt

ν = predefined degree of utility of the yieldstrength in the mounted condition

Aσ = stress cross-section of the bolt acc. to Table 3.13

dσ = stress diameter of the bolt

d2 = effective diameter of the bolt

P = pitch of thread

μG = friction coefficient in the thread

If there is no information about the friction coefficientμG in the thread, the friction coefficient is to be esti-mated conservatively, e.g. acc. to VDI-Richtlinie 2230Blatt 2 with consideration of surface properties andlubricants used.

In service, the equivalent stress of the bolt shall notexceed the permissible value

m

s,eHd,v

R

γ≤σ

2d,red

2d,zd,v 3 τ⋅+σ=σ

σ

=σA

F d,Sd,z

⎟⎟ ⎠

⎞⎜⎜⎝

⎛ μ⋅+

⋅π⋅

⋅π

⋅⋅=τ

σG

23

2max,Md,red 155,1

d

P

d

d4F

d,amax,Md,S FFF ⋅Φ+=

In the case of torsion-free tightening procedures or inthe case of complete reduction of torsion stresses inthe thread in service, proof of operational stress of the bolt may be conducted as follows:

⎟⎟ ⎠

⎞⎜⎜⎝

⎛ −

γ

⋅

Φ≤ σ

max,Mm

s,eHd,a F

AR 1F

σv,d = design value of the maximum equivalentstress of the bolt in operation

σz,d = design value of the maximum tensile stress ofthe bolt in operation.

τred,d

= design value of the reduced maximum torsionstress of the bolt in operation

FS,d = design value of the maximum bolt force inoperation

1.4.2 Proof against open gap

The following condition is to be met for the proofagainst open gap (see Fig. 3.6):

( ) ( )( )

Φ−⋅+⋅+⋅

+⋅+⋅+⋅≤

zze4,9gf

zaze4,9gf

FF

eff eff

erseff eff

min,Vd,a

FV,min = FM,min – ΔFSetz

FM,min = FM,max/αA



I



ps

34,0

k 3Setz

1

d

l1029,3F

δ+δ⋅⎟

⎠

⎞⎜⎝

⎛ ⋅⋅=Δ −

FV,min = lowest pre-stressing force of the bolt

FM,min = smallest installation force

αA = tightening factor of the tightening procedureused

ΔFSetz = loss of pre-stressing force due to setting

A 2-fold pre-stressing with time-lag reducesthe setting to a residual value, which may possibly be disregarded.

δs, δ p = resilience of the bolt and the tensioned struc-tural elements acc. to 1.3.2

aers = distance between the compensating line of

action from Fa and the bolt axis acc. to 1.3.1

f eff = the smaller value of f or (dw + tf )

geff = the smaller value of g or (dw + tf )

z = the smaller value of 0 or ⎟ ⎠

⎞⎜⎝

⎛ − e

2

geff

for g ≤ dw + tf ;

the smaller value of 0 or ⎟ ⎠

⎞⎜⎝

⎛ −− e

2

gg eff

for g > dw + tf

In the case of through-bolt connections, for tf thethickness of the thinner gusset plate is to be assumed,in the case of screw-in connections, the thickness ofthe gusset plate with the through-bore.

Minor one-sided gapping of the parting line is accepted

in the above condition. Large-area gapping of the part-ing line may be accepted if the bolt connection, bymeans of measurement techniques, or based on recog-nized calculation procedures, while considering the progressive increase of the bolt stress due to removalof tensioned structural elements, is proven separately.

1.4.3 Proofs of fatigue strength

In the case of dynamic loads, proof of fatigue strengthof the bolts is to be conducted as stated in the following.

Stress range spectra are to be determined acc. to F.

The maximum stress range of the normal stress Δσmax is to be determined acc. to F. for the stress cross-section of the thread of the bolt.

For a proof of fatigue strength of gaping bolt connec-

tions, e.g. by numeric calculation methods, Δσmax is to be determined for the lowest prestress force of the bolt

FV,min.When the stress range of the normal stress Δσmax iscalculated, tensile and bending stresses in the stresscross-section of the thread of the bolt are to be taken

into consideration. For the bending stress in the cross-section of the thread's stress cross-section the follow-ing applies:

( )3

ersa

p

s b

d

zaF32

E

E1

σ⋅π

+⋅⋅⋅⋅

κ

=σ

1d

gf 7,1

4s

3eff eff −

⋅⋅=κ

σ b = bending stress in the stress cross-section ofthe thread of the bolt

ds = shaft diameter of the bolt

The design S-N curves for proofs of fatigue strengthof prestressed bolts are shown in Fig. 3.7.

The proof of fatigue strength may be conducted on the basis of calculated cumulative damage ratios acc. to F.

Alternatively, the proof of fatigue strength may beconducted based on permissible stress ranges for thestandard spectra S0 to S7 acc. to F. as follows:

Δσmax ≤ f n· k s· f i·ΔσR

k s = 1 for d ≤ 30 mm

(30/d)0,25

for d > 30 mm

Δσmax= maximum stress range of the normal stress in

the stress cross-section of the bolt

ΔσR = reference value of the stress range of the

normal stress at 2 · 106 stress cycles

ΔσR = 71 N/mm2 for bolts either tempered or rolled

as final treatment

ΔσR = 50 N/mm2 for all other bolts

f n = factor for shape and extent of the spectrumacc. to Table 3.15

f i = influence of importance of structural elementacc. to Table 3.9

k s = influence factor for size

d = nominal thread diameter

Fig. 3.7 Design S-N curves for prestressed bolts

VI - Part 2GL 2012


I



Table 3.15 Factor f n for standard stress range spectra S0 to S7 acc. to F. and design S-N curve acc. toFig. 3.7

Number of stress cycles nmaxStress

spectrum

2·10

4

5·10

4

10

5

3·10

5

6·10

5

10

6

3·10

6

6·10

6

10

7

5·10

7

10

8

S0 16,54 12,94 10,68 7,84 6,44 5,55 4,06 3,33 2,87 1,82 1,51

S1 12,63 9,70 7,87 5,68 4,61 3,97 2,84 2,29 1,95 1,23 1,03

S2 10,25 7,75 6,23 4,43 3,57 3,04 2,15 1,72 1,46 0,89 0,76

S3 8,36 6,23 5,00 3,52 2,82 2,40 1,68 1,34 1,14 0,68 0,58

S4 6,93 5,16 4,12 2,88 2,30 1,95 1,36 1,08 0,92 0,54 0,46

S5 5,92 4,38 3,48 2,44 1,94 1,64 1,14 0,91 0,77 0,45 0,37

S6 5,13 3,78 3,02 2,09 1,66 1,40 0,98 0,78 0,66 0,39 0,31

S7 4,67 3,45 2,73 1,89 1,51 1,27 0,88 0,70 0,59 0,35 0,28

1.5 Proof of transmissible forces in the clamp-ing gap

The statements in H.2.3.4 apply, where nr = 1.

Normally, this proof is not to be conducted for theconnection of large diameter slewing rings.

1.5.1 Proof of surface pressure below head and

nut of bolt

The statements in H.2.3.5 apply.

1.5.2 Construction and calculation of flanges

1.5.2.1 Construction

The dimensions a, b and c in Fig. 3.6 shall complywith the following requirements:

a not larger than necessary for clamping tools

b sufficiently large for generating the supporting force

c sufficiently large for the weld, including the ex-cess length required for the welding process

b/a ≥ 0,75

The workmanship of the weld next to the connecting

bolts requires special diligence.

1.5.2.2 Calculation of flange thickness

The gusset thickness tf may, simplified, be calculated

as follows:

w wf e

Fzul

t at

σ ⋅ ⋅≥ α ⋅

σ

αe = coefficient for the construction of the wall

= 5,0 for cylindric walls

= 6,0 for flat wallsσw = existing stress in the wall

σFzul = permissible stress in the flange acc. to D.2.2

2. Hydraulic cylinders

2.1 General notes

For compression and tension loaded hydraulic cylin-ders, the following proofs are to be conducted for theoperating conditions "loading gear in operation" and"loading gear out of operation":

– proof of structural safety acc. to D.

– proof of fatigue strength acc. to F.

– proof of suitability for use acc, to G.

2.2 Simplified dimensioning of cylinder pipes

2.2.1 For thin-walled cylinder pipes, the requiredwall thickness tw,erf may be calculated as follows, if

the requirement acc. to 2.2.2 is complied with:

cyr

ca

erf ,w p7,1f 20

pD7,1t

⋅+⋅

⋅⋅=

Da = outer diameter [mm]

pc = setting pressure of the relief valves acc. to

Section 9, F.2.2 [bar]

f yr = calculated yield strength acc. to C.3.2

[N/mm2]

2.2.2 The formula in 2.2.1 for the required wallthickness is based on the shear stress hypothesis.Therefore the following condition shall be compliedwith, if the cylinder pipe is dimensioned using thisformula:

⎟⎟ ⎠

⎞⎜⎜⎝

⎛ −

⋅⋅≤σ≤− 1

t2

D p p

w

acc

σ = longitudinal stress in the cylinder pipe

(characteristic value without partial safetyfactor γ p)



I

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-



2.2.3 Up to a wall thickness of tw ≤ 30 mm, an addi-tion for corrosion and wear of c = 1 mm is required.

2.2.4 The wall thickness tw of the cylinder pipe is

to comply with the following requirement:

ctt erf ,ww +≥

tw = wall thickness of the cylinder pipe

tw,erf = required wall thickness acc. to 2.2.1

c = addition acc. to 2.2.3

2.2.5 Cylinder pipes, not complying with the con-dition acc. to 2.2.2, are to be proven acc. to D.

In this case, the partial safety factor for the internal pressure (= setting pressure pc of the safety valves) is:

γ p = 1,34

2.2.6 A calculated strength analysis is to be con-ducted for the connecting welds of the pipes.

2.2.7 In order to avoid local bending stresses, thehead and bottom plate of the cylinder pipes shall notfall below the following minimum thickness:

wt 3 t≥ ⋅

t p = thickness of head or bottom plate, respec-

tively

tw = wall thickness of the cylinder pipe

2.3 Notes regarding the proof of stability

2.3.1 The proof of stability is acc. to D.2.3 to beconducted for the most unfavourable combination of

buckling length ki and respective pressure (depending

on the kinematics of the loading gear).

2.3.2 The dimensioning force shall include the

partial safety factors γ p as well as any dynamic factors

and is to be calculated for the most unfavourable loadcombination.

2.3.3 As an imperfection for the proof of stability,

a distortion of the hydraulic cylinder of ki / 300 is to

be taken into consideration.

2.3.4 At the ends of the cylinder, the followingmoment shall be assumed due to friction of the carrier bolts:

2d NM Bd ⋅μ⋅=

Nd = dimensioning force (pressure) in the hydrau-

lic cylinder including the partial safety fac-

tors γ p µ = 0,08 (= friction coefficient)

dB = bolt diameter

2.4 Notes regarding the tensile stresses

In the case of tensile-stressed hydraulic cylinders, particular attention is to be paid to the thread of the piston rod during strength analysis .

3. Large cylindric pipes

3.1 Proofs of buckling for large cylindric pipes

3.1.1 Fig. 3.8 shows the dimensions and loads ofcircular cylinder shells.

Fig. 3.8 Dimensions and loads of circular cylin-ders

r m = radius, related to the middle of

wall thickness [mm]

tw = Wall thickness [mm]

r = pipe length [mm]

Da = outer diameter (nominal diameter) [mm]

σx = longitudinal stress [N/mm2]

τ = shear stress [N/mm2]

σϕ = circumferential stress [N/mm2]

3.1.2 The longitudinal and shear stresses are calcu-lated as follows:

x zx

m w m

F M1

r t 2 r

⎛ ⎞σ = ⋅ +⎜ ⎟

⋅ ⋅π ⎝ ⎠

xz

m w m

M1F

r t 2 r

⎛ ⎞τ = ⋅ +⎜ ⎟

⋅ ⋅ π ⋅⎝ ⎠

σx = longitudinal stress [N/mm2]

τ = shear stress [N/mm2]

Fx = force in x-direction [N]

Fz = force in z-direction [N]Mz = bending moment [Nmm]

Mx = torsional moment [Nmm]

VI - Part 2GL 2012


I



3.2 Proofs of stability

3.2.1 Proofs against buckling are to be performedacc. to D.2.3. Proofs against shell buckling may beconducted acc. to EN 1993-1-6.

3.2.2 Regarding the application of the proofs ofstability acc. to EN 1993-1-6, the following is to beobserved:

– Instead of safety factor γM1 according to the Euro-

code, the value γm acc. to C.8.4.3 is to be used.

– Instead of the yield strength, the calculated yieldstrength f yr acc. to C.3.2 is to be used.

3.2.3 Proofs against shell buckling need not be con-ducted, if the following requirements are complied with:

a) pipes loaded by stress in circumferential direction 1

eHw

m

R

E21,0

t

r ⋅≤

E = Young's modulus [N/mm2]

= 2,06 ⋅ 105 N/mm2 for steel

R eH = yield strength acc. to material standards

[N/mm2]

b) pipes loaded by compression in longitudinal direc-

tion 1

eHwm

R

E03,0t

r

⋅≤

c) pipes loaded by shear 1

32

eHw

m

R 15

E

t

r ⎟⎟ ⎠

⎞⎜⎜⎝

⎛

⋅≤

d) very long pipes, loaded by compression 1

ki m

m w

r 10

r t≥ ⋅

ki = buckling length of the pipe [mm]

3.2.4 The requirements acc. to a) to d) apply, pro-vided that the imperfections acc. to 3.3 are not ex-ceeded during manufacture.

3.3 Imperfections due to manufacture

3.3.1 Curvatures

In the case of outward or inward curvatures caused bymanufacture, the depth gauge f acc. to Fig. 3.9 shallnot exceed 1 % of the smallest gauge length. Thefollowing gauge lengths apply:

––––––––––––––1 These proofs apply provided that the edges are radially undis-

placable

gauge length in longitudinal direction of the pipe [mm]

m x = wm tr 4 ⋅⋅

(in the unwelded area)

= mm500t25 min ≤⋅ (in the area of welds)

gauge length in circumferential direction [mm]

m ϕ = mm1/ 2 1/ 4

m r m w

2,3 r r

(r / ) (r / t )

⋅≤

⋅

(in the unwelded area)

= mm500t25 min ≤⋅

(in the area of welds)

tmin = thickness of the thinner plate adjacent to the weld

Fig. 3.9 Curvature including designations

3.3.2 Out-of-roundness

3.3.2.1 The out-of-roundness is defined as follows:

100d

ddU

nom

minmax ⋅−

= [%]

Fig. 3.10 Measurement of the diameters fordetermination of out-of-roundness

3.3.2.2 The permissible out-of-roundness Uzul may

be calculated as follows:

Uzul ≤ 2,0 % for dnom ≤ 500 mm

≤ 750

500d0,2 nom −

− [%]

for 500 < dnom < 1250 mm

≤ 1,0 % for dnom ≥ 1250 mm

3.3.2.3 The out-of-roundness U acc. to 3.3.2.1 shallnot exceed the permissible out-of-roundness Uzul acc.

to 3.3.2.2.



I



3.3.3 Excentricities in x-direction

Planned eccentricities or eccentricities due to manu-facture, located at the centerline of joints of plateswith equal or differing wall thickness tw shall not

exceed the following values ex:

ex ≤ 0,2 ⋅ tmin ≤ 3 mm

tmin = the smaller of the two plate thicknesses.

4. Shear connection of circular structural

elements

Regarding the connection of circular masts, posts andcrane columns with e,g, deck plates, the required platethickness of the deck plating t p and the required weld

thickness a may be determined acc. to the following

formula

m x p z

yr

12 Mt or a F

D f D

γ ⋅ ⎛ ⎞≥ ⋅ +⎜ ⎟⋅ ⋅π ⎝ ⎠

[mm]

t p = required minimum thickness of deck plates

a = required minimum thickness of weld

D = connection diameter [mm] (Da or possibly Di)

f yr = calculated yield strength acc. to C.3.2 [N/mm2]

γm = partial safety factor for resistance values acc.

to C.8.4.3 [-]Fz = maximum horizontal force to be transmitted

[N]

Mx = torsional moment of the connection [Nmm]

The internal forces Fz and Mx are dimensioning values

and include the partial safety factors γ p for loads acc.

to C.8.4.

Regarding the designation of axes see Fig. 3.8.

5. Local loads due to wheel loads

5.1 General notes

5.1.1 Local loads due to wheel loads occur mainlywith rails, girders of crane rails and girders of trolleys.

Structural elements which are e.g. loaded by wheels offork lift trucks are to be treated analogously.

5.1.2 Local loads shall be taken into consideration,when the proof of structural safety acc. to D. as wellas the proof of fatigue strength acc. to F. are con-ducted.

5.2 Girders of crane rails

5.2.1 For the calculation of the local compressionstresses, the relationships as shown in Fig. 3.11 apply.

Fig. 3.11 Pressure distribution of wheel loads

d = length of pressure distribution [mm]

= 2 ⋅ hs +

f

hs = distance between contact area of the wheel

and intersection line considered [mm]

f = length of contact area of the wheel [mm]

= 0,2 ⋅ r ≤ 50 mm

r = running radius [mm]

FR = wheel load [N]

5.2.2 Regarding the connecting welds of crane rails

made of square steel bars and welds joining web andflange, it shall be assumed that the transmitted pres-sure takes place solely through the welds.

5.3 Girders of trolleys

5.3.1 In Fig. 3.12, typical local deformations areshown highly magnified.

Fig. 3.12 Local deformation of girders of trolleys(highly magnified) F

R = wheel load

FR = wheel load

σx, σy = local and global stresses

VI - Part 2GL 2012


I



5.3.2 Calculation of local stresses in the lowerflanges of girders for trolleys may be conducted inaccordance with a recognized calculation method orstandard, e.g. acc. to F.E.M., Section IX, Book 9.341.

5.3.3 For general strength analysis, local and globalstresses are to be superimposed, with the local stressesreduced to 75 %.

5.3.4 In the case of lower flanges welded to theweb, for the connecting weld a proof of fatiguestrength may possibly be required.

6. Bolt connections

6.1 Bolts are to be secured against falling out, theouter gussets against gapping.

6.2 Bolt connections are to be proven acc. toSection 7, C.4.4.

7. Eye plates and eye rods

7.1 Proof of eye plates may be conducted acc. toSection 7, C.4.3.

7.2 Eye rods acc. to Fig. 3.13. may be dimen-sioned as follows:

m

yr

F 2a d

2 t f 3

γ≥ ⋅ + ⋅

⋅

m

yr

F 1 b d

2 t f 3

γ≥ ⋅ + ⋅

⋅

ddd b Δ+=

F = dimensioning value of the tensile force (in-

cluding partial security factor γ p acc. to C.

8.4)

f yr = calculated yield strength acc. to C.3.2

γm = partial safety factor for resistance values acc.

to C.8.4.3

Fig. 3.13 Example of an eye rod

8. Joints of hollow profile girders

Dimensioning of hollow profile girder joints may be performed acc. to EN 1993-1-8.

Alternatively, a shape strength analysis for the jointsof hollow profiles to other hollow profiles or open profiles may be conducted based on another recog-nized calculation method.

9. Stairs, ladders, platforms and railings

9.1 Load assumptions

9.1.1 Accesses, platforms etc. are to be dimen-

sioned for a distributed load of at least 3000 N/m2 orfor a movable single load of 1500 N.

9.1.2 Guard-rails and foot rails shall be dimen-sioned for a lateral load in the form of a movablesingle load of 300 N.

9.1.3 The loads acc. to 9.1.1 and 9.1.2 need not beconsidered for the global calculation of cranes.

9.2 Proof of structural safety

9.2.1 Proof of structural safety is to be conductedacc. to D.

9.2.2 The partial safety factor for the loads is γ p =

1,34.



I



Section 4

Cranes and Supporting Structures

A. General

1. Description of contents

1.1 This Section contains requirements for designand dimensioning of cranes and their supporting struc-tures onboard ships and offshore installations whichare also correspondingly applicable to other loadinggear and their supporting structures according to Sec-tion 1, A.3.1.

1.2 The type of design is not subject to restric-tions. However, the requirements of G. shall be takeninto account.

1.3 The dimensioning is based on Section 3 anddistinguishes between the conditions "in service" and"out of service" for all proofs.

2. Influences caused by the ship and theship’s operation

2.1 Apart from special tasks, such as e.g. han-dling of hatch covers or offshore activities, the ship’sinfluence shall also be considered for the design anddimensioning of cranes on board ships predeterminede.g. by the form of the hull, its bending and torsionalstiffness or the ship’s operation.

Possible influences to be considered may be:

– arrangement of the cranes on the ship

– stability of the ship

– area of operation of the ship

– high ship speed

– sea lashing of the cranes

– special operating conditions

2.2 The increase of load radius of cranes due tothe existing heel of the ship and/or the heel generated

by the lifting of load may be taken advantage of uponapproval by GL. The values of Table 3.1 shall becomplied with.

3. Dimensioning of cranes

The cranes listed in the following are to be dimen-sioned according to different criteria.

3.1 Ship cranes

3.1.1 Cranes for harbour operation

3.1.2 Cranes for sea operation

3.2 Offshore cranes

Slewing cranes on offshore installations used for loadingand unloading of supply ships as well as for hoistingtasks on the installation.

3.3 Floating cranes

Depending on their use, floating cranes are to be dealtwith like ship cranes for harbour or sea operation,respectively.

3.4 Loading gear not handling cargo

Loading gear used onboard of ships or installations areto be dealt with like ship cranes for harbour operation,taking into consideration their service or environ-mental conditions.

4. Dimensioning of supporting structures

4.1 The principal supporting structures are:

– crane columns

– crane foundations

– runways for mobile cranes

– crane boom supports

– structural transits into the ship’s hull or the off-shore installation

4.2 Crane columns and crane foundations are to be dimensioned similarly like the allocated cranes,where applicable also according to D.1.2.

4.3 When dimensioning runways, the require-ments according to Section 3, I.5. as well as accordingto G.4.4 are to be observed.

4.4 Crane boom supports are to be dimensionedaccording to F.6.

B. Crane groups

1. General notes

1.1 The allocation to crane groups may be of in-fluence on the determination of hoist load coefficients, the main aspect, however, is the fatigue strength.

1.2 The following allocations to crane groups ineach case refer to the main hoist of a crane. For sidehoists and auxiliary hoists, and where a distinct alloca-tion is not possible, the statements in F.3.1.2 apply.

VI - Part 2GL 2012

Section 4 Cranes and Supporting Structures Chapter 2Page 4–1

B

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-



2. Crane group A

2.1 Crane group A includes mainly cranes whichdo not handle cargo and which, with the exceptionof hatch cover cranes and hose cranes, are not always

exposed to the full nominal load. Such cranes arecharacterized by irregular use and longer rest periods.

2.2 Cranes of group A1, which additionallylaunch and haul life saving appliances, are to be di-mensioned according to the GL Rules for Life SavingLaunching Appliances (VI-2-1).

2.3 Crane group A is further subdivided as fol-lows:

2.3.1 Crane group A1 includes cranes for the op-eration of the ship or installation, such as e.g.:

– provision cranes

– engine room cranes / workshop cranes

– hatch cover cranes

– hose cranes

2.3.2 Crane group A2 includes offshore cranes notused for cargo-handling, such as e.g.:

– offshore working cranes

2.3.3 Crane group A3 includes floating cranes not

used for cargo-handling, like e.g.:

– mounting cranes

3. Crane group B

3.1 Crane group B primarily includes cranes usedfor cargo-handling, and which are not always exposedto the full nominal load. These cranes are character-ized by regular use and longer rest periods.

3.2 Crane group B is further subdivided as fol-lows:

3.2.1 Crane group B1 includes ship cranes forcargo-handling using spreaders or hooks, such as e.g.:

– container cranes

– general cargo cranes

3.2.2 Crane group B2 includes cranes for cargo-handling using hooks at sea, such as e.g.:

– general cargo cranes

– offshore cranes according to A.3.2

3.2.3 Crane group B3 includes floating cranes forcargo-handling using hooks, such as e.g.:

– cargo-handling cranes

4. Crane group C

4.1 Crane group C primarily includes cranes forcargo-handling and which are regularly exposed to thefull or nearly full nominal load.

4.2 Crane group C is further subdivided as fol-lows:

4.2.1 Crane group C1 includes ship cranes forcargo-handling using grabs, hooks or special loosegear, such as e.g.:

– grab cranes

– pallet cranes

4.2.2 Crane group C2 includes ship cranes forcargo-handling offshore using grabs, such as e.g.:

– grab cranes

– lighter cranes

4.2.3 Crane group C3 includes floating cranes forcargo-handling using grabs, such as e.g.:

– grab cranes

– lighter cranes

5. Change of crane group

5.1 In the cases of a change of crane group,change to the nominal load or change to the load ra-dius, in addition to an examination of drawings, themanufacturer shall calculate the estimated residuallifetime, where applicable.

C. Design Loads

1. General notes

1.1 The loads acting on the structural compo-nents of cranes and their supporting structures aresubdivided as follows:

– regular loads

– irregular loads

– special loads

1.2 Cranes for the conveyance of persons are tocomply with the requirements according to Section 3,B.5.1 and 5.2.

1.3 If necessary, loads not addressed in the fol-lowing shall be properly taken into account. The ratingof such loads and considering them in the correspond-ing load combinations is to be agreed with GL.

Chapter 2Page 4–2

Section 4 Cranes and Supporting Structures VI - Part 2GL 2012

C



2. Regular loads

2.1 Dead loads LE

Dead loads are to be determined in accordance with

Section 3, B.4.2.A. distinction should be made be-tween loading and unloading dead loads acting oneach structural element.

2.2 Hoist load LH

The definition of hoist load is given in Section 1,C.10. Regarding the crane dimensioning, the nominalload is to be regarded as part of the hoist load.

Depending on the type of operation, the followinghoist loads exist:

– harbour operation: LH = (LEA + L Ne)

– sea operation : LHsee = (LEA + L Nsee)

or for underwater operation:

LHu = (LEA + L Nu)

L Nsee is to be calculated according to D.3.2.1, L Nu

according to Annex B.

2.3 Loads from driving over an uneven run-way

Where the design conditions according to G.4.4 aremet, the application of vertical dynamic forces caused

by driving over an uneven runway may be omitted. Orelse the application of the load is to be agreed withGL.

2.4 Dynamic forces due to drive systems

2.4.1 General notes

2.4.1.1 The dynamic forces of loads and dead loadscaused by drive systems may be determined in a sim-

plified manner using the method described in the fol-lowing. The set-down of a load corresponds arithmeti-cally to the lifting of a resting load and is not men-

tioned explicitly in the following.

2.4.1.2 The designations "vertical" and "horizontal"refer to the coordinate system of the cranes.

2.4.2 Vertical dynamic forces due to lifting of a

load

2.4.2.1 The acceleration forces generated by thelifting of a resting load during harbour operation are

allowed for by using the hoist load coefficient ψ, to bedetermined according to D.3.1.

2.4.2.2 The acceleration forces generated by the

rising of a resting or moving load during sea operationare allowed for by using the hoist load coefficients

ψsee or ψu, to be determined according to D.3.2 or

according to Annex B.

2.4.3 Vertical dynamic loads due to suspended

load

Generally, for a suspended load no lifting or brakingforces need to be considered. This also applies for

braking a crane boom with suspended load.

2.4.4 Horizontal dynamic forces due to lifting ofa load

2.4.4.1 In the case of lifting a resting load during

harbour operation, the horizontal components of the

load LH ⋅ ψ, resulting from the ship’s heeling angle

according to Table 3.1, are to be assumed as horizon-tal dynamic forces, see also 2.6.2.

2.4.4.2 In the case of lifting a resting or moving loadduring sea operation, the horizontal components of the

loads LHsee ⋅ ψsee or LHu ⋅ ψu, resulting from the ship’s

heeling angle according to Table 3.1 and the cargorunner deflection angle according to 2.6.3, are to beassumed as horizontal dynamic forces.

2.4.5 Horizontal dynamic forces due to sus-

pended load

2.4.5.1 The accelerations at the crane boom peak dueto rotating, slewing, pivoting and telescoping motionsare to be indicated by the manufacturer.

2.4.5.2 If no other proof is given, the radial accelera-

tion br for rotating and slewing cranes may be calcu-

lated as follows:

2 22 2

r

v r n b = r = [m/s ]

r 91

⋅ω ⋅ ≈

ω = (π · n) / 30 = angular speed [1/s]

r = rotating/slewing radius [m]

v = ω · r = circumferential speed [m/s]

n = r.p.m. [1/min]

In the case of rotating cranes, for hoists on the ship oron the installation half of the circumferential speed

may be assumed.

2.4.5.3 In the case of rotating or slewing cranes, thetangential acceleration bt may be assumed to be equal

to the radial acceleration br according to 2.4.4.2, if no

other proof is given.

2.4.5.4 The horizontal forces of the useful load andthe dead load of the crane boom due to the ship´s

heeling ε and the rotating or slewing acceleration may

be added vectorially. For ε see Section 3, B.4.4.1.4.

2.4.6 Horizontal dynamic forces with mobile

cranesHorizontal dynamic forces, caused by starting and

braking in the direction of travelling, are to be indi-cated by the manufacturer. If such manufacturer’s

VI - Part 2GL 2012


C

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-





2.7.2 The load FSa which is to be used for dimen-

sioning, see Fig. 4.1,is to be calculated as follows:

FSa = f a ⋅ L N

f a = 1 – (1 + ϕ) · N

N

ΔL

L

ϕ = 0,5 for grabs or slow load dropping

= 1,0 for load magnets or fast load dropping

Fig. 4.1 Dropping of a part of the useful load

Fig. 4.2 Hoist load torn off

2.7.3 When the dropping factor is f a < 0 , the load

FSa may become negative as well. This corresponds to

a load directed upwards.

2.8 Tie-down force of the cargo hooks

When cargo hooks are tied-down for the load condi-tion "crane out of service", this load is to be consid-

ered as the tie-down force. This load is to be indicated by the manufacturer. If no information is available,this load my be assumed to be 10 % of the nominalload L Ne.

3. Irregular loads

3.1 Wind loads

Wind loads are to be assumed according to Section 3,B.4.5.

The total wind load acting on a crane structure is thesum of the single wind loads acting on its variousstructural components.

3.2 Snow and ice loads

For snow and ice loads, the requirements of Section 3,B.4.6 apply.

3.3 Temperature loads

For temperature loads, the requirements of Section 3,B.4.7 apply.

3.4 Side forces when driving (diagonal drive)

3.4.1 The side forces occurring when the crane or trolley is being driven are to be taken into consideration.

3.4.2 When 2 wheels or wings are mounted for 1rail, the two forces generated by one-sided guidance

may be calculated by multiplying the wheel or wing

load with the side force coefficient γSk

according to

Fig.. 4.3. The side force coefficient γSk depends on the

ratio between span bs and wheel spacing lr .

3.4.3 Two-sided guidances or more than 2 wheelsor wings on 1 rail are to be considered separately.

Fig. 4.3 Side force coefficient Sk

4. Special loads

4.1 Dynamic test loads

The dynamic test loads LPdyn for cranes are to be

taken from Section 13, Table 13.2. The hoist load

coefficient ψ may be reduced using the followingformula:

ψP = (1 + ψ) / 2

VI - Part 2GL 2012


C



4.2 Buffering forces

4.2.1 At the ends of carriage ways of cranes andtrolleys, arrestors are to be mounted with buffers at-tached either to them or to the cranes.

Buffers are to be dimensioned such, that they are capable to absorb 70 % of the kinetic energy of the load-ing gear driving at maximum speed. The mass of os-cillatingly suspended hoist loads are not considered.

4.2.2 The impact force on the buffer is to be deter-mined from the buffer characteristic and - in order totake into consideration the dynamic effect of the buff-ering force - to be multiplied with the following factorf p:

f p = 1,25 for buffer with linear characteristic

= 1,60 for buffer with rectangular characteristic

4.2.3 Lower speeds than according to 4.2.1 may beassumed, if reliable (redundant) appliances reduce thespeed in way of the runway ends.

4.3 Loads on stairs, ladders, platforms and

railings

For access loads, see the requirements of Section 3,I.9.

4.4 Loads due to safety systems

The loads LS due to safety systems, such as e.g.

– AOPS (Automatic Overload Protection System)

– MOPS (Manual Overload Protection System)

– ELRS (Emergency Load Release System)

are to be indicated by the crane manufacturer.

4.5 Tear-off of the hoist load

In the catastrophic case of the hoist load torn off, this

results in f a = − 1, according to 2.7.2 and Fig. 4.2, f a

and with this, the calculated load, directed upwards,

becomes − LH.

D. Hoist load coefficients

1. General notes

1.1 The hoist load or the loads resulting from itare to be multiplied with an allocated hoist load coeffi-cient for the lifting of the resting load. If the crane hasseveral hoisting appliances or differing hoisting speeds,individual hoist load coefficients are to be allocated toeach of them.

1.2 For the strength analysis of load-bearing

structural elements as far as its fastening to the shiphull, reduced hoist load coefficients may be applied, ifthe corresponding dampening in the load-bearingsystem is proven by calculation or measurement.

2. Hoist load coefficient as a function ofcrane group and hoisting speed

2.1 For harbour operations, the hoist load coeffi-cient may be simplified taken from Table 4.1.

2.2 An individual calculation of the hoist loadcoefficient according to 3. may be necessary or advis-able.

Table 4.1 Hoist load coefficient for differentcrane groups

Crane-

groupSWL

Hoist load

coefficientmin

A1 > 0 t 1,05 + 0,34 · vh 1,17

B1 ≤ 100 t 1,15 + 0,51 · vh 1,20

≤ 250 t 1,10 + 0,34 · vh 1,15

≤ 500 t 1,05 + 0,17 · vh 1,10

> 500 t 1,05

C1 > 0 t 1,15 + 0,51 · vh 1,35

For descriptions of crane groups, see B.2. to B.4.

vh acc. to Table 4.2

Table 4.2 Hoisting speed in the course of liftingthe load

Lifting gear type

and hoisting speed vh Load

combination

HD 1 HD 2 HD 3 HD 4

LK I + LK II vhmax vhF vhF 0,5 ⋅ vhmax

LK III 1 − vhmax − vhmax

1 For lifting gear types HD 2 and HD 4, the hoist load

coefficient ψ calculated from vhmax is to be proven as load

combination III1

HD 1 = creep hoist not possible

HD 2 = creep hoist selectable by the crane driver

HD 3 = creep hoist switched on automatically untilthe load is lifted from the ground

HD 4 = hoisting speed is infinitely variable by thecrane driver

vhmax = maximum constant hoisting speed of theallocated load [m/s]

vhF = constant creep hoisting speed [m/s]

Chapter 2Page 4–6


D



3. Calculation of the hoist load coefficient ψ as a function of the crane stiffness

3.1 Harbour operation

3.1.1 Calculation of the hoist load coefficient ψ

The hoist load coefficient is to be calculated as follows:

shmin

Ne

cv1

9,81 L

⎡ ⎤ψ = + ⋅ ≥ ψ⎢ ⎥

⎢ ⎥⎣ ⎦

ψmin = minimum value according to Table 4.1

vh = hoisting speed in the course of lifting of the

nominal load according to Table 4.2 [m/s]

cs = crane stiffness according to 3.3 [kN/m]

L Ne = nominal load [t]

3.1.2 Simplified calculation for jib cranes withhoisting and luffing ropes

In the case of jib cranes with hoisting and luffingropes, only the hoisting and luffing ropes as well asthe crane boom need to be included in the simplified

calculation. The hoist load coefficient ψ is then calcu-lated as follows:

shmin

Ne

cv1 0,9

9,81 L

⎡ ⎤ψ = + ⋅ ⋅ ≥ ψ⎢ ⎥

⎢ ⎥⎣ ⎦

3.2 Sea operation

3.2.1 Calculation of the hoist load coefficient ψsee

sr see

Nsee

cv1

9,81 L

ψ = + ≥ ψ

vr = relative speed between load and hook in the

course of lifting the load [m/s] according to3.2.2

cs = crane stiffness [kN/m] according to 3.3

L Nsee = nominal load at sea [t]

ψ = hoist load coefficient for harbour operation

With the exception of cranes dimensioned only for seaoperation, the following condition is to be observed:

L Ne · ψ ≥ L Nsee · ψsee

3.2.2 Relative speed between load and hook

vr = vh + vsee [m/s]

vh = hoisting speed in the course of lifting the

respective nominal load L Nsee according to

Table 4.2 [m/s]

The minimum hoisting speed according toG.3.1.1 is to be taken, if larger than vh.

vsee = speed induced by seastate according to Table

4.3

Table 4.3 Speed induced by seastate vsee

From the location

of the crane (va) 1 to the cargo deck or to the sea surface (vd) 2

vsee=(va2 + vd

2)1/2 Fixed

installation

Semi-

submersibleFSO / FPSO Large barge Small barge Supply ship Sea surface

Fixed installation 0 0,25·(H1/3)0,75 0,32·(H1/3)0,75 0,38·(H1/3)0,75 0,50·(H1/3)0,75 0,70·(H1/3)0,75 0,85·(H1/3)0,67

Semi-submersible 0,25 · H1/3 0,35·(H1/3)0,90 0,40·(H1/3)0,88 0,47·(H1/3)0,87 0,60·(H1/3)0,83 0,73·(H1/3)0,80 0,90·(H1/3)0,70

FSO / FPSO 0,40 · H1/3 0,45 · H1/3 0,53·(H1/3)0,88 0,62·(H1/3)0,90 0,70·(H1/3)0,90 0,80·(H1/3)0,87 (H1/3)

0,78

Large barge 0,60 · H1/3 0,65 · H1/3 0,70·(H1/3)0,94 0,75·(H1/3)0,94 0,85·(H1/3)0,94 0,90·(H1/3)0,94 1,20·(H1/3)0,80

Small barge 1,10 · H1/3 1,11 · H1/3 1,16·(H1/3)0,94 1,18·(H1/3)0,97 1,20·(H1/3)0,97 1,30·(H1/3)0,94 1,40·(H1/3)0,91

1 va = vertical speed of the crane boom peak [m/s]

2 vd = vertical speed of the cargo deck [m/s]

VI - Part 2GL 2012


D



3.3 Calculation of the crane stiffness cs

3.3.1 Principals of calculation

3.3.1.1 The stiffness of a crane depends on the load

radius and the height of the load hook.

3.3.1.2 For calculation of the crane stiffness, besidesthe ropes all load-bearing structures as far as the fas-tening of the crane column or the crane base are to betaken into consideration, with the exception of 3.1.1.

3.3.1.3 Regarding the approach of the rope stiffness,the Young´s modulus indicated by the rope manufac-turer is to be taken.

3.3.2 Permissible simplification for the calcula-tion

3.3.2.1 For round strand ropes, without a more pre-

cise proof a Young’s modulus of 1,0 ⋅ 105 N/mm2, based on the gross cross-section, may be taken.

3.3.2.2 Curve-shaped load grading

In the case of a uniform, curve-shaped useful load vs.load radius diagram, the crane stiffness is to be calcu-lated at least for the end points and the one-third points of the regarded range of load radius. Based onthese values, a continuous curve may be determined.

3.3.2.3 Step-shaped load grading

In the case of a step-shaped grading of the useful loadvs. load radius diagram, the stiffness is to be calcu-lated for each load level according to 3.3.2.2. As analternative, the stiffness may be calculated for theminimum load radius of each load level. These valuesapply then for the whole range of one level.

3.3.2.4 Height of the cargo hook

For operations in harbour conditions it may be as-sumed, that the cargo hook is at the altitude of thecrane boom pivot point. For operations in seas-tate/offshore conditions it may be assumed that thecargo hook is 6 m above the water surface, except forunderwater operations.

4. Calculation of the hoist load coefficient u

for underwater operations

For underwater operations, calculation of the hoist

load coefficient ψu may be simplified in accordance

with Annex B. Using this method, special appliancessuch as e.g. rope-spindling devices or heave compen-sators cannot be considered.

The following condition is to be observed:

L Ne · ψ ≥ L Nu · ψu

5. Calculation of the hoist load coefficient forhoists onboard the ship or on the installa-tion

For hoists onboard the ship or on the installation, the

simplified hoist load coefficient for sea operationsmay be assumed to be:

ψsee = 1,15 + 0,51 · vh ≥ ψ

vh = hoisting speed in the course of lifting the

nominal load according to Table 4.2 [m/s]

ψ = hoist load coefficient for harbour operation

6. Calculation of the hoist load coefficient for

auxiliary hoists

The hoist load coefficient for auxiliary hoists is calcu-lated (simplified) to be:

ψ = 1,20 + 0,68 · vh ≥ ψmin = 1,45

7. Calculation of the hoist load coefficient bymeans of hydrodynamic analysis

7.1 Using model tests or stochastic and hydrody-namic calculation methods, the hoist load coefficientcan be determined more accurate. These methodsgenerally apply for all service conditions of the crane.

7.2 The calculation is to be performed underconsideration of the motion behavior of the floating bodies involved and the stiffness of the crane. Influ-ences of special appliances such as rope-spindlingdevices or heave compensators may be taken intoaccount in the process.

7.3 The calculation is to include at least the fol-lowing influences, if applicable:

– vertical and horizontal motions of the cargo

deck

– motion behavior of the offshore installation / thefloating body, on which the crane is mounted

– load-bearing structure of the crane

– hydrodynamic properties of a floating or sub-merged load

– influence of anchoring systems

– environmental conditions agreed

7.4 The calculation is to be submitted to GL forthe examination of the crane as a document for infor-mation. In particular, the influences listed in 7.3 are to be represented clearly in the document.

Chapter 2Page 4–8


D





Table 4.4 Load combinations and partial safety factors for cranes in service

I I I 4 1 , 0

− − − − − − − − − − 1 , 0

I I I 3

1 , 0 1 , 0 − − − − − − − − 1 , 0 −

I I I 2 1 , 0

− − − 0 , 2

− − − − ψ p

− −

I I I 1

1 , 0

2

− − − − − − − ψ m a x

− − −

I I I

p i

1 , 1

0 1

1 , 1

0 − −

1 , 1

0 − − −

1 , 1

0

1 , 1

0

1 , 1

0

1 , 0

0

1 , 1

0

1 , 2

2

I I 3 1 , 0

1 , 0

− − 1 , 0

1 , 0

1 , 0

1 , 0

I I 2 1 , 0 1 , 0 1 , 0 1 , 0 1 , 0 1 , 0 1 , 0 −

I I 1 1 , 0

ψ

− ψ

1 , 0

1 , 0

1 , 0

−

I I

p i

1 , 1

6 1

1 , 2

2

1 , 2

2

1 , 2

2

1 , 2

2

1 , 2

2

1 , 1

6

1 , 1

6

1 , 1

0

1 , 3

4

I 2 1 , 0

1 , 0

1 , 0

1 , 0

I 1 1 , 0

ψ

− ψ

L o a d c o m b i n a t i o n s

I

p i

1 , 2 2 1

1 , 3 4

1 , 3 4

1 , 3 4

1 , 1

0

1 , 4

8

C . 2 . 1

C . 2 . 2

C . 2 . 4

C . 2 . 6

C . 3 . 1

C . 3 . 2

C . 3 . 3

C . 3 . 4

T a b .

4 . 2

C . 4 . 1

C . 4 . 2

C . 4 . 4

R e f e r e n c e

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

i 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0

1 1

1 2

L o a d s

D e a d l o a d s L E

( i n c l u d i n g i n c l i n a t i o n o f c r a n e b a s e )

H o i s t l o a d L H


D y n a m i c f o r c e s d u e t o d r

i v e s

3

D i a g o n a l p u l l

W i n d l o a d s i n o p e r a t i o n

S n o w a n d i c e l o a d s

T e m p e r a t u r e l o a d s

S i d e f o r c e s d u r i n g d r i v e

H o i s t i n g o f h o i s t l o a d a t

v h m a x

D y n a m i c t e s t l o a d L p , d y n


B u f f i n g f o r c e s

L o a d s c a u s e d b y s a f e t y s y s t e m s

4 ,

5

L o a d

c a t e g o r i e s

R

e g u l a r l o a d s

N o n - r e g u l a r

l o a d s

S

p e c i a l l o a d s

D r a g c o e f f i c i e n t γ m

G l o b a l s a f e t y c o e f f i c i e n t γ s

1

W h e n l o a d c o m p o n e n t s h a v e a f a v o u r a b l e e f f e c t , γ p i = 0 , 9

5 .

I f m a s s e s a n d c e n t r e s o f g r a v i t y a r e d e t e r m i n e d b y w e i g h i n g ,

0 , 9

5 · γ p i m a y b

e a s s u m e d .

2

C o m p o n e n t s c a u s e d b y i n c l i n a t i o n o f c r a n e b a

s e m a y b e n e g l e c t e d .

3

a p p l i c a b l e f o r l o a d c o m p o n e n t s f r o m d e a d l o a d a n d h o i s t l o a d

4

E m e r g e n c y s t o p i s t o b e v e r i f i e d b y a p r a c t i c a l t e s t w i t h a t e s t l o a d o f L P d y n , s e e S e c t i o n 1 3 ,

B . 4 . 2 . 2 . 3 .

5

L o a d s w h i c h m a y b e g e n e r a t e d b y a c t i v a t e d s a

f e t y s y s t e m s , a r e t o b e i n d i c a t e d b y t h e m a n u f a c t u r e r



E



4. Explanations regarding load combinationsfor the proof of stability against overturn-ing according to Table 4.6

4.1 Load combination I

Load combination I includes regular loads under nor-mal operation.

4.1.1 I1-Combination of regular loads

For load combination I1, all regular loads are to be

superimposed, as necessary.

4.2 Load combination II

Load combination II includes regular loads in normaloperation together with non-regular load.

4.2.1 II - Load combination I with wind loads

Load combination II results from load combination I plus allocated wind loads.

4.3 Load combination III

Load combinations III comprise special load combina-tions.

4.3.1 III1 - Test loads

Load combination III1 considers the hoisting of the

dynamic test load at a 20 % wind load.

4.3.2 III2 - Buffer forces

Load combination III3 comprises the impact of a crane

with hoist load against the end buffers.

Table 4.5 Load combinations and partial safety factors for cranes out of service

Load combinations

IA IIIA Load

categoriesLoads i Reference

pi IA1 pi IIIA1

Dead loads LE 1 4 C.2.1 1,22 1 1,0 1,10 1 1,10

Dynamic forces due to ship mo-

tions2 4 C.2.5.3 1,22 1,0 1,10 1,10Regular loads

Tie-down force of the cargo hook 3 4 C.2.8 1,22 1,0 1,10 1,10

Snow and ice loads 4 4 C.3.2 1,10 1,10 Non-regular

loads Temperature loads 5 4 C.3.3 1,05 1,10

Special loads Wind loads out of operation 6 3 C.3.1 1,10 1,10

Drag coefficient γm 1,10 1,10

Global safety coefficient γs 1,48 1,22

1 Where load components have a favorable effect, γ pi = 0,95

Table 4.6 Load combinations and partial safety factors for proof of stability against overturning

Load combinations

I II IIILoad


pi I1 pi II1 pi III1 III2

Dead loads LE (including

inclination of the crane base)1 4 C.2.1 1,10 1 1,0 1,10 1 1,0 1,00 1 1,0 1,10

Hoist load LH (including

inclination of the crane base)2 4 C.2.2 1,34 1,0 1,22 1,0 1,00 − 1,10

Dynamic forces due to drives 2 3 4 C.2.4 1,34 1,0 1,22 1,0 − − 1,10

Regular loads

Diagonal pull 4 4 C.2.6 1,34 1,22 1,0 − − −

Non-regular

loadsWind loads in operation 5 4 C.3.1 1,22 1,0 1,00 0,2 1,10

Dynamic test load L p,dyn

(including inclination of the

crane base)

6 4 C.4.1 1,16 1,0 − Special loads

Buffer forces 7 4 C.4.2 1,10 − 1,0

1 Where load components have a favorable effect, γ pi = 0,95

2 Applicable for load components from dead load and hoist load

VI - Part 2GL 2012


E



F. Proofs

1. General

1.1 The following proofs are to be conducted for

all structural elements, connections and supportingstructures of cranes for the service conditions "inservice" and "out of service":

– strength analysis according to Section 3, D. andSection 3, H.

– proof of stability according to Section 3, D.

– fatigue strength analysis according to Section 3, F.

1.2 The following proofs are to be conducted fora complete crane, as required:

– proof of stability against overturning according

to Section 3, E. – proof of suitability for use according to Section

3, G.

1.3 For the proof of crane boom supports andrectangular crane columns, the requirements in 6. and7. apply.

2. Strength analyses and proofs of stability

2.1 Strength analyses and proofs of stability areto be conducted using the partial safety factors ofTable 4.4 or Table 4.5, respectively, for the load combinations of E.

3. Fatigue strength analyses

3.1 In general, fatigue strength analyses are to beconducted for the load combination I of Table 4.4 and

Table 4.5 with the partial safety factors γ pi = 1,0.

As a basis for dimensioning regarding fatigue strength

analyses the crane manufacturer shall provide loadcycles and the respective load spectrum (see also Ta- ble 4.7).

Table 4.7 Load spectra and load cycles (examples for a service life of 20 years) for ships and floatingcranes in harbour operation

Crane group acc. to

Section 4, B.Crane type

Load spectrum acc.

to Section 3, F.3.1No. of load cycles

Hatch cover crane

Engine room/workshop craneProvisions crane

S6

S2S2

20.000

10.00020.000

A1Cranes operating on

ships or installations

Hose crane S6 50.000

A2

Floating cranes

Mounting crane, SWL ≤ 60 t

Mounting crane, 60 t < SWL ≤ 500 t

Mounting crane, SWL > 500 t

S2

S3

S4

80.000

50.000

20.000

B1

Ship cranes

Container crane SWL ≤ 60 t

General cargo crane, SWL ≤ 60 t

General cargo crane , 60 t < SWL ≤ 250 t

General cargo crane , 250 t < SWL ≤ 500 t

General cargo crane , SWL > 500 t

S3

S2

S3

S4

S4

350.000

250.000

100.000

70.000

50.000

B3

Floating cranes

Cargo-handling crane, SWL ≤ 60 t

Cargo-handling crane, 60 t < SWL ≤ 250 t

Cargo-handling crane, 250 t < SWL ≤ 500 t

Cargo-handling crane, SWL > 500 t

S2

S3

S4

S4

300.000

125.000

80.000

60.000

C1

Ship cranes

Grab crane, SWL ≤ 60 t

Gab crane, SWL > 60 t

Pallet crane

S5

S5

S6

600.000

450.000

600.000

C3Floating cranes

Grab crane, SWL ≤ 60 t

Grab crane, SWL > 60 t

Lighter crane

S5

S5

S5

700.000

500.000

2.000.000



F



3.2 For cranes with load cycle numbers ≤ 20000,a fatigue strength analysis may be dispensed with.

3.3 The fatigue strength analysis for the condi-tion "out of service" is to be conducted for a load

cycle number of 5 ⋅ 107. This assumes a straight-linespectrum A according to Section 3, Fig. 3.3.

3.4 Superposition of "in service" and "out ofservice"

A superposition of the fatigue damage due to the ser-vice conditions "in service" and "out of service" is notnecessary, as long as the maximum stress in the ser-vice condition "out of service" does not exceed 10 %of the maximum stress in the service condition "inservice". Or else the load spectrum applicable for theanalysis and the allocated load cycle numbers are to beagreed with GL.

4. Proof of stability against overturning

4.1 The proof of stability against overturning isto be conducted with the partial safety factors and loadcombinations according to Table 4.6, unless notshown in practice, see Section 3, E.2.1.3.

5. Proof of suitability for use

5.1 Proof procedures

5.1.1 Proofs of suitability for use may be per-formed in the course of the initial testing onboard,mathematically or as a combination of both proce-dures.

5.1.2 In general, the mathematical proof of suitabil-ity for use is to be conducted for the load combinationI according to Tables 4.4 and 4.5 using partial safety

factors γ pi = 1,0.

5.2 Proof of permissible deflection of cranebooms

The maximum deflection of pressure-loaded crane

booms shall correspond to the crane boom lengthdivided by 350, if the dead weight alone is considered,and to the crane boom length divided by 250, if deadweight plus hoist load are considered.

The peak of crane booms under bending stress whichare held by luffing cylinders, shall in general not ex-ceed a vertical lowering of the maximum crane boomlength divided by 100.

5.3 Proof against remaining in the highestcrane boom position

5.3.1 Where no restoring or warning devices ac-

cording to Section 12, B.1.1.2.2 are provided, a proofof suitability for use is to be shown for crane boomshandled by luffing ropes under the following boundaryconditions:

– dead load coefficient ϕe = 0,95 for all load components of the crane boom, unless they are con-firmed by weighing. Else ϕe = 1,0

– static ship inclinations according to Section 3,

Table 3.1

– hoist load coefficient ψ = 1,0

– wind load acting unfavourably, calculated from80 % of the mean dimensioning wind speed inservice according to Section 3, B.4.5

– consideration of all friction and guide losses

5.3.2 For crane booms handled by cylinders, therequirements in Section 12, B.1.1.3 apply.

6. Proof of crane boom supports

Crane boom supports are to be proven for the loadcombinations in Table 4.5 and the allocated partialsafety factors. In addition, the following is to be ob-served:

– The dead load also includes the dead load component of the crane boom.

– Where a relative movement is possible betweenthe crane boom and the crane bom support, ad-

ditionally an alternating friction force is to beconsidered, with a friction coefficient of at leastμ = 0,15.

7. Proof for rectangular crane columns

A general strength analysis is to be conducted regard-ing the maximum corner stress. This is done by allo-

cating the maximum crane moment MKmax to themain axes of the crane column in the most unfavour-able distribution.

G. Requirements for design and equipment

1. General note

The following statements complement the require-ments in this and other Sections of the Rules at hand.

Structural elements, details of equipment and design,which are not covered, are to be dealt with accordingto the "Generally recognized rules of good practice".

2. Supporting structures

2.1 Design requirements for crane columns

2.1.1 Access to cranesRegarding the accesses to cranes inside or outside ofcrane columns, the statements in Section 10, E.2.2 andSection 12, B.1.4 apply.

VI - Part 2GL 2012


G



2.1.2 Notes on design and calculation

2.1.2.1 In the case of tapered transition components,which transit from a cylindrical crane connection to arectangular column, special attention is to be paid to

the knuckle line between the cambered parts and the plane gussets. If necessary, thicker plates are to be provided.

2.1.2.2 In way of connections of tapered or trapezoidtransitions of crane columns, knuckle lines, especiallyof even plates are to be stiffened, if necessary by bulkheads, in order to absorb the deviation forces.

2.1.2.3 The transition parts and their connectionareas described above, require special care regardingfabrication and suitable mathematical proofs.

2.1.2.4 The connection of container supports to cranecolumns requires special care regarding design andcalculation.

2.1.3 Execution of cylindrical crane columnswelds

In the case of cylindrical crane columns, all transverseand longitudinal welds are to be the full penetrationtype.

2.1.4 Execution of rectangular crane columns

welds

All transverse welds of rectangular crane columns areto be the full penetration type. Regarding longitudinalwelds, the following applies:

a) Longitudinal welds in the plates are to be thefull penetration type.

b) The connecting welds at the corners may bedimensioned for the maximum shear force andmay be executed as fillet welds.

2.1.5 Connection to the ship hull/offshore instal-lation

2.1.5.1 Wherever possible, crane columns should belinked to the hull over a full deck height, if necessary,e.g. in the case of crane columns located at the ship’sside, even to a greater depth into the structure of theship

2.1.5.2 Supporting structures interrupted by decks,shall have well aligned connections. If necessary,control bores are to be provided, which are to bewelded up after the control.

2.1.5.3 For the shear connection of inserted cylindri-cal crane columns, the required plate thickness of theconnecting deck or of the connecting weld may becalculated according to Section 3, D.5.3.

2.1.5.4 Crane columns which due to their location actas stiffness-discontinuities in the longitudinal andtransverse structures of ships, such as e.g. laterallyarranged crane columns with outer longitudinal walls,which are attached to the shell plating of the ship, are

to have suitable taper brackets, as required.

2.1.5.5 Crane columns shall not be connected tohatch coamings, if possible. Where the connection tohatch coamings cannot be avoided, suitable measuresare required, like e.g. tapered brackets and strengthanalyses for the additional loads.

2.2 Requirements for the design of the stowagetrough of crane boom supports

2.2.1 If possible, the stowage trough shall embracethe stowage spur or a stowage holm without majorclearance (10 to 20 mm at maximum) and be linedwith wood or other suitable material.

2.2.2 The gripping effect in the stowage trough,caused by torsion of the ship’s hull, in particular withcrane booms which are not stowed lengthwise, is to becounteracted by a suitable design.

2.2.3 Where a luffing rope operated crane boom isnot fixed downwards by tying-down of the cargohook, locking devices are to be provided in way of thestowing trough in order to prevent of the crane boom

coming off.

These devices shall not restrain the relative motions between stowing trough and crane boom.

2.2.4 Each stowing trough shall be accessible bymeans of ladders or climbing irons and locally providea suitable area for operating, control and/or mainte-nance purposes.

3. Hook speeds when operating under

sea/offshore conditons

3.1 Minimum hoisting speed

3.1.1 Cranes with a nominal load ≤ 60 t

3.1.1.1 When operating under sea/offshore condi-tions, the hoisting speed shall be high enough to avoidrepeated contact between load and cargo deck afterhoisting.

3.1.1.2 The uniform minimum hoisting speed vhmin

shall not fall below the following value:

– multiple- reeved cargo runner:

vhmin ≥ 0,3 ⋅ vsee [m/s]



G

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-



– single-reeved cargo runner:

vhmin ≥ 0,5 ⋅ vsee [m/s]

vsee = seastate-induced speed according to Table 4.3

[m/s]

3.1.2 Cranes with a nominal load > 60 t

When operating under Sea/offshore conditions, thehook speed resulting from superimposing the hoistingand the luffing speed as well as the ballast speed of thefloating body shall be high enough to avoid damage tothe crane or the load from repeated contact betweenload and cargo deck

3.2 Horizontal hook speed

3.2.1 Slewing cranes with a nominal load ≤ 60 t

3.2.1.1 During loading and unloading of floating bodies, it is important that the crane hook is capable offollowing the horizontal movement of the cargo deck.

3.2.1.2 The uniform slewing speed vω at the crane

boom peak at about ¾ of the maximum load radiusshall not fall below the following value:

vω ≥ 0,60 ⋅ vsee [m/s]

vsee

= seastate-induced speed according to Table 4.3

[m/s]

3.2.1.3 The uniform luffing speed vW at the crane

boom peak at about ¾ of the maximum load radiusshall not fall below the following value:

vW ≥ 0,10 · vsee [m/s]

3.2.2 Cranes with a nominal load > 60 t

3.2.2.1 The luffing speed and luffing acceleration shall be sufficient to ensure control of transverse load oscilla-tion.

3.2.2.2 Load arresting ropes which limit the swing-ing of the load may be taken into consideration ac-cording to their effectiveness.

4. Design details

4.1 Connection of slewing bearings

4.1.1 Proof of bolts

4.1.1.1 The bolt connection is to be dimensionedaccording to recognized guidelines, calculation princi-

ples or standards according to which, if need be, also afatigue strength proof for the bolts can be conducted,e.g. VDI-Guideline 2230.

The global safety factors according to Section 3, C.7.2 are to be proven.

4.1.1.2 Special care is to be taken over the determi-nation of the maximum bolt force, as e.g. an openingof the gap increases the bolt force non-linear.

4.1.1.3 The stiffness of the slewing bearing can have asignificant influence on the stress distribution in theconnecting structure. The sector force Fa for the maxi-

mum loaded bolt according to Fig. 4.4 is to be deter-mined according to a recognized calculation procedure(e.g. FEM calculation under consideration of the con-necting structure's stiffness) or by measurement.

4.1.1.4 A simplified bolt proof according to 4.1.2 can be conducted on condition the restrictions for applica-tion according to 4.1.2.1 are complied with.

Fig. 4.4 Bolt sector and sector force

VI - Part 2GL 2012


G



4.1.2 Simplified bolt proof

4.1.2.1 Restrictions for application

The simplified bolt proof can be applied if:

– the outer bolt circle diameter does not exceed3,5 m,

– stiffness of connecting structures (e.g. cranehouse, crane pedestal) is approximately equalover the circumference,

– foot bearings of jibs and, if applicable, bearingsof hydraulic cylinders on the crane house suffi-ciently distant from the base plate of the cranehouse,

– the bolts of the standing and of the rotating ringare even distributed over the circumference andtheir quantity per ring is not less than 12,

– the following relations are kept:

a ≤ 2 ⋅ d

b ≥ 1,5 ⋅ d

a, b, d according to Fig. 4.6

4.1.2.2 Format of proof

The following relations are to be kept:

Zmax / Zlimit ≤ 1 oder Zmax ≤ Zlimit

Zmax = maximum tensile force in bolt according to

4.1.2.3 [kN]

Zlimit = limit value of tensile force in bolt according to

4.1.2.8 [kN]

4.1.2.3 Maximum tensile force in bolt

The maximum tensile force in the bolt is calculated asfollows:

Zmax = f ⋅ Znom [kN]

Znom = nominal tensile force of the highest loaded bolt

of a multiple bolt connection according to 4.1.2.7 [kN]

f = form factor according to Table 4.8 [-]

4.1.2.4 Forces on a large slewing bearing

For the terms and forces in Fig. 4.5 the followingabbreviations are valid, which apply to the outer ringanalogously:

Dr = roller circle diameter [mm]

Dt = pitch circle diameter [mm]

Dm = middle diameter of pedestal [mm]

a = distance between pitch circle and middle of pedestal wall [mm]

br = vertical force lever [mm]

e = distance between bolt centre and start ofchamfer (constraint lever) [mm]

hr = horizontal force lever [mm]

tf = flange thickness [mm]

tw = wall thickness of pedestal [mm]

4.1.2.5 Load from the crane

The following loads are to be determined includingthe global safety factor γs according to Section 3,C.7.2 for the most unfavourable load combinationaccording to Tables 4.4 and 4.5:

MSd = tilting moment [Nmm]

VSd = vertical force [N]

HSd = horizontal force [N]

4.1.2.6 Forces acting on the ring per bolt sector

According to Fig. 4.5 the following forces are valid in

case VSd is pointing in that direction shown in Fig. 4.5(compressive force):

Sdvd Sd

s

4 M 1F V

D n

⋅⎛ ⎞= + ⋅⎜ ⎟

⎝ ⎠ [N]

Sdvz Sd

s

4 M 1F V

D n

⋅⎛ ⎞= − ⋅⎜ ⎟

⎝ ⎠ [N]

Sdh

s

4 HF

n

⋅= [N]

Table 4.8 Form factors

Tensile class of boltKind of flange connection

8.8 10.9 12.9

Tensioning procedure with torsion 1,3876 1,3592Ball bearing

Tensioning procedure without torsion 1,1563 1,13271,3451

Tensioning procedure with torsion 1,2923 1,2659Roller bearing

Tensioning procedure without torsion 1,0769 1,05501,2528



G



Fig. 4.5 Forces on a large slewing bearing

D = lowest value of Dm, Dt and Dr

ns = number of bolts

Fhd = Fvd ⋅ γh [N]

Fhz = Fvz ⋅ γh [N]

Fhd, Fhz forces between the rings with influence to the

bolt forces

γh = horizontal force coefficient:

= 0 for multi row bearing

= 0,577 for single row ball bearing

= 1 for single row cross roller bearing

4.1.2.7 Calculation of maximum nominal tensile force

Based on the dimensions acc. to Fig. 4.5 and on theforces acting on the bearing ring acc. to 4.1.2.6 the maxi-mum nominal tensile force is calculated as follows:

Znom = ( ) r vz h hz

hF F F

a e+ + ⋅

+

4.1.2.8 Limit value of tensile force of bolt

The limit value of tensile force of the bolt is to be calcu-lated as follows:

Zlimit = σlimit ⋅ Ak / 1000 [kN]

σlimit = limit stress acc. to Table 4.9 [N/mm2]

Ak = core section of bolt acc. to Table 3.13 [mm2]

Table 4.9 Limit stresses of bolts

Tensile class 8.8 10.9 12.9

Limit stress σlimit [N/mm2] 560 768 912

4.1.3 Requirements for the flange

4.1.3.1 Flange connection

In general, the upper part of crane columns which are provided with a flange for connection to a slewing bearing shall be designed according to Fig. 4.6 In thecase of an inner bore circle, the same conditions apply.

Fig. 4.6 Upper part of crane column

VI - Part 2GL 2012


G



Dt = partial circle diameter

Da = outer cylinder diameter

tf = flange thickness

d = bore diameter

r = corner radius

a = t a w1D D t

2

− + external partial circle

a = a t w1D D t

2

− − internal partial circle

h = height of connection area

tw1 = cylinder wall thickness in the connection area

tw2 = cylinder wall thickness below the connectionarea

4.1.3.2 Dimensioning of the flange

The flanges are to be designed and dimensioned ac-cording to Section 3, I.1.5.2. In addition the followingconditions are to be met:

tf ≥ 3 ⋅ tw1

tw1 ≥ 1,5 ⋅ tw2

4.1.3.3 Facing

The flange thickness according to 4.1.3.2 shall still bewarranted after the facing.

4.1.3.4 Flange evenness

The evenness of the connecting areas on a slewing bearing shall meet the requirements of the manufac-turer of this bearing.

4.1.3.5 Use of compounds

The use of compounds in order to achieve the even-ness required by the manufacturer of the slewing bear-ing, is only accepted in exceptional cases for repair

purposes upon agreement by GL and slewing bearingmanufacturer.

4.1.4 Requirements for the cylinder wall in the

connection area

4.1.4.1 Dimensioning

The wall thickness t1 and the connection weld are to

be dimensioned with regard to fatigue strength.

4.1.4.2 Height of connection

The height of the uppermost cylinder section accord-

ing to Fig. 4.6 shall at least be 0,2 ⋅ Da , where the

upper limiting point is formed either by the lower edge

of the flange or by the lower edge of brackets.

4.1.5 Revolving circle diameter of the slewingbearings

4.1.5.1 The diameter of the revolving circle shallcorrespond to the mean diameter of the upper andlower connection cylinder, if possible, in order toavoid additional measures, such as e.g. welding of

brackets.

4.1.5.2 Where brackets are to be attached, they shallnot be spaced further than two bore distances.

4.1.6 Requirements for bolts and bores

4.1.6.1 In general, the span length of bolts shall be at

least 5 ⋅ ds.

4.1.6.2 At least 6 thread turns shall remain free.

4.1.6.3 The connecting bolts of slewing bearings ofcranes of the groups B2, B3 and C must have rolledthreads.

4.1.6.4 The size of bolt bores is to be indicated bythe bearing manufacturer (in general according toSection 3, I.1.2).

4.2 Doubling plates

Doubling plates for the transmission of tension forcesand bending moments are not permissible.

4.3 Cruciform joints

Regarding cruciform joints for the transmission offorces perpendicular to the roll direction, the require-ments in Section 3, H.1.2.4 apply.

4.4 Joints of runways

Runways are to be welded continuously and the weldsare to be executed such, that no vertical dynamic forc-es can be induced when travelling.

5. Securing of the hook in the condition"crane out of service"

The swinging of cargo hooks in the condition "crane

out of service" shall be prevented by design, unless

they are tied-down. The tie-down force may exceed

10 % of the nominal load L Ne only in cases where this

was a basis for the dimensioning.



G



Section 5

Lifts and Lifting Platforms

A. General

1. General notes

1.1 This Section contains provisions for the se-lection and dimensioning as well as the manufactureand operation of lifts and lifting platforms on boardseagoing ships. For employment on offshore installa-tions, these devices can be treated in a similar manner.

1.2 The requirements of Section 1 are to be ob-served if applicable.

1.3 Lifts and lifting platforms will be certified byGL following the procedure described in F. In theevent of a Classification being required for goods liftsand lifting platforms, this will be conducted specially,where required, according to the individual case.

Certification and Classification of loading gear aredescribed in Section 1, A.

1.4 As regards the requirements for the materialsto be used, as well as manufacture and welding, the provisions of Sections 2 and 11 apply.

1.5 As regards the requirements for machinerycomponents or electrical installations, the provisionsof Sections 9 and 10 apply, as applicable.

1.6 In this Section a distinction is made between"passenger and small goods lifts" and "goods lifts andlifting platforms", because they are dealt with differ-ently in principle.

2. National regulations

2.1 For passenger and small goods lifts as well asgoods lifts and lifting platforms for operation on boardship, only national regulations apply.

2.2 As regards application of national regula-tions, the requirements in Section 1, B.3. apply.

3. International regulations

3.1 Goods lifts and lifting platforms used for

handling cargo are subject to the provisions of theILO, which have been incorporated into these Ruleswith regard to accident prevention as well as tests andinvestigations.

3.2 Passenger lifts on fixed offshore platformswithin Europe are subject to the European Lifts Direc-tive, goods lifts and lifting platforms are subject to theEuropean Machinery Directive.

4. Special lifts and installations

4.1 Lifts for disabled persons are treated accord-ing to the requirements of the following standard:

ISO 9386, Power operated lifting platforms for per-sons with impaired mobility - Rules for safety, dimen-sions and functional operation.

− Part 1, Vertical lifting platforms

− Part 2, Powered stair lifts for seated, standingand wheelchair users moving in an inclined

plane

4.2 The following installations are not regardedas lifts or lifting platforms and are not dealt with inthese Rules:

− retractable wheelhouses− equipment and units for serving shelves

− escalators

B. Design Principles

1. Special features associated with ships

1.1 Static and dynamic ship inclinations

1.1.1 Operation in harbourLifts and lifting platforms operated in harbour or othercalm waters shall be designed for static ship inclina-tions according to Section 3, Table 3.1.

1.1.2 Operation at sea

Passenger lifts operated at sea shall at least be de-signed for the following dynamic ship inclinations andnatural periods and shall remain safely operable underthese conditions:

a) roll angle of ship αsee = ± 10°

associated roll period TR = 10 s

b) pitch angle of ship βsee = ± 5°

associated pitch period TS = 7 s

VI - Part 2GL 2012

Section 5 Lifts and Lifting Platforms Chapter 2Page 5–1

B



1.1.3 “Out of operation” condition at sea

Lifts and lifting platforms shall be designed for thedynamic forces stated in 2.3.2.2.

1.2 Electrical installations

1.2.1 Electrical installations shall operate reliablyup to a heel of 15° and up to a trim of 7,5°. For elec-trical components which shall not fail even in anemergency situation, these values are 22,5° and 10°respectively.

1.2.2 Up to a 45° inclination of the ship, there shall be no inadvertent switching processes or changes offunction.

1.3 Taking out of operation

If the seaway conditions according to 1.1.2 or thedeviating design conditions are exceeded, passengerlifts shall be switched off and if appropriate, broughtto special stowage positions.

1.4 Environmental conditions

Lifts and lifting platforms are to be designed for theexpected environmental conditions, see Section 3, B.2.

2. Design loads

2.1 Main loads

The main loads of lifts and lifting platforms consist ofdead loads and the useful load. Both load componentsform the hoist load, see Section 1, C.

2.2 Dynamic forces due to drives

For the hoist load and for counterweights, a hoist load

coefficient of ψ = 1,15 is to be incorporated.

2.3 Dynamic forces generated by the ship

2.3.1 Horizontal forces due to ship inclinations

For in harbour operation, the forces due to static shipinclinations given in Section 3, Table 3.1 are to betaken into consideration.

2.3.2 Dynamic forces due to motions of the ship

2.3.2.1 Lifts and lifting platforms operating in a

seaway

For operation in a seaway, dynamic forces due to thedynamic ship inclinations and the natural periods areto be calculated according to Annex A.

2.3.2.2 Lifts and lifting platforms out of operationFor lifts and lifting platforms in their stowage posi-tions, dynamic forces due to ship motion are to becalculated according to Annex A.

2.4 Wind and ice loads

The wind and ice loads defined in Section 3, B.4.5 andB.4.6 are to be taken into consideration where re-quired for goods lifts whose operating area exceedsthe main deck level as may be the case with e.g. trans-verse loading gear.

2.5 Special loads

Gripping device forces and buffering forces are to beestimated based on the respective EN 81-Standard, see3.3.4 and 3.3.5

3. Passenger and small goods lifts

3.1 Design and dimensioning

Passenger and small goods lifts are to comply with the

following standards. Any required deviations and theresulting compensatory measures required are to beclearly indicated in the documentation submitted.

3.1.1 Passenger Lifts

− EN 81-1: Electric lifts

− EN 81-2: Hydraulic lifts

− ISO 8383, Lifts on ships – Specific requirements

The standards EN 81-1 und 81-2 are also applicable togoods lifts.

3.1.2 Small goods lifts

− EN 81-3: Electric and hydraulic small good lifts

3.2 Definitions

In addition to Section 1, C. the following definitionsapply:

3.2.1 Passenger lifts

Electrically or hydraulically driven appliances with aguided lift car for the transport of persons, or persons

and goods, between defined stopping positions.

3.2.2 Small goods lifts

Electrically or hydraulically driven appliances definedas loading gear with a guided, not accessible, lift car,for the transport of goods between defined stopping

positions up to a nominal load of 300 kg and the fol-lowing lift car dimensions:

− car floor area ≤ 1,0 m2

− depth ≤ 1,0 m

− height ≤ 1,2 mWhere the lift car consists of multiple compartments,each of which does not exceed the above dimensions,the height is not restricted to 1,2 m.

Chapter 2Page 5–2

Section 5 Lifts and Lifting Platforms VI - Part 2GL 2012

B



3.3 Load conditions

For the following load conditions, only those whichare applicable or relevant to the component underconsideration need to be verified.

3.3.1 Load condition I1, operation in harbour

LF I1 = (LH + LHH ) ⋅ ψ

LH = hoist load

LHH = horizontal hoist load components due to theship's inclinations, as per Section 3, Table3.1.

3.3.2 Load conditions I2, I3, operation at sea

LF I2 = LHVR + LHHR (roll)

LF I3 = LHVS + LHHS (pitch)

Vertical and horizontal hoist load components due toroll, index R, and due to pitch, index S. For the calcu-lation see 2.3.2.1.

3.3.3 Load conditions III1, III2, lifts out of op-

eration

LF III1 = LEVR + LEHR (roll)

LF III2 = LEVS + LEHS (pitch)

Vertical and horizontal dead load components due toroll, index R, and due to pitch, index S. For the calcu-

lation see 2.3.2.2.

3.3.4 Load condition III3, gripping device forces

LF III3 = ( )E NeL L k + ⋅

LE = dead loads

L Ne = nominal load

k = 5 in case of a wedge type safety catch

3 in case of a roller type safety catch

2 in case of a brake type safety catch

3.3.5 Load condition III4, impact due to buffers

LF III4 = (LE + L Ne) ·2

0, 07 v2

s

⎛ ⎞⋅+⎜ ⎟⎜ ⎟

⎝ ⎠

v = rated speed in m/s

s = proven buffer stroke in m

but not less than (LE + L Ne) · 2,5

3.3.6 Load conditions for the counterweight

In load conditions I1 to I3, LH is to be replaced by LE ,if the calculation refers to the counterweight. In loadconditions III3 and III4 the component of nominal load

L Ne is to be omitted.

3.4 Strength analysis and dimensioning ofvarious components

3.4.1 The strength analysis of passenger and smallgoods lifts is to be conducted in accordance with the

requirements of EN 81-1 to EN 81-3. Additionally therequirements of this Section are to be considered.

3.4.2 For analysis of load conditions I1 to I3, an

off-centre location of the nominal load centre of grav-ity according to the respective EN standard is as-sumed. For small goods lifts a value of 10 % longitu-dinally and transversely is to be used for the lift car.

3.4.3 Guide rails are to be dimensioned for theapplicable load conditions. In the case of passengerlifts, no continuity effect along several fixed pointsshall be assumed.

3.4.4 The safety of means of suspension and driveropes of speed limiters is to be observed according tothe respective EN standard.

3.4.5 Hydraulic cylinders and pressure lines for passenger lifts are to be dimensioned in accordancewith EN 81-2. For small goods lifts in this regard, EN81-3 is applicable.

4. Goods lifts and lifting platforms

4.1 Design and dimensioning

4.1.1 General notes

4.1.1.1 Goods lifts and lifting platforms are to bedimensioned according to 4.4.1. As regards design,Sections 9 to 12 are to be observed additionally.

4.1.1.2 Deviating from 4.1.1.1, goods lifts may also be designed and dimensioned in accordance with thestandards EN 81-1 or 81-2.

4.1.2 Carrying persons

4.1.2.1 Goods lifts and lifting platforms without permission to also carry persons shall not be equippedwith operating buttons in the lift car or on the lifting platform, nor shall such buttons be within reach ofanyone there.

4.1.2.2 Where goods lifts and lifting platforms mayalso be used for carrying persons, they are to complywith the safety requirements of EN 81-1 or 81-2.

An essential safety criterion in this case is the installa-tion of a safety catch. If there is a direct hydraulicdrive, a safety device against pressure loss, directly

attached to the cylinder, is sufficient.

4.1.2.3 The above requirements do not apply for anoperating range or lifting height up to 1,8 m.

VI - Part 2GL 2012


B



4.2 Definitions

In addition to Section 1, C. the following definitionsapply:

4.2.1 Goods lifts

Normally devices with guided lift car without coun-terweight for the transport of goods between definedstopping positions.

4.2.2 Lifting platforms

Lifting platforms without guide rails which spatiallyfollow a completely fixed course, as is the case e.g.with a scissor lift, are regarded as lifting platformswith guided loose gear.

4.3 Load conditions

Amongst the following load conditions only thosewhich are applicable or relevant for the componentunder consideration need to be verified.

4.3.1 Load condition I1, operation in harbour

For this load condition the requirements in 3.3.1 apply.

4.3.2 Load conditions I2, I3, operation at sea

(only for devices for internal ship service)

For these load conditions the requirements in 3.3.2 apply.

4.3.3 Load condition II

LF II = (LH + LHH) ⋅ ψ + LWind + LEis

This load condition applies only in special cases, see2.4.

4.3.4 Load conditions III1, III2, goods lifts and

lifting platforms out of operation

For these load conditions the requirements in 3.3.3 apply.

4.3.5 Load condition III3, dynamic load test

LF III3 = (LE + LPdyn) ⋅ ψ

LE = dead loads

LPdyn = dynamic test load according to Section 13,

Table 13.2

4.4 Strength analysis and dimensioning ofvarious components

For goods lifts which are designed and dimensioned inaccordance with EN 81-1 or 81-2, only these require-ments apply. Apart from that, the following applies:

4.4.1 For goods lifts and lifting platforms thestrength analyses are to be conducted in accordancewith Section 3 and 8.

4.4.2 For the analysis of load conditions I1 to I3 an

off-centre location of the nominal load centre of grav-ity of 10 % longitudinally and transversely respec-tively is to be used for the platform.

4.4.3 Guide rails are to be dimensioned for theapplicable load conditions.

4.4.4 For wire ropes the following safety factorsaccording to Section 8, Table 8.1 apply:

a) Operation with useful load: γD1

b) Operation with persons: γD1 ⋅ 2

4.4.5 The ultimate load of chains shall be at least

γK - times the highest static chain tension:

a) Operation with useful load: γK ≥ 4,0

b) Operation with persons: γK ≥ 8,0

4.4.6 Hydraulic cylinders for goods lifts and lifting platforms are to be dimensioned according to Section3, I.2.

4.4.7 Pressure lines for goods lifts and lifting plat-forms are to be dimensioned in accordance with gen-erally recognized state-of-the-art technology or inaccordance with the GL Rules for Machinery Installa-tions stated in Section 1, B.2.1.1.

4.8 Guard rails for motor vehicles are to be de-signed to meet the line loads according to Table 5.1.

Table 5.1 Loading of guard rails

Vehicle type Line loadHeight of load

application

Passenger

vehicles2 kN/m 0,3 m

Trucks 5 kN/m 0,5 m

C. Design Requirements

1. Passenger and small goods lifts

The requirements of EN 81-1 to 81-3 for the design oflifts are to be complied with in principle. In additionthe following applies:

1.1 Lift shaft

1.1.1 Single or multiple lifts in one shaft, plus theassociated counterweights, are to be separated bysuitable metal partitions.

Chapter 2Page 5–4


C



1.1.2 Components inside lift shafts shall be locatedor secured in such a way that persons in the shaft fortest, maintenance or repair purposes are not endan-gered.

1.1.3 Ropes hanging in the shaft shall be protectedagainst seaway damage.

1.1.4 Lift shafts shall be sealed so that water can-not enter.

1.1.5 Lift shafts shall comply with the SOLAS fire protection regulations.

1.1.6 In the lift shafts of passenger lifts, emergencylighting is to be provided which shall be connected tothe ship's emergency power supply (SOLAS).

1.2 Doors and hatches

1.2.1 The mechanism controlling doors and hatchesshall prevent self-activated opening, closing or slam-ming shut even in a seaway.

1.2.2 The clear height of doors may be restricted by a sill of max. 0,6 m height, if this is required by thefreeboard convention.

1.2.3 Hatches intended for passing through shall

have a clear opening of at least 600 × 600 mm in liftshafts. For escape hatches see 1.7.

1.2.4 Deck areas giving access to lift shaft doorsshall have a non-slip covering.

1.2.5 Lift shaft doors shall comply with theSOLAS fire protection regulations.

1.3 Lift car and counterweight

1.3.1 Lift cars in which persons may travel shallhave a non-slip floor covering and a handrail along atleast one side.

1.3.2 Lift cars for transporting persons shall have

ventilation openings of adequate size and be ade-quately lit.

1.3.3 Only counterweights of steel or similar solidmaterials are permitted; counterweights of concreteare not permitted. Fill or balance weights shall beinside a steel frame or fixed permanently in someother way.

1.3.4 The guide shoes sliding or rolling along theguide rails of passenger lifts shall be fitted with emer-gency guide plates or other means of emergency guid-ance. Parts of safety catch gear shall not be used foremergency guidance.

1.3.5 In the lift cars of passenger lifts, emergencylighting is to be provided which shall be connected tothe ship's emergency power supply (SOLAS).

1.4 Safety catch and buffer

1.4.1 Counterweights shall also have safety gearswhich in the event of excessive downward speed areengaged by independent speed governors.

1.4.2 In the case of small goods lifts, 1.4.1 appliesonly if the runway of the counterweight extends downto the double bottom, or if there are accessible compartments underneath.

1.4.3 Buffers shall be capable of absorbing thekinetic energy of bringing to a stop lift cars loadedwith the nominal load or counterweights, moving at

the trigger speed of the speed governor .

1.4.4 In the case of passenger lifts, the averagedeceleration of the lift car shall not exceed 1 g.

1.5 Drives

1.5.1 The electrical equipment shall be unaffected by current fluctuations in the ship's mains and shallcomply with the regulations in IEC publication 92.

1.5.2 The drives of lifts for passengers on board passenger vessels shall be connected to the ship'semergency power supply (SOLAS).

1.5.3 Rope sheaves made of plastic may only be

used with GL approval.

1.6 Passenger lift equipment

1.6.1 Besides the emergency lighting, the emer-gency alarm and intercom in the lift car shall all beconnected to the ship's emergency power supply.

1.6.2 Emergency alarm and intercom shall be incontact with a permanently manned area in the ship.

1.6.3 The emergency lighting in the lift car and liftshaft shall switch on automatically in the event of a power failure.

1.7 Escape from passenger lifts

1.7.1 General notes

1.7.1.1 Passenger lifts shall be constructed in such away that trapped passengers can be rescued and crewmembers can escape.

1.7.1.2 Passenger lifts on board cargo vessels carry-ing up to 12 passengers count as lifts for crew members.

1.7.2 General requirements for lift cars

1.7.2.1 The lift car ceiling is to incorporate an escape

hatch with a minimum area of 0,24 m2, the length ofone of the sides being not less than 350 mm. Lift carescape hatches may only open outwards and may not project beyond the edge of the lift car when open.

VI - Part 2GL 2012


C



1.7.2.2 The escape hatch shall be controlled electri-cally, i.e. opening of the hatch shall cause the lift tostop. Mere closing of the hatch shall not allow travelto continue; operability shall only be restored by in-tentional re-locking combined with the activation of a

switch in the power unit area.

1.7.3 Requirements for passenger lift cars

1.7.3.1 The escape hatch in cars for the transport of passengers is to be provided with a mechanical springcatch. The hatch shall only have a handle on the out-side.

1.7.3.2 For passenger lift cars, a ladder is to be pro-vided which permits exit from or access to the lift carthrough the escape hatch in the ceiling. The ladder isto be kept in a supervised place accessible only to persons authorised to operate the lift.

1.7.4 Requirements for lift cars for crew members

1.7.4.1 Lift cars for the transport of crew membersshall be equipped with a permanently installed ladderor comparable equipment in the lift car.

1.7.4.2 The escape hatch in the ceiling of lift cars for the transport of crew members shall be able to be

opened from outside the car without a key; from inside, with a key e.g. a triangular emergency release key.

This emergency key shall be placed visibly in the liftcar, in a small box with a glass front. The escape hatchis to have a handle on both the outside and the inside.

1.7.5 Escape ladders/steps for crew members

1.7.5.1 Inside the lift shaft over its entire length thereshall preferably be a fixed ladder, or else step irons.These shall lead to the shaft doors and to the escapehatch in the upper part of the shaft. Ladders or stepirons shall be installed on the transverse ship walls.

1.7.5.2 In the upper part of the shaft of lifts for crewmembers, an escape hatch is to be provided. This is tohave a minimum area of 0,24 m2, the length of one ofthe sides being not less than 350 mm. The hatch shall

open outwards.1.7.5.3 The escape hatch shall be electrically moni-

tored like the lift car’s escape hatch (see 1.7.2.2).

1.7.5.4 Opening the escape hatch from inside the liftshaft shall be possible without a key. From outside,the escape hatch shall be able to be opened only withan emergency release key.

The emergency release key is to be placed in the im-mediate vicinity of the escape hatch, in a small box behind a glass front. A second key is to be kept in the

power unit area.

1.7.5.5 Proper locking of the escape hatch is to bemonitored electrically. Resumption of operation of thelift shall only be possible after intentional relocking ofthe escape hatch.

1.7.6 Description of the escape routine

1.7.6.1 In all lifts descriptions of the escape routineshall be fitted in English and another language as wellas pictograms at the following locations:

− in the lift car (only in lifts for crew members)

− on the ceiling of the lift car

− inside the lift shaft, beside each exit

1.7.6.2 Descriptions of the escape routines are to befitted in the machinery room of all lifts.

2. Goods lifts and lifting platforms

The following design requirements apply only togoods lifts and lifting platforms not carrying persons.Otherwise the requirements of 1. are applicable, where

relevant.

2.1 Guide rails

Goods lifts and lifting platforms may be guided either by guide rails or by the operating equipment itself, asfor instance in the case of a scissor lift.

2.2 Locks

2.2.1 No goods lift or lifting platform may be supported purely by ropes or chains, except when movingup or down. Mechanical locks or setting-down ar-rangements shall be provided at all stopping positions.

2.2.2 In special cases, such as side-loading equip-ment with an automatic follow-up device, mechanicallocking may be dispensed with.

2.3 Overload protection

In an overload situation the goods lift or lifting plat-form shall remain at a standstill following activation.As regards the settings on overload protection devices,the requirements of Section 12, D.1.1.1 apply.

2.4 Emergency lowering devices

Every goods lift and every lifting platform shall beequipped with emergency lowering devices which permit safe, controlled lowering.

2.5 Safety devices against pressure loss

Load-bearing hydraulic cylinders shall be fitted withsuitable safety devices against pressure loss whichshall be connected directly to the cylinders.

2.6 Counterweights

Counterweights shall move in enclosed shafts and be provided with guide rails.

2.7 Tilting

Tilting of goods lifts and lifting platforms under loadis to be prevented by suitable means.

Chapter 2Page 5–6


C



2.8 Safeguards against persons falling intoopenings.

2.8.1 Openings/apertures in the deck shall be safe-guarded as necessary by fixed or movable railings.

Movable railings shall have automatic locks controlled by the movement of the lift car or lifting platform.

2.8.2 If the decks with shaft openings can also beused by vehicles, a 30 cm high guard rail for passen-ger vehicles or a 50 cm high one for trucks is to be provided in addition to the railings.

2.9 Requirements for equipment

2.9.1 Marking

Regarding the manufacturer´s identification plate andstamping in conjunction with the issue of test certifi-

cates, the requirements of Section 13, B. apply.With respect to marking and other measures the fol-lowing applies:

2.9.1.1 Every goods lift or lifting platform respec-tively, and stopping position, is to be fitted perma-nently with a clearly visible designation of the nomi-nal load and, if required, its configuration (e.g. thedistribution of axle loads).

2.9.1.2 On every goods lift and every lifting plat-form, and at every stopping position, notices shall be put up prohibiting the transport of persons.

2.9.1.3 Safeguards against persons falling into open-ings, such as railings and guard rails, shall be paintedin a warning colour and well illuminated.

2.9.2 Control stands and controls

2.9.2.1 Control stands shall be located in such a wayas to allow the best possible supervision of all move-ments to be controlled.

2.9.2.2 All control stands are to be safeguardedagainst unauthorised operation.

2.9.2.3 All controls shall be made in such a way that

the way they are moved makes sense.

2.9.2.4 If a goods lift or lifting platform has severalcontrol stands, the operating personnel shall be able tocommunicate via intercom.

2.9.2.5 Each control stand shall be equipped with anemergency switch or key. Resumption of operation ofa unit brought to a stop with this shall only be possiblefrom the machinery room.

2.9.2.6 Inscriptions on each control stand shall be inthe language of the country and also in English.

2.9.3 Warning devicesWhen operating goods lifts or lifting platforms, danger-ous areas shall be safeguarded by suitable means, e.g. warning signals, warning lamps and warning colours.

D. Examination of Drawings and Supervisionof Construction

1. Examination of drawings

1.1 General notes

1.1.1 Examination of drawings and, where re-quired, supervision of construction of passenger liftsand small goods lifts, as well as lifting platforms, isconducted by GL only if mandatory as per nationalregulations and GL is entitled to do so, or by requestof the operator.

1.1.2 Deviating from 1.1.1, GL requires the exami-nation of drawings of planned new passenger lifts on board passenger vessels if this is not required by na-tional regulations, see E.2.1.2.

1.1.3 In the case of lifts and lifting platforms whichare under the control of GL, an examination of draw-ings is required in principle for all safety or load- bearing components.

In such cases the scope of examination is determinedin each individual case by GL.

1.1.4 For existing lifts and lifting platforms whichare to be under the control of GL, the requirements inSection 1, D.3. apply as and where relevant.

1.2 Passenger lifts and small goods lifts

1.2.1 Documents to be submitted for examina-tion according to EN 81

1.2.1.1 The scope of information, drawings, calcula-tions, wiring plans and component test certificates to be submitted by recognized test bodies for safety-related components shall correspond to EN 81-1 to 81-3 as applicable.

1.2.1.2 Consideration shall be given in regard to theconfiguration drawings, that lifts cannot be regardedas escape routes. This is to be considered in particularwhen accommodating persons with impaired mobility.

1.2.2 Additional documents to be examined

1.2.2.1 In addition to the calculations required ac-cording to EN 81, further proofs of investigation may be required due to the specific conditions on boardship according to B.1

1.2.2.2 Test reports are to be submitted for the fol-lowing Components:

− suspension ropes

_ drive ropes of speed governors

− chains

− cylinders with pistons

− pressure hoses

VI - Part 2GL 2012


D



1.2.2.3 Specific salvaging and maintenance instruc-tions shall be submitted for every passenger lift. Theseinstructions are later to be put up in the lift machineryroom in the form of information boards.

1.2.2.4 For fire protection doors, GL certificates orcertificates of recognized organizations are to be sub-mitted.

1.2.2.5 The configuration drawings and/or overviewdrawings shall include information on all componentsin passenger lifts which are supplied with emergency power (drives, lighting, alarms and intercoms).

1.2.3 Handling of the documents for examina-tion

1.2.3.1 All documents to be examined by GL are to be submitted in duplicate, if the submitting party does

not request examined drawings, or else further copiesare required.

1.2.3.2 After examination of all documents, GLcompiles two Register books, one of which is destinedfor the ship whilst the second remains as a parallelcopy in GL’s Head Office.

1.2.3.3 The submitting party receives a test report asconfirmation, and where required examined docu-ments are also returned, see 1.2.3.1.

1.3 Goods lifts and lifting platforms

For goods lifts designed in accordance with the provi-sion of EN 81-1 or 81-2 the requirements in 1.2 apply,otherwise the following applies, if applicable:

1.3.1 General requirements

With respect to the general requirements for the ex-amination of drawings, the statements in Section 1,D.1. apply.

1.3.2 Documents to be submitted for examina-

tion

The following drawings and information are to be

submitted in the scope required by 1.2.3.1 and, asnecessary, to be discarded or completed:


− lift cars, platforms and all kinds of load-bearingstructures

− foundations and fixed fittings

− guide rails plus mounting

− guide blocks

− locking and setting-down devices

− material specifications

− welding procedure sheets and test plans


− load-bearing hydraulic cylinders with allocatedsafety device against pressure loss

− spindles and rack bars

− winch drums with rope attachment and screw joint of the winches

− accessories, if not standard units (blocks, shack-les, etc.)

− details of ropes, rope end attachments, rope-sheaves


− illumination of access ways

− emergency power supply for the illumination ofaccess ways, if necessary

− details of all safety devices, such as emergencystop, limit switches, overload protection devices

− protection category of motors and switch gear

1.3.2.4 Documents for information

− details on manufacturer, customer and yard

− nominal data of electrical main propulsion plantfor the electrical power balance of the ship

− overview drawings with arrangement of equip-ment on board, all access ways and arrangementof control stands

− strength analyses:

− global strength analysis

− elastic stability

− fatigue strength analysis, if not dispensable

− functional descriptions, if necessary

− details of permissible "SWL" loads and basis ofstandards for standardized components of acces-sories

− details of nominal load, in the case of loads dueto vehicles also the arrangement of axles andwheels

1.3.2.5 Documents to be examined for Classifica-tion

Where goods lifts and lifting platforms are to be clas-sified, GL specifies the increased scope of examina-tions case by case in agreement with the manufacturer.

1.3.3 Handling of documents for examination

For the handling of documents for examination, therequirements in Section 1, D. apply.

Chapter 2Page 5–8


D



2. Supervision of construction

2.1 Passenger lifts and small goods lifts

For passenger lifts and small goods lifts, no supervi-sion of construction is required by GL.

2.2 Goods lifts and lifting platforms

2.2.1 For goods lifts and lifting platforms whichare used for ship operation, no supervision of con-struction is required by GL if these devices are not to

be examined and/or certified by GL.

2.2.2 Goods lifts and lifting platforms for the han-dling of goods are subject to the requirements of ILO.For these devices, supervision of construction by GLis required in accordance with the statements in Sec-tion 1, B.4. and Section 13, B.

E. Tests and Examinations on Board

1. General notes

1.1 The term “tests and examinations“ includesfunctional tests and load tests, visual inspections,checks as well as other practical measures and is de-noted as “tests“ in the following.

1.2 Tests before newly built lifts and lifting plat-

forms are put into operation, as well as after changingsafety-related or load-bearing components, requireexamination of the drawings.

1.3 Depending on the flagstate regulations, lift tests

are conducted by GL, by national administrative bod-ies or by organizations authorised by the authorities.

2. Tests on passenger lifts and small goods

lifts

2.1 Test principles

For the testing of passenger lifts and small goods lifts,the requirements of the applicable EN 81-1 to 81-3apply as well as, in addition, the following require-ments.

2.1.1 GL conducts tests on passenger lifts andsmall goods lifts if national regulations require and

permit it, or on request by the operator.

2.1.2 Passenger lifts on board passenger vesselsclassified by GL are required to be tested as a prereq-uisite to the issue and renewal of the “Safety certifi-cate for passenger vessels“ by GL, see also D.1.1.2.

2.1.3 The operation and catch tests on lifts andlifting platforms shall be conducted by competent

persons in compliance with the instructions of a GLSurveyor.

2.2 Initial test

A successful initial test is the prerequisite for putting alift into operation and requires the following actions:

2.2.1 Check it agrees with the examined drawingsand with the other documents for examination.

2.2.2 Check there is agreement between the components' test certificates and the corresponding safety-related components.

2.2.3 Operation and catch tests with test load to theextent required by one of the applicable standards EN81-1 to 81-3.

2.2.4 Issue of a GL test certificate of Form 489 bythe GL Surveyor.

2.2.5 Handover of a Register book prepared by GL,see D.1.2.3.2, together with the test certificate Form489, to the yard or the operator.

2.2.6 Stamping of the lifts after issue of test certifi-cate is not provided for.

2.3 Principal tests

2.3.1 Principal tests on passenger lifts are to be performed 2,5 years after the initial test and every 2,5years after the last principal test.

2.3.2 Principal tests on small goods lifts are to be performed 5 years after the initial test and every 5years after the last principal test.

2.3.3 Principal tests require operation and catchtests in accordance with the requirements of one of theapplicable standards EN 81-1 to 81-3 as well as acheck on the current condition.

2.3.4 After the tests, the GL Surveyor issues a testcertificate of Form 489 and attaches it to the Register

book.

2.4 Intermediate tests

2.4.1 Within the time period between the initial testand the following principal test, as well as between the

principal tests, an intermediate test is required. Theintermediate tests are due one day after expiry of halfthe period of time.

2.4.2 Intermediate tests are of a lesser scope than principal tests and consist substantially of a functionaltest and a condition check, which normally does notrequire the assistance of specialists.


book.

VI - Part 2GL 2012


E



2.5 Time frame

2.5.1 For both the principal and intermediate testson passenger lifts, a time frame of ± 3 months applies.

2.5.2 For both the principal and intermediate testson small goods lifts, a time frame of ± 6 months ap-

plies.

2.5.3 The utilization of a time frame does notchange the due date of principal and intermediatetests.

2.6 Special tests

2.6.1 Special tests are required following damageand repair as well as after changes to safety-related or

load-bearing components.

2.6.2 The scope of testing is determined case bycase by GL.


book.

3. Testing of goods lifts and lifting platforms

3.1 Goods lifts and lifting platforms for the han-

dling of goods are subject to the requirements of ILO.For all tests and certificates therefore the requirementsin Section 13, C. to E. apply.

3.2 Goods lifts and lifting platforms for ships’operation are solely subject to national regulations,which GL adheres to, if authorized to do so:

3.2.1 Where national regulations do not exist, nordeviations therefrom, GL tests, investigates and certi-fies according to the requirements of ILO.

3.2.2 Instead of the ILO's certification systems, aGL certificate Form 494 can also be issued for eachdevice. These certificates are kept together in a GLfile. The differences between the certification systemsof ILO and GL are described in Section 13, G.

F. Lift Documentation

1. General notes

The following requirements refer to passenger liftsand small goods lifts.

For goods lifts and lifting platforms the requirementsof Section 13, G. apply, see also E.3.2.2.

2. Marking

2.1 In the lift cars of passenger lifts a perma-nently installed sign with the nominal load and the

permissible number of persons is to be displayed.

2.2 At each stopping position of small goodslifts, a permanently installed sign with the nominalload is to be displayed.

3. Test certificates

3.1 Manufacturer’s Test certificates

The lift manufacturer shall submit to GL the compo-nent test certificates and the suppliers’ test reportswhich are required by EN 81-1 to 81-3 and by GLaccording to D.1.2.2, and shall also supply a test re-

port for each lift.

3.2 GL test certificate

The purpose of the GL test certificate Form 489 issuedafter each test, is to confirm the tests performed and todocument their results.

4. Register book

All Information and certificates are to be compiled ina Register book and stored. The following applies:

4.1 Every lift shall have a separate Register book

which has always to remain on board the ship andshall be submitted to the GL Surveyor or other author-ised person on demand.

4.2 The Register book serves as the storage placefor examined documents as well as for the documenta-tion of tests and maintenance procedures.

4.3 The GL Register book Form 490 consists of afile containing the following:

− GL test confirmation Form 488

− GL test report

− GL test certificates and/or test reports

− component test certificates

− examined drawings

− description of the lift installation

− operating and maintenance instructions

− salvage instructions

− calculations

− new certificates Form 489 issued after every test

4.4 It is the task of the ship's management tostore the Register books safely during the entire life-time of the passenger lifts and small goods lifts.



F

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-



Section 6

Special Loading Gear and Means of Transport

A. General

1. This Section deals with the requirements forthe design and dimensioning as well as for the manu-facture and operation of special loading gear andmeans of transport.

2. The requirements in Section 1 are to be ob-served where relevant.

3. As regards requirements for the materials to be used as well as for manufacture and welding, therequirements of Sections 2 and 11 apply.

4. Calculation and dimensioning is to be basedon Sections 3 and 8 as well as further Sections asrequired. Deviating requirements in this Section are to

be observed.

5. For machinery components and the electricalfittings on special loading gear and means of transport,

the requirements of Sections 9 and 10 are to be complied with, if applicable.

6. Accessories shall be selected using recog-nized standards. The dimensioning of non-standardaccessories can be carried out in accordance withSection 7.

B. Rope and Chain Hoists

1. General notes

1.1 The requirements that follow apply to ropeand chain hoists, regardless of drive mode, which arenot used for handling cargo. They only apply tomanually operated devices however, where relevant.

1.2 Handling of goods for ship operation is notregarded as cargo handling.

2. Manufacture

2.1 Materials

In addition to the steels and materials generally usedfor machinery components, special steels, aluminium,

plastics and other materials can be used if they areappropriate for the intended use.

2.2 Dimensioning

The requirements of A.4. also apply to foundations orrunway girders of rope and chain hoists produced inseries.

3. Equipment and safety regulations

For all types of drive, the requirements of Section 12 are also to be observed, if applicable. In addition, thefollowing applies:

3.1 Overload protection

3.1.1 Series production

3.1.1.1 For hydraulic, pneumatic and electrical hoistdrives, effective overload protection devices are to be

provided.

3.1.1.2 In the case of hydraulic hoist drives, pressurerelief valves are also permissible up to a nominal loadof 1000 kg.

3.1.1.3 As regards response limits and response tol-erances of overload protection devices, the settings or

parameters given by the manufacturer apply.

3.1.2 Individual production

For rope and chain hoists manufactured by individualor special production, the requirements in Section 12,D.1.1 apply.

3.2 Hook travel limits

3.2.1 General requirements

3.2.1.1 Rope and chain hoists shall have limit switchesfor the upper and lower hook position.

3.2.1.2 In the case of power-operated rope and chainhoists, the limit switches are to act mechanicallyand/or electrically on the hoist drives.

3.2.2 Series production

3.2.2.1 For hydraulic, pneumatic and electrical hoistdrives, effective limit switches for the hook travel areto be provided.

3.2.3 Individual production

For rope and chain hoists manufactured by individualor special production, limit switches for the upper andlower hook position are to be provided which functionelectrically.

VI - Part 2GL 2012

Section 6 Special Loading Gear and Means of Transport Chapter 2Page 6–1

B



3.3 Runway limit

As regards runway limit, the requirements in Section4, C.4.2 and Section 12, D.2. apply, if applicable.

3.4 Slack rope limit

In special cases, slack rope monitoring and limitationmay be required, e.g. at high hoist speeds, with multi-

ple coils or if required by the mode of operation.

3.5 Eye plates for load tests

It is recommended suitable eye plates be fitted to theship’s hull for load tests on hoisting ropes and hoistingchains located below deck. For this kind of load testthe application of the test load shall be conducted witha separate manual hoist only, but not with the powerdrive of the rope or chain hoist itself.

4. Means of suspension

4.1 Hoisting ropes

4.1.1 General notes

4.1.1.1 Hoisting ropes and their end attachments arecovered by the requirements in Section 8.

4.1.1.2 Wire-ropes made of stainless materials, aswell as fibre ropes, may be allowed for special pur-

poses if suitable, and if the design of the hoist rope isverified accordingly.

4.1.2 Safety against fracture

4.1.2.1 Safety against fracture is defined by the coef-

ficient of utilization γD1 or γF according to Section 8,

Tables 8.1 and 8.3 and this is to be applied to themaximum static hoisting rope force.

4.1.2.2 When using rope hoists below deck γD1 may

be ≤ 4,0.

4.1.2.3 For the use of rope hoists above deck thefollowing applies:

a) In the case of rope hoists manufactured by series

production γD1 may be ≤ 4,0 unless nationalregulations dictate otherwise.

b) For rope hoists manufactured by individual or

special production, the values in Section 8, Ta-

bles 8.1 and 8.3 are to be used without limitation

of γD1 or γF.

4.2 Hoisting chains

4.2.1 General notes

4.2.1.1 Hoisting chains shall comply with recognized

standards.4.2.1.2 Chain wheels of hoisting chains as well astheir end links or fasteners for leading-in the tow chainare to conform to standards.


The breaking load of hoisting chains shall be at least

the γK -fold of the chain's maximum static towing

force. The following coefficients of utilization γK are

to be applied:γK ≥ 5,0 (power-driven)

γK ≥ 4,0 (operated manually)

4.3 Accessories

4.3.1 Accessories such as e.g. cargo hooks, shack-les and rope sockets, shall comply with recognizedstandards, and shall be dimensioned for test loadsaccording to Section 7, Table 7.4.

4.3.2 The dimensions of the eye plates on normal

strength and higher strength shackles are to complywith the Tables in Section 7.

4.3.3 Regarding the use of detachable rope endattachments (rope sockets or rope clamps), the re-quirements in Section 8, D.2.3 apply.

5. Examination of drawings and supervisionof construction

5.1 Series production

5.1.1 Manufacturers of rope and chain hoists made

by series production, are permitted to produce undertheir own responsibility and to certify their productsthemselves, if the manufacturing processes and prod-ucts are certified in a legally-binding and recognizedmanner, e.g. by type approval.

For those, in addition to drawings of foundations orrunway girders including fastenings, the followinginformation at a minimum is to be submitted, if appli-cable:

− designation of manufacturer and type

− nominal load(s) and dead weight(s)

− hoist speed and operating speed, if applicable

− type of drive

− type(s) of electrical protection, see Section 10,F.1.7

− further information as required

5.1.2 For a GL type approval the "Guidelines forthe Performance of Type Approvals" stated in Section1, B.2.1.4 apply.

5.2 Individual production

5.2.1 Rope and chain hoists manufactured by in-dividual or special production are subject to examina-tion of drawings and supervision of construction byGL.

Chapter 2Page 6–2

Section 6 Special Loading Gear and Means of Transport VI - Part 2GL 2012

B



5.2.2 For the examination of drawings, the list ofdocuments to be submitted for examination in Section1, D.2.2 is to be applied as and where relevant. Inaddition the following drawings and information are to

be submitted, if applicable:

− housing

− rollers including fastening to housing

− form-locking drive devices such as e.g. rack bars and pinions

− runway limits

− details of hoisting ropes and hoisting chainsincluding end attachments

− rope-sheaves/chain wheels

− foundations or runway girders including fasten-ings

− stowage position including fastening devices

− further documents as required

5.2.3 For supervision of construction, the require-ments in Section 13, B. apply.

6. Tests and examinations on board

6.1 For the initial test and examination, the re-

quirements in Section 13, C. apply.

6.2 For the periodic testing and examinations, therequirements in Section 13, D. apply.

7. Documentation

7.1 Identification

For the identification of rope and chain hoists, therequirements in Section 13, B.4.2.1, B.5. and B.6. andC.5. apply.

7.2 Certificates

7.2.1 Certificates for production

7.2.1.1 Series production

Rope and chain hoists manufactured by series produc-tion shall be delivered with a test report as well aswith test reports for all means of suspension, such asropes, chains and accessories.

7.2.1.2 Individual production

For rope and chain hoists manufactured by individual

or special production, a GL test certificate Form 208 based on an examination before delivery is required.

GL test certificates are to be submitted for all meansof suspension such as ropes, chains and accessories.

7.2.2 Certificate for load tests

7.2.2.1 Certificates to be issued after every load test,due to national regulations, are described in Section13, G.

7.2.2.2 For rope and chain hoists which are not to besubjected to ongoing control by GL, the requirementsin Section 1, A.4.1.6 apply.

7.3 Register book

7.3.1 All certificates for means of suspension andload tests, investigation reports as well as informationfor operation (manuals, maintenance protocols, etc.),where applicable, shall be compiled in a Register bookand stored. For details see Section 13, G.

C. Ramps and Car Decks

1. General notes

1.1 Testing, investigation and certification oframps and car decks fixed to the ship is part of theClassification of the ship.

1.2 As regards naval-architectural concerns suchas ship's strength, water-tightness, impact stress by thesea, etc. the requirements in the GL Rules for HullStructures (I-1-1) apply, see Section 1, B.2.1.1.

1.3 The following requirements relate to mobileshipborne ramps and car decks.

2. Production

2.1 Materials

In addition to ship structural steels, other steels andaluminium may also be used for load-bearing con-

structions, if they are suitable for the intended purpose.

For machinery components, materials are to be selected

in accordance with the GL Rules stated in Section 1,B.2.1.2.

2.2 Dimensioning

2.2.1 The dimensioning of steel or aluminium rampor car deck construction shall comply with the re-quirements stated in 1.2.

2.2.2 For the dimensioning of structural or machin-ery components of rope or chain drives, a hoist load

coefficient of ψ = 1,15 is to be applied to moved

masses.

VI - Part 2GL 2012


C

http://-/?-

http://-/?-






http://-/?-

http://-/?-



3. Equipment and safety regulations

3.1 Scratch boards, railings and barriers

3.1.1 Ramps and car decks are to be fitted with

scratch boards, railings and barriers, as necessary. Forthe dimensioning of scratch boards Section 5, B.4.4.8 applies, for railings Section 3, I.9.2.

3.1.2 The construction of scratch boards, railingsand barriers including their associated safety devicessuch as e.g. colour markings, photoelectric barriersand warning signals are subject to drawing examina-tion by GL.

3.2 Anti-slip safeguards

Ramps shall be fitted with welded-on or bolted-onanti-slip safeguards.

In special cases, anti-slip paint may be permitted in lieu.

3.3 Ramp inclination

Ramp inclination shall not in general exceed the ratio1:10.

3.4 Permissible deflection

3.4.1 The permissible deflection of ramps and cardecks under nominal load in the stowed position shallnot exceed:

f = s b

200

where

f = deflection (depth gauge)

bs = spacing of supports (span)

3.4.2 In the stowed position, the deflection may notendanger either the water-tightness of the ship or anycargo (e.g. vehicles) underneath.

3.5 Stowage positions

3.5.1 In the stowage positions provided, ramps andcar decks shall not be hung on ropes or chains butshall have mechanical supports and locks.

3.5.2 Supports and locks shall be dimensionedaccording to the requirements in 1.2 and safeguard thewater-tightness of the ship, where ramps are part ofthe shell.

4. Means of suspension

4.1 Hoisting rope and suspension rope

4.1.1 General notes4.1.1.1 For hoisting ropes and suspension ropes andtheir end attachments, the requirements in Section 8 apply.

4.1.1.2 Wire ropes of stainless materials as well asfibre ropes may be permitted for special purposes inindividual cases, if they are suitable and if the designof the rope drive is adjusted accordingly.

4.1.1.3 Fibre ropes for the transport of persons areonly permitted under special conditions.


4.1.2.1 Safety against fracture is defined by the coef-

ficient of utilization γD1 or γD2 according to Section 8,

Table 8.1 and is to be applied to the maximum statictowing rope force.

4.1.2.2 For hoisting ropes, the following safety fac-tors are to be applied, depending on the mode of op-eration, in accordance with Section 8, Table 8.1:

a) operation without useful load : γD1 ≤ 3,6

b) operation with useful load : γD1

c) operation involving persons : γD1 ⋅ 2,0

4.1.2.3 Ramps which are not supported at their freeend when used by vehicles, may, apart from chains,also be fixed by hoisting ropes or special suspensionwires. In this case, the following safety factors are to

be used:

a) hoisting ropes or guided suspension ropes : γD1 ⋅ 2,0

b) suspension ropes, not guided : γD2 ⋅ 2,0

4.2 Hoisting chains and suspension chains

4.2.1 General notes

4.2.1.1 Hoisting chains and suspension chains are tocomply with recognized standards.

4.2.1.2 Chain wheels as well as their end links orfasteners for leading in the tow chain are to be selec-ted in conformance with standards.

4.2.2 Safety against fractureThe breaking load of hoisting chains and suspension

chains shall be at least the γK -fold of the chain's

maximum static towing force. Depending on the mode

of operation, the following coefficients of utilization

γK are to be applied:

operation without useful load : γK ≥ 2,8

operation with useful load : γK ≥ 4,0

operation involving persons : γK ≥ 8,0

4.3 Accessories

4.3.1 The requirements in B.4.3.1 and 4.3.2 are to be observed.

Chapter 2Page 6–4


C

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-



4.3.2 Detachable rope end attachments (rope sock-ets or rope clamps) are not permitted for rope drives oframps and car decks.

4.4 Hydraulic cylinders

Hydraulic cylinders are to be dimensioned in accor-dance with Section 3, I.2.

5. Examination of drawings and supervisionof manufacture

Ramps and car decks are subject to examination ofdrawings and supervision of manufacture.

5.1 Examination of drawings

For the examination of drawings, the list of documentsto be submitted in Section 1, D.4.2 is to be applied asand where relevant. In addition, the following draw-ings and information are to be submitted, if applicable:

− overview drawing with layout and numbering oframps and car decks, where applicable

− complete rope drives and chain drives

− guide blocks including fastenings

− scratch boards, barriers and railings

− rigging plans

− additional documents as required

5.2 Supervision of manufacture

For the supervision of manufacture the requirementsin Section 13, B. apply.

6. Tests and investigations on board

6.1 Initial test and investigation

6.1.1 For the initial test and investigation, the re-quirements in Section 13, C. apply.

6.1.2 The load tests with test loads according toSection 13, Table 13.2 are to be performed staticallyin the stowage positions and dynamically for the mov-able installations.

6.2 Periodic testing and investigations

6.2.1 As part of the ship’s Classification, rampsand car decks are subject to annual Class surveys and5-year Class Renewal surveys. Instead, provision ismade for annual performance tests, but not for 5-yearload tests.

6.2.2 Where required by national regulations,

ramps and car decks are to be treated like loading gearfor the handling of cargo. The requirements in Section13, D. apply in this case. During the 5-years load tests,6.1.2 is to be observed.

7. Documentation

7.1 Identification

For the identification of ramps and car decks, therequirements in Section 13, B.5., B.6. and C.5. apply.

7.2 Certificates

7.2.1 Manufacturing Certificates

7.2.1.1 The manufacturer of ramps and car decksshall supply GL test certificates for all means of sus-

pension such as ropes, chains, accessories and hydrau-lic cylinders as well as for winches.

7.2.1.2 As confirmation of investigation before deli-very, a GL test certificate Form 208 is required forevery ramp and every car deck or for every series of

such ship components.

7.2.2 Certificates for load tests

7.2.2.1 As a confirmation of the load tests, a GL testcertificate Form 208 is required for every ramp and every

car deck or for every series of such ship components.

7.2.2.2 Where, due to national regulations, rampsand car decks are to be treated like loading gear for thehandling of cargo, the requirements in Section 13, C.6. and D.6. apply.

7.3 Register book

7.3.1 All certificates for means of suspension andload tests, investigation reports as well as informationabout operation (manuals, maintenance protocols, etc.), where applicable, shall be compiled in a Register bookand stored. For details, see Section 13, G.

7.3.2 Where ramps and car decks are not to betreated like loading gear for the handling of cargo, thefollowing applies:

7.3.2.1 After the initial test and investigation the GLSurveyor compiles a documentation file including, ifapplicable:

− test certificate(s) Form 208 for the initial testand investigation

− test certificate(s) Form LA4 for wire ropes,where required also as Form 497 for fibre ropes

− test certificate(s) Form 208 for chains

− test certificate(s) Form LA3 for accessories

− test certificate(s) Form F 132 for hydraulic cyl-inders

− test certificate(s) Form F 180 for winches

7.3.2.2 Confirmation of the Class surveys accordingto 6.2.1 is effected within the scope of ship Classifica-tion. Relevant excerpts of the survey report for theship may be added to the documentation file.

VI - Part 2GL 2012


C



D. Loading Gear for Research Work

1. General notes

1.1 Loading gear for research work is employedfor the extraction of seabed samples and water sam-

ples, for towing and for general handling of researchequipment. In the process, ropes, cables or a combina-tion of both are utilized.

1.2 Exceptional loads may result from large ropeor cable lengths, from ship movements, or from ex-traction devices getting caught, as well as being pulledout of the sediment.

1.3 Loading gear for research work is e.g.:

− stern gantry crane

− slewing gallows

− lateral outrigger

− hatch beam

− loading gear with special functions

2. Treatment of loading gear for researchwork

Loading gear for research work is treated like loadinggear not intended for the handling of cargo. The fol-

lowing specific features, however, shall be considered.

3. Special features

3.1 Dimensioning

3.1.1 Loading gear for research work is to be di-mensioned for the breaking loads of ropes or cables.For the dimensioning, the following load combinationis to be assumed, following Table 4.4, load combina-tion III:

dead loads γ pi = 1,10

rope/cable breaking load γ pi = 1,10

diagonal pull γ pi = 1,10

resistance coefficient γm = 1,10

In general, for this purpose the diagonal pull is to beassumed for the most unfavourable direction as fol-lows:

lifting 15°

towing longitudinally to the ship 30°

towing transversely to the ship 45°

3.1.2 Where loading gear for research work is alsointended for handling goods for ship operation, it isalso to be dimensioned accordingly.

3.1.3 Accessories are to be selected in such a waythat the breaking load of ropes or cables correspondsto the test loads of the accessories stated in Section 7,Table 7.4.

3.2 Marking

3.2.1 When marking loading gear for researchwork, the requirements in Section 13, B.5. apply.Instead of SWL and a quantity in kg or t, the designa-tion SDL (Safe Design Load) and a quantity in kN isto be used.

When determining the quantity to be indicated, the breaking load of the rope or cable (in kN) is to bedivided by 3,6.

3.2.2 Where several ropes or cables are attached to

one item of loading gear, marking is required on everysingle rope or cable.

3.2.3 Where loading gear for research work is alsointended for handling goods for ship operation, it isalso to be marked accordingly.

When determining the quantity to be indicated, the breaking load of the rope is to be divided by the coef-

ficient of utilization γD1 in accordance with Section 8,

Table 8.1, and then to be converted into kg or t.

3.3 Operating manual

3.3.1 An individual operating instruction is to be prepared for every item of loading gear for researchwork, in which the special features of operation andcontrol are described.

3.3.2 Operating manuals are subject to examinationand shall remain permanently on board as part of theloading gear documentation.

E. Industrial Cargo-Handling Vehicles

1. General notes

1.1 The following requirements apply to indus-trial cargo-handling vehicles in series productionwhich are certified in a legally-binding or recognizedmanner, unless otherwise provided by national regula-tions.

1.2 Prerequisites for use on board are proofs ofstability against overturning, see Section 3, E.2.2, and,at a minimum, the existence of test reports.

1.3 The requirements in 3. and 4. apply only toindustrial cargo-handling vehicles which remain in

permanent employment on board.

Chapter 2Page 6–6


E



2. Safety regulations

2.1 The employment of industrial cargo-handlingvehicles on board presupposes that decks and hatchcovers are adequately dimensioned to be run over.

2.2 Where industrial cargo-handling vehiclesremain permanently on board, fastening arrangements(e.g. eye plates) for securing for use at sea are to befitted both to the vehicle and to the hull.

2.3 The use of industrial cargo-handling vehicles powered by IC engines or by non-explosion-proofelectric motors is not permitted in hazardous locationsand areas.

2.4 Industrial cargo-handling vehicles run on fuelmay only be used in cargo spaces if there is adequate

ventilation. Otherwise, only battery-powered vehiclesare to be employed.

2.5 The use of fuels with a flash point below60 °C is not permitted.

2.6 In general fork-lift trucks to be used on boardare to have a tiltable lifting frame.

3. Control measures

3.1 Initial control

Before start of operation, the following measures arerequired at a minimum:

− check the information documents included withdelivery

− function check with nominal load

− test run over the operational areas with nominalload as proof the deck or hatch covers are suffi-ciently strong.

3.2 Regular controls

Industrial cargo-handling vehicles are subject to supervision and regular control by the ship's manage-ment at intervals not exceeding 6 months.

These controls shall be confirmed in a suitable mannerand added to the documentation.

4. Documentation

4.1 Certification

For the control as per 3.1, the GL Surveyor issues acertificate Form 208.

4.2 Identification

For stamping, correlating to the test certificate, therequirements in Section 13, C.5. apply.

4.3 Register book

4.3.1 All certificates for load tests, investigationreports as well as information about operation (manu-als, maintenance protocols, etc.), where applicable,

shall be compiled in a Register book and stored. Fordetails, see Section 13, G.

4.3.2 In addition to the certificate as per 4.1, themanufacturer’s documentation is to be included in theRegister book. This also applies to all confirmations ofcontrol measures by the ship's management, see 3.2.

F. Means of Conveying Persons

1. Shipborne working baskets

1.1 Newly-manufactured working baskets are tomeet the requirements in EN 14502-1.

1.2 Shipborne working baskets are to be treatedin all respects similarly to loading gear not intended tohandle cargo. Their dimensioning and testing shallhowever be subject to the static test loads according toSection 7, Table 7.2.

2. Requirements for loading gear for convey-ing persons

Loading gear for conveying persons shall comply withthe requirements in Section 3, B.5. with respect todimensioning, operation and control.

3. Landing booms

3.1 General notes

3.1.1 The provision and the arrangement of landing booms (swinging booms for conveying persons) arerequired by the St Lawrence Seaway Authority.

3.1.2 Landing booms shall only be used for con-veying one single person at a time.

3.1.3 Landing booms shall be treated as loadinggear, not handling cargo, except where otherwisedetermined in what follows.

3.2 Dimensioning

3.2.1 Landing booms together with the associated posts shall be designed for a static test load LPstat of

300 kg (Section 7, Table 7.1, load condition III2,

without wind and hoist load coefficient).

3.2.2 Ropes and interchangeable components shall be designed, in addition to the dead loads, for a staticload of 150 kg at a minimum.

VI - Part 2GL 2012


F



3.2.3 The slenderness ratio λ of a landing boommay not exceed a value of 200.

3.3 Construction and layout

3.3.1 The load radius of landing booms shall beabout 9 m.

3.3.2 If landing booms are equipped with severalspan ropes (e.g. a second span rope about halfwayalong the boom), the length of these intermediate spanropes shall be adjustable.

The length adjustment of the intermediate span ropeshall be effected in such a way that no unfavourablestress may arise under load (cantilever effect).

3.3.3 Landing booms are to be operated exclu-sively by hand. The lowering system shall allow gen-tle set-down.

3.3.4 Landing booms shall be located in the for-ward portion of the ship, roughly at the point wherethe bow has widened to the full beam, and shall swing

forward from aft.

3.4 Examination of drawings and supervisionof construction

3.4.1 Landing booms together with the associated posts shall be constructed according to the drawings

approved by GL.

3.4.2 Because all components are normally easilyaccessible for subsequent controls, supervision of con-struction is not required in general. Test reports are to

be included in the delivery.

3.5 Tests and investigations on board

3.5.1 For the tests and investigations on board, therequirements in Section 13, C. and D. apply with thefollowing deviations:

3.5.2 Landing booms are to be tested before start of

operation and periodically every 5 years, either stati-cally by swinging a test load of 300 kg, or by swing-ing, lowering and braking a test load of 200 kg.

3.6 Documentation

With respect to identification, certification and docu-mentation, the requirements for loading gear not hand-ling cargo apply, see Section 13.

Chapter 2Page 6–8


F



Section 7

Loose Gear and Interchangeable Components

A. General

1. This Section deals with the requirements fordesign and calculation as well as production and em-

ployment of loose gear and interchangeable compo-nents.

2. With respect to requirements for the materials

to be used as well as for production and welding, the provisions in Sections 2 and 11 apply.

3. For machinery components and electricalloose gear equipment, the requirements in Sections 9and 10 are to be complied with, where relevant.

B. Loose Gear

1. General notes

The following requirements apply to loose gear ac-cording to Section 1, C.4. and C.5.

2. Design principles

2.1 General notes

The requirements in Section 3 are to be observed asappropriate. In addition the following applies:

2.1.1 Suspension ropes, rope slings and their ropeattachments are to comply with the requirements inSection 8.

If a test certificate (LA4) for the rope is submitted and proof is provided that the rope connections have been produced by manufacturers with GL approval, thenfurther requirements for interchangeable componentsmay be dispensed with.

Regarding the rope deflection, the reduction of theminimum breaking load which depends on the ratioD/d is to be taken into account

2.1.2 Suspension chains and their end attachmentsare to comply with recognized standards.

2.1.3 Regarding the suspension height of loosegear, it shall be pointed out that the opening angle ofsuspension ropes or chains is not to exceed 120° andof ramshorn hooks is not to exceed 90°.

2.1.4 In order to warrant balance (safety againstturn-over) of the total system or parts of it, consistingof loose gear and/or load, it is assumed in the require-ments of this Section that both the loose gear and theloads have a positive stability height, see illustration inFig. 7.1.

2.1.5 Suspensions

Suspensions are loose gear consisting of tension ele-ments which are directly connected to the crane hookor to other loose gear (e.g. a traverse or frame-typetraverse/ spreader). For examples of typical suspen-sions see Fig. 7.2.

Regarding 4-leg suspensions without load equalisationit is to be taken into consideration that these systemsare statically indeterminate. The individual legs of thesuspension are stressed depending on the rigidity ofthe load or the loose gear to be handled. Where theload or the loose gear has high rigidity the load distri-

bution on each leg of the suspension is to be verified

by static calculation. Without verification of the actualload distribution in the complete system (suspensionand load or loose gear) only 2 legs shall be assumed asload-bearing.

2.2 Traverses

2.2.1 Traverses may only be loaded symmetricallyto the centre of gravity of the load, unless they aredimensioned for asymmetric loading and markedaccordingly.

When there are more than 2 attachment points be-tween the loose gear and the load, the strength testcorresponding to the rigidity of the load (staticallyindeterminate system) is to be conducted.

Alternatively, devices may be fitted which indicate theload.

2.2.2 Where longitudinal lifting beams have under-slung transverse lifting beams using tension elements,this system is to be designed for safe operation inaccordance with the static degrees of freedom. Suf-ficient strength is to be proven by a strength analy-

sis.

2.2.3 Telescopic traverse parts shall be lockable intheir working positions.

VI - Part 2GL 2012

Section 7 Loose Gear and Interchangeable Components Chapter 2Page 7–1

B



2.3 Frame traverses / spreader

2.3.1 In the case of adjustable container spreaders,the movable beams shall either lock into the desiredworking positions, or constructional measures shall be

taken to ensure that the beams are accurately placedand held in these positions.

2.3.2 Container spreaders shall be equipped withindicators showing in a suitable manner whether thetwist locks are locked or unlocked.

2.3.3 Locking pins which automatically unlockwhen unloaded are not acceptable.

2.4 Grabs and lifting magnets

2.4.1 The structural design and operating mode ofgrabs and lifting magnets shall be suited to the in-tended type of cargo.

2.4.2 The mechanical strength and electricalequipment of grabs and lifting magnets shall complywith the requirements of these Rules.

2.4.3 Closing ropes of grabs are to be protected in asuitable way against excessive wear.

2.4.4 Lifting magnets shall comply with the re-quirements in EN 13155.

Fig. 7.1 Balance conditions

Chapter 2Page 7–2

Section 7 Loose Gear and Interchangeable Components VI - Part 2GL 2012

B



Fig. 7.2 Suspending systems for typical suspensions

G1 = 3-leg suspension (statically determinate, load

connecting points are not in one vertical plane)

G2 = 4-leg suspension, symmetrical (statically indeter-minate with rigid load). The total load is carried

either by leg S1 and S3 or by S2 and S4. The

center of gravity of the load (SP) is located in

both of the planes spanned by S1/S3 and S2/S4

G3 = 4-leg suspension, asymmetrical (staticallyindeterminate with rigid load), see also notesunder G2

G4 = 4-leg suspension with load compensation onone side (statically determinate with suffi-cient geometry of load compensation)

G5 = 4-leg suspension with frame spreader (sta-tically indeterminate, see also notes underG2)

G6 = 4-leg suspension with two spreaders (stati-cally determinate)

VI - Part 2GL 2012


B



3. Calculation principles

3.1 General notes

3.1.1 Calculations and dimensioning of loose gear

are subject to the requirements in Sections 3 and 4. 3.1.2 Regarding the loads to be considered and the

proofs to be provided, the following requirements areto be observed.

3.2 Dimensioning loads

3.2.1 General

3.2.1.1 The loads acting on loose gear are subdi-vided as follows:

– regular loads

– irregular loads

– special loads

3.2.1.2 If necessary, loads not adressed in the fol-lowing are to be considered additionally in a suitableway. The grading of such loads and the considerationof them in the corresponding load combinations is to

be agreed with GL.

3.2.2 Regular loads

3.2.2.1 Dead load LE

Deadloads are to be determined in accordance withSection 3, B.4.2.

3.2.2.2 Useful load LN

The useful load is defined in Section 1, C.9. Whendimensioning the loose gear, this is assumed to be thenominal load.

3.2.2.3 Dynamic forces caused by drives

Regarding the dynamic forces caused by drives, the provisions of Section 4, C.2.4 apply, including thefollowing additions:

– For dimensioning, in general only those verticaldynamic forces are to be considered, which are

covered by the hoist load coefficient ψ. There-for the useful loads acc. to 3.2.1.2 are to bemultiplied by the maximum hoist load coeffi-

cient ψ for this application, of the allocatedloading gears.

– LNe is to be always relevant for dimensioning.This is to be ensured by the conditions inSection 4, D.3.2.

– If loose gear or interchangeable componentscannot be allocated to loading gear, the follow-ing hoist load coefficient is to be used:

SWL ψ SWL ψ ≤ 10 t 1,6 ≤ 1000 t 1,2

≤ 160 t 1,4 > 1000 t 1,15

≤ 500 t 1,3

This is only permissible if the loading gear is used inharbour operations. When used under seaway condi-tions, the increased requirements of the loading gearused thereby are to be considered.

3.2.3 Irregular loads

3.2.3.1 Wind loads

Wind loads are to be assumed acc. to Section 3,B.4.5.

3.2.3.2 Snow and ice loads

If snow loads are to be considered, these are to be provided by the manufacturer.

If ice loads are to be considered, these are to be de-termined acc. to Section 3, B.4.6.

3.2.4 Special loads

3.2.4.1 Test loads

Loose gear is to be dimensioned for a static test loadLPstat acc. to Table 7.2 or, if more unfavourable, forthe dynamic test load of the loading gear acc. to Sec-tion 4, C.4.1 including the reduced hoist load coeffi-

cient ψP:

max (Lpstat; Lpdyn·ψP)

3.2.4.2 Lateral impact

For frame-type traverses/spreader, a lateral impact of1/10 of the maximum vertical load in the frame level

is to be assumed:

HS = (L Ne + Le)/10

3.3 Load combinations and partial safetyfactors

3.3.1 General notes

3.3.1.1 The load combinations deemed to be essen-tial for loose gear in operation are compiled in Table7.1.

3.3.1.2 For the load cases "cranes out of operation"

the load combinations and partial safety factors ac-cording to Section 4, E.3. (Table 4.5) shall be as-sumed regarding strength analysis.

3.3.1.3 According to circumstances further loadcombinations may arise

3.3.1.4 From the load combinations in Table 7.1 and, where required, further load combinations, onlythose combinations which are prevailing or neces-sary for the structural element being considered, areto be proved.

3.3.2 Comments on the load combinations for

loose gear under operating conditions,Table 7.1

3.3.2.1 The load combinations I1, II1, III1 and III2 correspond to those given in Section 4, E.2.

Chapter 2Page 7–4


B



Table 7.1 Load combinations for loose gear under operating conditions

Load combinations

I II IIILoad


γ pi I1 γ pi II1 γ pi III1 III2 III3

Dead loads LE 1 7 B.3.2.2.1 1,221

1,0 1,16 1

1,0 1,10 1

1,0 1,0 1,0Regular

loads Useful load L N 2 7 B.3.2.2.2 1,34 ψ 1,22 ψ 1,10 - - ψ

Wind loads under

operating conditions3 7 B.3.2.3.1

1,22 1,0 1,10 - 0,2 -Irregular

loadsSnow and ice loads 4 7 B.3.2.3.2 1,22 1,0 - - - -

Hoisting the hoist load

at vhmax 5 4 Tab. 4.2 1,10 ψmax - -

Test load 6 7 B.3.2.4.1 1,10 - ψP -

Special

loads

Lateral impact 7 7 B.3.2.4.2 1,10 - - 1,0

Resistance coefficient γm 1,10 1,10 1,10

1 Where load combinations have a favourable effect, γ pi = 0,95 may be assumed. If the component's masses and centre of gravity is

determined by weighing, 0,95 · γ pi may be assumed.

3.3.2.2 Consideration of the deviation of the load'scentre of gravity

Due to an unexpected and not precisely determinabledeviation in the centre of gravity, stresses on the loosegear are to be considered, assuming an inclined posi-tion deviating 6° from the ideal location in relation to

both main axes. This load condition has to be exam-ined additionally.

3.3.2.3 III3 - Lateral impact

The load combination comprises the loads due tohoisting of the hoist load including a lateral impact.

3.4 Proofs

3.4.1 General

The loose gear is to be dimensioned taking into con-sideration the following points:

3.4.1.1 The centre of gravity is located in the axis ofsymmetry of the suspension.

3.4.1.2 Regarding frame-type traverses or spreaders,the bending rigidity of the load is also to be evaluatedwith respect to load transfer and possibly to be in-cluded in the static strength analysis. Without proofof the static strength of the frame-type traverse orspreader as an overall system complete with the load,only two load attachment points may be assumed to beload-bearing.

3.4.2 Strength analyses

Regarding the strength analyses, in general the state-ments in Section 3, D. and Section 3, H. apply. The

load combinations are to be formed using the valuesfor the partial safety factors according to Table 7.1.

3.4.2.1 Telescopic parts of traverses or spreaders

In the case of the telescopic parts of traverses orspreaders, careful attention is to be paid to the trans-verse force in the overlapping area and to the forcetransferred at the outlet, as well as at the inner end ofthe movable part.

3.4.3 Proof of stability (buckling, lateral tor-sional buckling, warping)

For proof of stability, the statements in Section 3, D. apply in general. The load combinations are to beformed using the partial safety factors according to

Table 7.1.

3.4.3.1 Special boundary conditions for traverses

Regarding the proof of stability of traverses, special boundary conditions are to be assumed for the deter-mination of the critical buckling load. It is to be con-sidered that there is no fork bearing i.e. the proofs ofstability used in the general steel engineering to de-termine the critical buckling load are not applicable.

For the determination of the minimum potential en-ergy due to outer and inner forces, only the restoringmoments between the traverse's suspension and the

load's suspension can be applied, which are activated by the eigen mode of the traverse. In determining theideal lateral torsional buckling moment (Mki) these

boundary conditions are to be applied.

VI - Part 2GL 2012


B



3.4.3.2 System assumptions for the determination of Mki for traverses (ideal lateral torsionalbuckling moment)

Fig. 7.3 Eigen mode of the traverse

Fig. 7.4 Eigen mode of the traverse Fig. 7.5 Eigen mode of the traverse

Chapter 2Page 7–6


B



3.4.3.3 Boundary conditions for the proof of tra-verses

– determination of the section forces and deforma-tions in accordance with 2nd order theory

– application of the geometrical replacement imperfections using ΔS = L/150 (maximum ΔS ofthe eigen mode), see Fig. 7.3

– limitation of the torsional angle Φ ≤ 0,3 rad, seeFig. 7.4 and 7.5

3.4.4 Fatigue strength analyses for loose gear

3.4.4.1 For fatigue strength analyses, in general thestatements in Section 3, F. apply. Generally, they areto be conducted for the load combination I of Table

7.1 using a partial safety factor of γ pi = 1,0.

3.4.4.2 For loose gear with stress cycles ≤ 20000, afatigue strength analysis may be dispensed with.

3.4.5 Proofs of suitability for use

For proofs of suitability for use, in general the state-ments in Section 3, G. apply. Generally, they are to beconducted for the load combination I of Table 7.1

using a partial safety factor of γ pi = 1,0.

3.4.4.1 Traverse

The maximum deformation is to be limited to ≤ L/500,

related to the traverse's length.

3.4.4.2 Frame-type traverse/spreader

The maximum bending deformation due to the dead-

weight is to be limited to ≤ L/1000, related to thespreader´s length, the maximum bending deformation

is to be limited to ≤ L/500, related to the spreader'slength.

3.4.4.3 Containerspreader

The maximum bending deformation (bending stiff-ness) of the spreader is to be limited such, that the

liftlocks cannot unlock under operational conditions.



4.1.1 The general requirements in Section 1, C.1. are to be observed.

4.1.2 Regarding the documents to be submitted forexamination, the lists in Section 1, D.4.2 are to be

applied as and where relevant. In addition, the follow-ing documents are to be submitted for examination:

– overview drawings showing all variations offunctions, loads and load fastenings

– workshop drawings of all steel components

– strength analyses for all load-bearing compo-nents (static, dynamic, fatigue strength, as re-quired)

– stowage and fastening devices for shipborneloose gear

– additional documents as required

4.2 Supervision of construction

4.2.1 The general requirements of Section 1, A. areto be observerd.

4.2.2 The supervision of construction and accep-tance testing before delivery is required in principle.

4.2.3 For loose gear which is still accessible forcomprehensive examination after completion, supervi-sion of construction may be dispensed with, subject tothe consent of the GL Surveyor. Acceptance testing isrequired in every case, where appropriate togetherwith the first load test.

4.2.4 The requirements to be met by the manufac-turer are set out in Section 11, B.

5. Tests and examinations

5.1 Tests

5.1.1 Before being put into use, and after everymajor modification or repair to load-bearing parts,loose gear shall be subjected to a functional and loadtest in the presence of a GL Surveyor.

5.1.2 Regularly repeated load testing of loose gearis not prescribed internationally by ILO. It shall benoted, however, that various flag states do have regu-lations on this.

5.1.3 The static test loads given in Table 7.2 areapplicable to loose gear according to the definition inSection 1, C.4.

Table 7.2 Static test loads for loose gear

Nominal loads "LNe" of

loose gear

Static test loads 1

"LPstat"

up to 10 t

above 10 t up to 160 t

above 160 t

2 × SWL

(1,04 × SWL) + 9,6 t

1,1 × SWL

1 If applicable to be multiplied with f d according to C.3.2.2

VI - Part 2GL 2012


B

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-



5.2 Examinations

5.2.1 Before being put into use, after each load test,and after each modification or repair to load-bearing

parts, all loose gear is to be subjected to a thorough

examination by a GL Surveyor and, where necessary,a functional test under his supervision.

5.2.2 In addition to the regulations according to5.2.1, all loose gear shall be subjected to a visual ex-amination by a GL Surveyor at least every 12 months,as well as a thorough examination every 5 years and,where necessary, a functional test.

For due dates of examinations the provisions in Sec-tion 13, D.2. are applicable.

6. Documentation

For marking, see D.

6.1 Certification

6.1.1 After each load test using the prescribed testload according to Table 7.2, the supervising GL Sur-veyor issues one of the two following certificates.Functional tests are not specially certified.

6.1.2 For ship's loose gear, a test certificate FormLA3 will be issued. For use on board more than oneship, additional copies may be issued.

6.1.3 For loose gear which cannot be allocated to a

particular ship, a test certificate Form F 208 will beissued.

For use on board, certificate Form 208 requires to betranscribed by a GL Surveyor into Form LA3, in orderto warrant international acceptance. In addition, theloose gear shall be stamped with the new certificatenumber.

6.2 Register Book

6.2.1 As described in Section 13, G., the test cer-tificates Form LA3 are added to the Register book ofloading gear carried on board.

Upon request by the operator, an individual Register book for each piece of loose gear can be issued for useon board more than one ship.

6.2.2 For all examinations according to 5.2, a GLexamination report will be compiled. In addition, theexaminations are confirmed in the Register book ofloose gear.

6.2.3 Certificates Form 208 will be handed out tothe operator without a Register book. The operatorshall add these certificates and examination reportsaccording to 6.2.4 to his own documentation.

6.2.4 The confirmation of examinations of loosegear, for which a test certificate Form F 208 has beenissued, is effected by the examination report.

C. Interchangeable Components

1. General notes

1.1 Loose gear according to Section 1, C.5. is

regarded as interchangeable components.

1.2 Although not stated in Section 1, C.5., eye plates and bolt connections are to be treated as inter-changeable components.

2. Design and construction

2.1 Block frames shall be designed in such a waythat ropes cannot get caught between the sheave andthe block cheeks.

2.2 Cargo hooks, shackles, swivels and ringsshall be forged. Exceptions to this rule require theconsent of GL.

2.3 Grades of cast steel are to be selected accord-ing to recognised standards. The consent of GL is

required in every instance for other grades of cast steel.

2.4 Galvanization is permitted only with forgedcomponents of fully killed steels. Galvanization offorged interchangeable components may take placeonly after the load testing of the components.

Where delivery is carried out by a recognised manu-facturer, it is to be documented that a stress test has

been conducted at the manufacturer under applicationof the minimum test loads, in accordance with GLRules, including crack test

2.5 The galvanizing of cold-formed componentsis permitted only if the suitability of the material forthis purpose has been proved.

3. Interchangeable components conformingto recognized standards

3.1 Verification by calculation is not required inrespect of interchangeable components which conformto recognized standards.

3.2 Determination of the nominal load

The nominal load is determined depending on thelocation of service, without partial safety factors andhoist load coefficients

– in the loading gear acc. to Section 4, Load combination I

– in the loose gear acc. to B.3.3, load combina-

tion IWhere applicable, the nominal load determined asabove is to be multiplied additionally by a dynamicfactor f d acc. to 3.4.

Chapter 2Page 7–8


C



3.3 For interchangeable components conformingto standards, a choice has to be made according to theindicated nominal sizes. The nominal sizes correspondto the nominal load acc. to 3.2.

3.4 In all cases where the hoist load coefficientψ is greater than the value of ψzul, the permissible

load, on which the choice of the nominal size is based,

is to be increased by the following dynamic factor f d:

dzul

f 1,0ψ

= ≥ψ

ψ = hoist load coefficient acc. to Section 4, D.

ψzul = permissible hoist load coefficient acc. to Ta-

ble 7.3

Table 7.3 Permissible hoist load coefficient zul

LNe zul

up to 60 t 1,6

above 60 t to 160 t NeL 601,6

200

−−

above 160 t 1,1

4. Basic principles for proofs for inter-changeable components not correspondingto a recognized standard

4.1 General notes

4.1.1 For the calculation and the dimensioning ofinterchangeable components the requirements in Sec-tion 3 and 4 apply.

4.1.2 The load for dimensioning is determined depending on the location of service, taking into consid-eration partial safety factors and hoist load coefficients

– using load combinations for the loading gearacc. to Section 4, E.

– using load combinations for the loose gear acc.to B.3.3

Additionally, the static test load LPstat acc. to Table 7.4

with a partial safety factor of γ pi = 1,10 is to be observed

for the determination of the load for dimensioning.

4.2 Proofs

4.2.1 General

4.2.1.1 Basis for the dimensioning is the applicabledesign load for dimensioning which is to be deter-mined acc. to 4.1.2.

4.2.1.2 The calculation of non-standardized interchange-able components may be carried out using suitable cal-culation methods acc. to the provisions in Section 3.

4.2.1.3 A method to determine the strength of non-standardized eye plates is given in 4.3.

4.2.1.4 Proof of bolt connections may be providedacc. to 4.4.

4.2.2 Strength analyses and proofs of stability

For strength analyses generally the statements inSection 3, D. and Section 3, H. apply. They are to beconducted using the design load for dimensioning.

4.2.3 Proofs of fatigue strength

4.2.3.1 For the proofs of fatigue strength the state-ments in Section 3, F. apply. In general, they are to beconducted using the load combination I of Section 4,Table 4.4 or Section 7, Table 7.1 with the partial

safety factor γ pi = 1,0.

4.2.3.2 For interchangeable components with load

cycles ≤ 20000 the proof of fatigue strength may bedispensed with.

4.3 Non-standardized eye plates

4.3.1 The determination of the dimensioning stressfor eye plates which correspond to Fig. 7.6 and to the

boundary conditions acc. to 4.3.2 may be performedusing the following method, unless a more precise

proof is provided.

Fig. 7.6 Eye plate

R = outer radius of head [mm]

r = bore radius [mm]

c = cheek width [mm]

e = change of head height [mm]

t = plate thickness [mm]

β = inclination angle of flanks [°]

ϑ = angle of attack [°]

r B = bolt radius [mm]

T = clearance between bolt and bore [mm]

a = head height [mm]

S(γ pi ⋅ Li) = design force for dimensioning [kN]

VI - Part 2GL 2012


C



4.3.2 Boundary conditions

For the dimensioning, the following boundary condi-tions are to be adhered to:

I) Radii ratio ρ of the eye:R

2 3r

≤ ≤

II) Clearance T bolt/bore:

T = 2 (r – r B) ≤ 0,2 ⋅ r ≤ 3 mm

For bolt diameters of 50 to 300 mm a clearance between bolt and bore of 3 to 6 mm can be per-mitted. However, in this case the design force fordimensioning has to be increased by 5 %.

III) For moving bolt connections a wear of ΔT = 2 mm

is to be taken into consideration in the strengthanalysis.

IV) Inclination angle of flanks: 0° ≤ β ≤ 45°V) Angle of attack: 0° ≤ ϑ ≤ β

4.3.3 Determination of the stress for dimension-ing and stress proof

The stress for dimensioning is calculated as follows:

σd, max = α ⋅ σ N

α = form factor as per 4.3.5

σ N = nominal stress as per 4.3.4

It is to be proven that:

σd, max ≤ R d

withy,k

d

f R

1,0=

4.3.4 Nominal stress due to design force fordimensioning

The nominal stress due to design force for dimension-ing without friction component is calculated as fol-lows:

( L ) pi inS

S

2 ct

γ ⋅σ =

with ( L ) F N pi iS Fγ ⋅ = γ ⋅ψ ⋅ (see also Table 7.1)

F N = nominal load on eye plate

c = R + e sin β - r

The nominal stress component due to friction (frictioncoefficient µ) between bolt and bore is calculated asfollows:

n,µ n,S

8µ

R 1

r

σ = σ⎛ ⎞π +⎜ ⎟⎝ ⎠

Consequently, the nominal stress due to design forcefor dimensioning including friction component iscalculated as follows:

N n,S n,µσ = σ + σ

4.3.5 Determination of form factor

In general the form factor is calculated as follows:

ii

ρ β ε ϑα = α = α + α + α + α∑

with:

3 5

4 2ρα = ρ + (base value)

( )1

4 sin2

β⎛ ⎞

α = − − ε − ρ β⎜ ⎟⎝ ⎠

(component due to incli-nation of flanks)

( )3εα = − − ρ ε (component due to changeof head height)

1 cos sin−

ϑα = ρ β ϑ (component due to angleof attack)

and:R

r ρ = (radii ratio)

2e

R ε =

(change of head heightratio)

4.3.6 Connection to supporting structure

The connection to the supporting structure (see Fig.7.6 cross section ko-ck) is to be proven separately inaccordance with Section 3.

4.3.7 Proof bearing stress bolt/bore

The bearing stress proof can be conducted in accor-dance with 4.4.

4.4 Bolt connections

4.4.1 The strength analysis of bolt connectionsincluding the proof of bearing stress may be per-formed using the following method, unless a more

precise proof is provided.

4.4.2 Boundary conditions

The following boundary conditions are to be compliedwith for dimensioning:

I) clearance between bolt and bore T ≤ 0,1 ⋅ dL,

however 3 mm at maximum, see Fig. 7.6

II) For mobile bolt connections 2mm wear is to betaken into consideration in the strength analysis.

III) The eye reinforcement may only be taken intoconsideration for proof of bearing stress. In this

case the weld connection of the eye reinforce-ment with the eye plate is to be proven.

IV) For s2 the bigger of the two gaps is to be taken

s2 ≥ s1.



C



Fig. 7.7 Bolt connections

Fig. 7.8 Eye reinforcement

4.4.3 Proof of bending stress of the bolt

σ(γ pi ⋅ Li) =maxM

W

=

( ) 2 2 0 1 1 2 2 pi Li

0

S (s 0,5 t ) s (s 0,5 t ) (s 0,5 t )

2 s W

γ ⋅⋅ + ⋅ + + − +⎡ ⎤⎣ ⎦

⋅ ⋅

≤ R d

4.4.4 Proof of shear stress of the bolt

τ(γ pi ⋅ Li) =

B

V 4

A 3⋅

=( ) 0 1 1 2 2 pi Li

0 B

S s (s 0,5 t ) (s 0,5 t ) 4

2 s A 3

γ ⋅⋅ + + − +⎡ ⎤⎣ ⎦

⋅⋅ ⋅

≤ dR

3

4.4.5 Proof of equivalent stress of the bolt

σ(γ pi ⋅ Li) =

2 2

( ) ( ) pi Li pi LiX1 X2 X3 3γ γ⋅ ⋅⎡ ⎤ ⎡ ⎤⋅ ⋅ σ + τ⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦

≤ R d

For the determination of the factors X1, X2 and X3see below.

4.4.5.1 Determination of coefficient X1

X1 =

22e

1,5 0,7dB

2e1

dB

⎛ ⎞+ ⋅⎜ ⎟⎜ ⎟⎜ ⎟+⎜ ⎟⎝ ⎠

=2e

1 für 1,67dB

>

VI - Part 2GL 2012


C



Fig. 7.9 Coefficient X1 for the bending slen-derness of the connecting bolt


X2 =

0,07dL dB

1,38 0,03dB

−⎛ ⎞⋅ −⎜ ⎟⎝ ⎠

Fig. 7.10 Coefficient X2 for the clearance be-tween bolt and bore


X3 =

2

0 0

2 2

rs rs1, 2 0,02 0,06

dB dB

⎛ ⎞+ − ⎜ ⎟

⎝ ⎠

= 0

2

rs1 for 2

dB>

Fig. 7.11 Coefficient X3 for the bending slen-derness of the connecting bolt

4.4.6 Proof of bearing stress

σ(γ pi ⋅ Li) bearing stress =( Li) pi

S

dB t

γ ⋅

⋅

or

=( Li) pi

(v)

S

dB t

γ ⋅

⋅

≤ d1,5 R ⋅

Fig. 7.12 Examples for bolt clearance



C



4.4.7 Load fastening ropes and lifting straps are tocomply with the following standards:

– ISO 7531 for wire ropes

– DIN 83302 for natural and chemical fibre ropes

– DIN 61360 for lifting straps



5.1.1 Examination of drawings is not required inrespect of interchangeable components and eye plateswhich conform to recognized standards.

5.1.2 Details or drawings are to be submitted forexamination in respect of interchangeable componentsor eye plates which are made of materials and/or todesigns which do not conform to a standard.

5.1.3 Where such interchangeable components oreye plates are to be repeatedly manufactured, the rele-vant drawings may also be approved as works stan-dards. Where reference is made to such works stan-dards in the documents submitted, the date and journalnumber of the GL approval shall also be indicated.

5.2 Supervision of construction

The supervision of construction is not required forinterchangeable components and eye plates.

6. Tests and examinations

6.1 Tests

6.1.1 Interchangeable components

6.1.1.1 Before being assembled or put into use, inter-changeable components in the unpainted and, as far as possible, ungalvanized condition shall be subjected toa static load test in the presence of a GL Surveyor, performed on a calibrated and approved testing ma-chine using the test loads given in Table 7.4.

6.1.1.2 Where the origin of interchangeable compo-nents is unknown, or certificates for the materials areunavailable, the GL Surveyor is entitled to demandthat one specimen of the interchangeable componentundergo a tensile test at 4 times the permissible load.

The specimen shall withstand this load without break-ing. A further increase to the load until the specimen breaks is not generally required. However, the GLSurveyor is entitled to demand a test to establish the

actual breaking load.Specimens which have undergone tensile testing at 4times the permissible load are overstressed, and are to be destroyed or recycled after the test.

6.1.1.3 After changes or repairs to interchangeablecomponents, a load test according to 5.1.1.1 is to berepeated.

6.1.1.4 Regularly repeated load testing of individual

parts of interchangeable components is not prescribedinternationally by ILO. They are load tested togetherwith the devices to which they are fastened.

6.1.2 Eye plates

6.1.2.1 Eye plates which are integral parts of loadinggear and loose gear are included in the load tests ofthese devices.

6.1.2.2 Eye plates for assembly and maintenancework as well as for transportation purposes require astrength analysis with respect to their welding jointsand the supporting structures. These analyses will be

checked within the scope of examination of drawings.

Load tests with agreed static test loads may be con-ducted on request of the ship's owner.

6.2 Examinations

6.2.1 Interchangeable components

6.2.1.1 The manufacturer and dealer has to presentall interchangeable components to the GL Surveyor, inan unpainted and, if possible, ungalvanized condition,for examination of the dimensions and workmanship,

together with the certificates covering the materialsused.

6.2.1.2 After the static load test, each component isthoroughly examined by the GL Surveyor, and shall, ifthe Surveyor considers it necessary, be taken apart for

closer scrutiny.

6.2.1.3 After start of operation, every interchange-able component shall be subjected to an examination by a GL Surveyor at least every 12 months, as well asto a thorough examination every 5 years. For highlystressed components, non-destructive tests may becarried out.

Components shall, if the Surveyor considers it neces-

sary, be taken apart for closer scrutiny.

6.2.2 Eye plates

6.2.2.1 Eye plates, which are integral parts of loadinggear and loose gear, are examined together with thesedevices.

6.2.2.2 Eye plates according to 6.1.2.2, includingtheir joints, are examined before their first employ-ment, after every load test and at agreed intervals.

6.2.2.3 Examinations of eye plates may be comple-mented by crack and ultrasonic tests upon agreement.These examinations are mandatory, if the visual in-spection during the examination gives reason to do so.

VI - Part 2GL 2012


C

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-



7. Documentation

7.1 Interchangeable components

For marking, see D.

7.1.1 Certificates

7.1.1.1 The GL Surveyor issues a certificate for eachinterchangeable component which has successfullyundergone a load test and a thorough examination.

This certificate gives details of the manufacturer orsupplier, the date of the test, special materials (highstrength / low temperature), the size of the test loadand the permissible load.

7.1.1.2 GL Form LA 3 is used for shipborne loadinggear or interchangeable components and GL Form F208 for all others.

For the transcription of Form 208 into Form LA3 foruse on board, the requirements in B.6.1.3 apply as andwhere relevant.

7.1.1.3 For closer definition of tested and examinedcomponents, the following details are entered on thecertificates:

– shackles:

bolt diameter; where the inside width is non-standard, the following dimensions are to be in-dicated in the order shown: diameter of theshackle in the middle of the bow, bolt diameter,

and inside width.

– cargo hooks and swivels:

nominal size

– blocks:

groove diameter of the sheave, and the sheave pin diameter, together with the type of head fit-ting and an indication of whether or not a becketis fitted

– double yoke pieces:

bolt diameter, and length of the double yoke piece between the bolt centres

– rope sockets:

nominal size, and details of the material test

– cable joints:

nominal size

– rigging screws:

nominal size, or thread diameter, and the type of bolt head (oval eye, round eye or fork eye)

– chains:

diameter of the round steel bar, external widthof the chain link, and length of the chain

7.1.1.4 Where interchangeable components aremanufactured to approved drawings, the certificatesalso indicate the relevant drawing, together with thedate and GL journal number of the approval.

7.1.2 Register book

7.1.2.1 In accordance with the requirements in Sec-tion 13, G., the test certificates Form LA3 are added tothe Register book of loading gear on board.

7.1.2.2 Interchangeable components which are inte-gral parts of loading gear or loose gear are examinedtogether with these devices.

For the devices examination reports are compiled andthe examinations are confirmed in the Register bookof loading gear.

7.1.2.3 For interchangeable components which arecertified by Form 208, the requirements in B.6.2.3 and6.2.4 apply as and where relevant.

7.2 Eye plates

7.2.1 Eye plates in accordance with 6.1.2.1 are in-cluded in the documentation of the devices stated there.

7.2.2 The tests and examinations of eye plates inaccordance with 6.1.2.2 are confirmed by examinationreports.

Table 7.4 Static test loads for interchangeable components

Line Interchangeable components Permissible loads "SWL" 1 Static test loads "LPstat" 2

1chains, rings, hooks, shackles,

swivels, etc.

up to 25,0 t

over 25,0 t

2 × SWL

(1,22 × SWL) + 20 t

2single-sheaved blocks with andwithout becket

up to 25,0 t

over 25,0 t

2 × SWL

(1,22 × SWL) + 20 t

3 multi-sheaved blocks

up to 25,0 t

over 25,0 t up to 160,0 t

over 160,0 t

2 × SWL

(0,993 × SWL) + 27 t

1,1 × SWL

1 The permissible load "SWL" of single and multi-sheaved blocks is equal to the permissible load on the suspension.

2 If need be, to be multiplied with f d according to C.3.4.



C



D. Marking of Loose Gear and Interchange-able Components

1. Manufacturer's plate

Loose gear according to Section 1, C.4. is to be fittedwith a manufacturer's plate, which shall include atleast the following information, if applicable:

– manufacturer's name

– type of loose gear

– serial number

– year of construction

– characteristics, where applicable, such as e.g. nomi-nal pressure, nominal voltage, filling volume, etc.

– nominal load(s)

– dead load

– with lifting beams, traverses and spreaders: asymbol for the inclination angle of the allocatedsuspension ropes or chains

2. Stamping

2.1 General notes

2.1.1 Stamping is regarded to be the proof of a testand/or examination. Loose gear and interchangeablecomponents shall therefore undergo (renewed) load

testing, if a certificate is required in this regard.

2.1.2 Where GL has agreed to waive the examina-tion of drawings of loose gear or non-standardizedinterchangeable components, these parts receive the

wide GL anchor stamp.

2.1.3 The stamp height shall be at least 6 mm.

2.2 Loose gear

2.2.1 Scope of stamping

All loose gear which has successfully undergone test-ing and thorough examination is stamped as follows:

– certificate number, together with the code lettersof the examining inspection office

– stamp with the month and year of testing

– Safe Working Load in tonnes or kg preceded bythe letters "SWL"

– dead load in t or kg preceded by the letters "WT"

2.2.2 Stamp location

The stamp is to be applied on one side, in a prominent position, if possible in the centre, but not concealed by

the marking.

2.2.3 Multiple stamping

2.2.3.1 Loose gear subjected to supervision of con-struction at the manufacturer's premises is double-

stamped (see Table 7.5).

2.2.3.2 After periodic load tests and re-issuing of testcertificates, stamping is not repeated.

2.3 Interchangeable components

2.3.1 Scope of stamping

2.3.1.1 Each interchangeable component which hassuccessfully undergone testing and thorough examina-tion is stamped as follows:

– certificate number, together with the code lettersof the examining inspection office

– Stampwith the month and year of testing

Table 7.5 Examples of stamping and marking

Documentation Loose gearInterchangeable

components

Certificate Form:

F 208Acceptance testing

L 8924 H

03 08

Stamping

Certificate Form:

LA3 or F 208Load test

L 2429 H

04 08

SWL 30 t

WT 5 t

L 6743 H

02 08

SWL 15 t

rope 5 t

(single-sheaved block

with becket)

Marking Rigging plansSWL 30 t

WT 5 t

---

Abbreviations: Nominal load: SWL

Weight: WT

Permissible load:

SWL

VI - Part 2GL 2012


D



– permissible load in tonnes or kg preceded by theletters "SWL"

– permissible rope hoist in tonnes or kg with blocks, e.g.:

– single-sheaved block without becket SWL 6 trope 3 t

– single-sheaved block with becket SWL 15 t rope 5 t

– multiple-sheaved blocks SWL 64 t

with 4 sheaves rope 8 t

2.3.1.2 With interchangeable components made ofspecial materials, the stamp is extended with the fol-lowing letters, if applicable:

– H for high strength material

– T for low-temperature materials

Where interchangeable components are composed ofseveral single parts which may be disassembled, suchas e.g. shackle hook and shackle round nut, each partwill get this special stamp.

2.3.2 Stamp location

The stamp is to be applied to the following locationsfor the parts given below:

– shackles:

to one of the limbs close to the eye

– cargo hooks:

to the side of the hook, close to the suspension

– swivels:

to the traverse; the oval eye only gets the anchorstamp

– blocks:

to the side bar, if any; otherwise to the side plateclose to the point of suspension of the block

– double yoke pieces:

to the middle of one side – rope sockets:

to the conical section, opposite the existingstamp for material testing

– cable joints:

to the middle of one side

– rigging screws:

on the body: to every eye head fitting or doublelug head fitting, plus the GL anchor

– suspension ropes and slings:

to a permanently fastened small metal plate

– chains:

to the last link at each end

2.3.3 Special features

2.3.3.1 With a permissible load up to 15 t, the figureon the stamp shall be rounded to one decimal place.With values of 15 t and over, the figure shall berounded to a whole number.

2.3.3.2 For the galvanization of forged interchange-able components, the requirements in C.2.4 apply. Thestamp shall still be recognizable after galvanization, orwhere required, it shall be re-stamped.

2.3.3.3 The stamp height shall be at least 6 mm, or 4mm for small parts.

2.3.3.4 On small parts to which it is difficult or impossible to apply the whole stamp, the month and yearof testing may be omitted, followed, if necessary, bythe certificate number and the permissible load, whererequired.

The following is applicable for stamping of small parts:

– components with a SWL of 1,6 t and over:

These are stamped in full, as described in 2.3.1.

– components with a SWL between 0,25 t and 1,0 t:

These only receive the GL anchor stamp, andwhere required, also the permissible load.

– components with a SWL of less than 0,25 t SWL:

These only receive the GL anchor stamp, and

where required, the stamp shall be waived.

3. Marking of loose gear

3.1 Loose gear shall be permanently marked in a prominent position on both sides in the manner de-scribed in 3.2 and 3.3.

The inscription shall comprise characters at least 80mm in height, the permanence of which shall be as-sured by punching, by applying weld seams or smallmetal plates adequately fastened. The fatigue strengthof the marked components shall not be unduly impaired by these measures.

Glued-on lettering foils are not permitted.

3.2 Lifting beams, traverses and spreaders shall be marked as follows:

– nominal load "SWL" in t or kg

– dead load "WT" in t or kg (mandatory, if over100 kg)

– special types of fastening or loading

3.3 Grabs and lifting magnets shall be marked asfollows:

– nominal load "SWL" in t or kg

– dead load "WT" in t or kg

– capacity in m3 for grabs



D



E. Wear, Damage, Repair

1. Loose gear

1.1 With respect to tolerable reduction in the

plate thickness due to rusting or wear, the require-ments in Section 13, F.2. apply.

1.2 With respect to a reduction in the nominalload of loose gear covered by Section 1, C.4., as analternative to removal from service in the event ofdamage, inadmissible wear or other causes, the re-quirements in Section 13, F.9. apply.

2. Interchangeable components

2.1 Interchangeable components such as bolts,

chains, rings, etc., as well as eye plates, shall be replaced if the parts are visibly deformed, if the diame-

ter is reduced by 10 % at some points, or if the area ofthe load-bearing cross-section is reduced by 20 %.

2.2 The use of welding to repair cracks in, orworn portions of, interchangeable components is gen-

erally not permitted. The same applies to bolts andother removable elements of loose gear.

GL reserves the right to approve such repairs in spe-cial cases. Then the following is to be observed:

2.2.1 After repair of forged interchangeable components, evidence is to be provided that heat treatmenthas been carried out.

2.2.2 After repair of interchangeable components, aload test in accordance with C.6.1.1.1 is required.

2.2.3 Renewal of axes, bolts and rope-sheaves ingeneral does not require rerunning of the load tests.

VI - Part 2GL 2012


E





Section 8

Ropes and Rope Accessories

A. General

1. Scope

1.1 The following requirements apply to wire andfibre ropes used as running and standing rigging forloading gear and loose gear as well as for rope slings.

1.2 The following requirements apply to passen-ger lifts and small goods lifts only in so far as they do

not conflict with EN 81-1 to 81-3.(Differences with respect to EN 81 are e.g.: rope safety, end attachments, sheave and drum diameters, etc.)

2. Approval for manufacture

2.1 With regard to manufacture and quality as-surance, rope manufacturers shall have been approved

by GL.

GL approval is given provided that the requirementsfor the manufacture, testing and marking of wire ropesset out in the GL Rules for Materials is complied with,see Section 1, B.2.1.2 (Part 1, Chapter 4, Section 3

and 4 thereof).

2.2 For approval, the manufacturer shall amongstother things prove, during a tour of the works, that thenecessary equipment is available for the proper manu-facture and testing of ropes. GL reserves the right todemand that a qualification test be performed onspecimen lengths of rope.

2.3 Approved rope manufacturers can also beapproved for testing and certificating ropes on theirown authority. Upon receiving this extended approval,GL assigns the manufacturer a special code number.

B. Wire Ropes

1. General requirements

1.1 Wire ropes shall conform to recognized stan-dards, such as e.g. EN 12385.

1.2 For employment on deck, wire ropes forrunning rigging shall be drawn galvanized, and wireropes for standing rigging shall be fully galvanized.

After being galvanized, the ropes shall be impregnatedand conserved with non-thermosetting and acid-freegrease in order to avoid penetration of water and sub-sequent corrosion.

1.3 Ropes with a nominal diameter exceeding5 mm shall at least consist of 100 single wires, run-ning rigging shall at least have 6 strands.

1.4 Free rope ends shall be sized, tapered orsocketed to prevent fraying of the rope ends or to pre-vent changes in the lay lengths of the rope and strands.

1.5 Special rope designs, Lang lay ropes, ropeswith a nominal tensile grade of more than 1960

N/mm2

, and ropes of austenitic or stainless materialsmay, on application, be approved, provided that theyare suitable for the proposed use.

1.6 Wire ropes of stainless materials shall besuitable for use in marine atmospheres.

To avoid crevice corrosion, the materials used for thewires shall have a sufficiently high chromium andmolybdenum content.

Steels are regarded as resistant to crevice corrosion ina marine atmosphere if the sum "W" is 29 or over,where:

W = Cr [%] + 3,3 ⋅ Mo [%] ≥ 29

2. Definitions

2.1 "Running rigging" refers to all ropes passingover rope sheaves or guide rolls, or wound onwinches, irrespective of whether or not the ropes aremoved under load.

2.2 "Standing rigging" refers to all wire ropeswhich are not turned round or wound on to winches,such as shrouds, stays, pendants, etc. Standing riggingshall be fitted with thimbles or rope sockets.

2.3 "Rope slings" refer to ropes not forming anintegral part of loading gear or loose gear, which areused to attach loads, and can be employed withoutspecial adaptation or fitting operations.

2.4 The Calculated Breaking Load Fr of a rope isthe product of the theoretical metal cross-section andthe nominal tensile strength of the wires.

2.5 The Minimum Breaking Load Fmin of a ropeis the product of the calculated breaking load F r andthe Spinning Factor k s.

2.6 The Actual Breaking Load Fwi of a rope is theload determined by a tensile test to destruction of thecomplete rope.

VI - Part 2GL 2012

Section 8 Ropes and Rope Accessories Chapter 2Page 8–1

B










2.7 The Proven Breaking Load Fn of a rope is the product of the "measured aggregate breaking load" Fe and the Spinning Factor k s.

2.8 The Measured Aggregate Breaking Load Fe

of a rope is the sum of the individually determined breaking loads of all the wires in the rope, ascertained by tensile tests.

2.9 The Spinning Factor k s is an empirical factor

which takes account of the strength reduction due to

stranding.

The spinning factors of established types of wire ropeare given in relevant standards or manufacturers' in-formation.

3. Dimensioning

3.1 The Breaking Load FBr of wire ropes forloading gear and loose gear shall not be less than the

product of the Rope Tension FS and one of the safety

factors γDi shown in Table 8.1:

FBr ≥ FS ⋅ γDi

FBr = actual breaking load Fwi or proven breaking

load Fn

3.2 The Rope Tension FS is the maximum force

calculated for load condition I1 disregarding the hoistload coefficient ψ, but taking into consideration the

losses due to friction and bending in the rope sheaves.In addition, the following shall be observed:

3.2.1 For the partial safety facctors, γ pi = 1,0 may be applied.

3.2.2 The determination of rope tensions, takinginto consideration the sheave friction and bendingresistance of the ropes, is based on a frictional coeffi-cient of 5 % per turn for friction bearings, and 2 % perturn for anti-friction bearings.

Where calculations are to be performed with smallerfrictional coefficients, special proof of these is to be

provided.

3.2.3 Rope deflection angles due to static shipinclinations do not increase the hoisting rope force.

Enforced rope deflection angles, due to acceleration

forces or e.g. the drift of an offshore supply vessel, result in an increase in the hoisting rope force. They

can, however, within the scope of these Rules, be ig-nored when dimensioning hoisting ropes or rope slings.

3.2.4 When dimensioning luffing ropes and stand-ing rigging, the deflecting angles of hoisting ropesshall be considered in principle, if they effect an in-crease in rope forces.

3.2.5 For loading gear and loose gear, where an

increased hoist load coefficient ψsee > ψzul has to be

applied, the rope tension FS is to be multiplied by the

dynamic factor f d. For ψzul and f d see Section 7, C.3.4

and Table 7.3. This applies in particular to craneswhich will be dimensioned only for operation underseastate (see Section 4, D.3.2) or for cranes in graboperation.

3.2.6 Where the efficiency of rope end joints is below 80 %, the loss of breaking force is to be com- pensated up to 80 %.

3.2.7 Wire ropes for multi-rope grabs are to bedimensioned, in addition to the dead weight of thegrab, for the following nominal loads L Ne:

– closing rope, double lever control L Ne

– closing rope, single lever control 2/3 L Ne

– holding cable 2/3 L Ne

3.3 Reduction in breaking load of the rope

Where ropes are wound around design elements with asmall diameter (e.g. shackle bolts, crane hooks, loadconnecting elements etc.), the permissible breakingload is to be reduced.

D = diameter of the slung part

d = rope diameter

The breaking load of the rope is to be reduced for thefollowing range of diameters:

1 ≥ D/d ≤ 7 (D/d < 1 is not permissible)

To select ropes which comply with the required loadcapacity, the following calculation formula is recom-

mended:

redu0,5

BL = 1 - BLD

d

⎡ ⎤⎢ ⎥⎢ ⎥ ⋅⎢ ⎥⎢ ⎥⎣ ⎦

BLredu = reduction in breaking load

BL = breaking load of the non-deformed rope(no rope bending)

Within spliced sections, the rope is not to be slungwith small radii.

3.4 Alternative provisions for the dimensioningof wire ropes for ramps and car decks can be found inSection 6, C.4.1.

Chapter 2Page 8–2

Section 8 Ropes and Rope Accessories VI - Part 2GL 2012

B



4. Requirements for rope drives

4.1 Interaction between ropes and rope drums

4.1.1 In determining the necessary length of wire

ropes, and the length of drum, it is to be borne in mindthat at least 3 safety turns have to remain on the drumat all times.

The requirement for 3 safety turns also applies toluffing ropes with respect to the stowing position ofthe crane boom.

4.1.2 It shall be ensured that ropes are wound up properly on the rope drums. The length of rope drumsshall in general be designed such that no more than 3layers of rope may be wound on top of each other.

Where the number of layers exceeds 3, a special coiling

device, or other system or equipment, shall be provided.

Table 8.1 Safety factors for wire ropes

Safety factors D1 1

Nominal load (L Ne) of

loading gear and loose

gear 2

running rigging

up to 10 t 5

over 10 t up to 160 t410

(8, 85 SWL) 1910× +

over 160 t 3

Safety factors D21

Nominal load (L Ne) of

loading gear and loose

gear 2

standing rigging

up to 10 t 4

over 10 t up to 160 t410

(5,56 SWL) 2444× +

over 160 t 3

Safety factors D3 1

weight of load rope slings 3

up to 10 t 6

over 10 t up to 160 t41,2 10

(8, 85 SWL) 1910

⋅× +

over 160 t 3,6

1 If applicable, to be multiplied with f d, see 3.3

2 For goods lifts, lifting platforms, ramps and car decks the

following loads shall be applied:

- operation without useful load : dead load

- operation with useful load : dead load + nominal load3 Rope slings which are not turned round may be treated as wire

ropes for standing rigging, provided that both ends are fitted

with thimbles or rope sockets.

4.1.3 Uncut rope drums may only be used with theconsent of GL.

4.1.4 Offshore supply cranes and grab cranes shallhave a rope-spindling guide in principle, if the hoist

rope drum cannot be clearly viewed by the operator atall times. Rope-spindling guides are grooved drumsand rope-spindling devices and similar devices.

4.1.5 Design requirements for rope drums are de-scribed in Section 9, E.2.

4.1.6 Wire ropes which are wound on to drums inseveral layers shall have a steel core. For heavy loads,ropes with compressed strands are recommended.

4.1.7 The first rope layer is to be tension loaded.

4.1.8 The direction of rope runout shall be coordi-nated with the direction of rotation of the drums toavoid twisting of the ropes.

The winding direction of ropes on rope drums shall beclearly recognizable at the drums, and where requiredthe winding direction shall be indicated.

4.2 Rope-sheaves

4.2.1 Design features shall prevent ropes from being jammed between rope-sheaves and side plates,or leaving the rope groove.

The distance between the upper edge of rope-sheavesand e.g. side plates shall not exceed 1/3, with plasticrope-sheaves 1/4, of the rope diameter or 8 mm atmost.

4.2.2 With respect to steel materials for assembledrope-sheaves, all normal strength steels with provennotch toughness are suitable.

For cast rope-sheaves, the steel casting type GE200acc. to EN 10293 (previously GS-38 acc. to DIN1681) or cast iron type EN-GJS-400-18-RT with

proven notch toughness or EN-GJS-400-18-LT acc. toEN 1563 (previously GGG-40.3 acc. to DIN 1693 or

corresponding types with cast test pieces.

4.2.3 Where plastic rope-sheaves are used, they areto be type-tested. In the case of single layer spoolingon the rope drum at least the sheave which generatesmost of the alternating bends in the rope is to be pro-duced from steel. Alternatively, defined criteria forscrapping or usage periods may be approved.

4.2.4 The following requirements apply to thedesign of rope grooves:

– depth of groove : ≥ 1,5 times nominal ropediameter

– diameter of groove : 1,06 to 1,08 times nominalrope diameter

– opening angle : 45° to 60°

VI - Part 2GL 2012


B



Table 8.2 Minimum diameter of rope-sheaves and rope drums 1

Rope drum diameter 3 Application/

crane group 2

Rope-sheave

diameter 3

minimumungrooved

minimum

grooved

minimum

Nominal tensile

strength of wire

ropes 4

Wire ropes not

operated under load9ds 10ds 9ds 1570 N/mm2

A 18ds 20ds 16ds 1770 N/mm2

B 20ds not permitted 18ds 1770 N/mm2

C1 22ds not permitted 20ds 1770 N/mm2

C2 + C3 25ds not permitted 22ds 1770 N/mm2

1 In case of rope-sheaves and machined drums measured in the bottom of the groove.

2 for crane group definition, see Section 4, B.

3 Where non-rotating or poorly-rotating ropes are used, it is recommended that the diameters indicated be increased by 10 %.

4 Where ropes with a higher nominal tensile strength are used, the prescribed diameters are to be increased proportionally.

4.3 Diameter of sheaves and rope drums

The required rope-sheave and rope drum diametersrelative to rope diameter "ds" shall be as shown in

Table 8.2.

For all other types of wire ropes the ratio is to be

agreed with GL in each individual case.

4.4 Lateral deflection angle of the rope

4.4.1 The lateral deflection of wire ropes relative tothe plane of the groove in the rope-sheave or ropedrum, shall not be greater than 1:14 (4°).

4.4.2 In the case of poorly-rotating ropes, the lat-eral deflection angle shall not be greater than 1:28(2°).

4.4.3 Exceptions to the above requirements aremade for unwinding hoist ropes. Special wear-

reducing design measures are to be taken for offshoresupply cranes.

4.5 Employment of swivels

Swivels shall only be employed with poorly-rotatingropes.

C. Fibre Ropes


1.1 Fibre ropes are to comply with recognizedstandards. On application, special rope designs may beapproved.

1.2 Fibre ropes (of natural or synthetic fibre)except carbon fibre ropes may be used for "StandingRigging" and for "Running Rigging" of special load-ing gear which is stressed moderately subject to agree-ment with GL.

Fibre ropes may also be used for the cargo tackles of

landing booms according to Section 6, F.3. and forrope slings, with the exception of carbon-fibre ropes.The agreement of GL is required for other applica-tions.

1.3 Synthetic fibre ropes shall be stabilized withrespect to light and heat.

1.4 Free rope ends shall be yarn-wound to pre-vent disintegration of the rope structure. Syntheticfibre ropes may be partially melted.

2. Definitions

2.1 The terms "running rigging", "standing rig-ging" and "rope sling" as well as the term "actual

breaking load" Fwi, are defined in B.2.

2.2 The "proven breaking load" Fn of a fibre rope

is the load calculated from the breaking load of theyarns contained in the rope multiplied by a reductionfactor.

2.3 The "reduction factor" is an empirical value

which takes account of the loss of strength due tostranding.

The reduction factors of the best-established fibreropes are given in the GL Rules listed in A.2.1.

Chapter 2Page 8–4


C



3. Dimensioning

In the case of fibre ropes used for loading gear and

loose gear, the breaking load FBr shall not be less than

the product of the static rope tension "FS" and one of

the safety factors "γF" given in Table 8.3:

FBr ≥ FS ⋅ γF

FBr = required breaking load of the rope analogous

to B.3.1

FS = rope tension acc. to B.3.2

Table 8.3 Safety factors for standardized fibreropes

Nominal diameter

of rope [mm]

Coeffient of utilization

F

10 – 1314 – 17

18 – 23

24 – 39

40 and over

1210

8

7

6

For non-standardized fibre ropes γF is to be agreed

with GL.

4. Requirements for rope drives

4.1 Synthetic fibre ropes are not to be used on

capstan heads or other devices, where a major slippagemay occur.

4.2 Fibre ropes shall only be wound up in onelayer. Winding shall be performed under tension.

4.3 The required rope-sheave diameters relativeto the nominal rope diameter "ds" shall be as shown in

Table 8.4.

For non-standardized fibre ropes the rope sheave di-ameter is to be agreed with GL.

Table 8.4 Minimum diameter of rope-sheavesfor standardized fibre ropes

Rope materialRope-sheave diameter

minimum

manila, hemp

polypropylene

polyamide

polyester

carbon-fibre

5,5ds

4ds

6ds

6ds

14ds

4.4 The required diameters of rope drums are to be agreed with GL in each case. For carbon fibreropes, 12ds is to be taken.

4.5 The lateral deflection of fibre ropes relativeto the plane of the groove of rope-sheaves or ropedrums shall not be greater than 1:14 (4°).

4.6 The number of safety turns remaining on rope

drums shall not be less than 5. In case of syntheticfibre ropes a higher number of safety turns may berequired.

D. Rope-end Attachments

Rope-end attachments shall be designed in accordancewith recognized standards, e.g. the following.

1. Splices for wire ropes and fibre ropes

1.1 Wire ropes and fibre ropes are not to be madeup of parts spliced together.

1.2 Loop splices (eye splices) and thimble splicesshall conform to standard EN 13411-2, or be ofequivalent design.

The dimensions of thimbles shall comply with stan-dard EN 13411-1 (Shaped steel thimbles for wireropes), or standard EN DIN 6899 (Steel thimbles forfibre ropes), as appropriate.

1.3 Provided that B.4.1.1 and C.4.6 are met, ropeends connected to winches may be spliced withoutthimbles, see Section 9, E.2.6.

1.4 Splices of any kind are not permitted forcranes of types B and C, because of their inadequatefatigue strength.

1.5 Splices shall not be sheathed.

2. End attachments for wire ropes

2.1 Rope sockets

2.1.1 Rope sockets (open and closed sockets), intowhich wire rope ends are to be socketed, shall con-form to standard ISO 3916. On application, otherdesigns may be approved.

2.1.2 The socketing process using metal or plasticresin shall be performed as prescribed in standard EN13411-4, and may only be carried out by companieswhich have been approved.

Only approved cast materials may be used. Ropesockets shall be marked with the code letter of themanufacturing company.

2.2 Wrought ferrules

2.2.1 Wrought aluminium alloy ferrules shall con-form to EN 13411-3.

VI - Part 2GL 2012


D



Flemish eyes as per DIN 3095 are to be used wherever possible for the end attachments of the hoisting andluffing ropes of cranes, if the cranes are working withgrabs.

2.2.2 On application, swaged or rolled end fittings(terminals) may be approved.

2.2.3 Application of ferrules in accordance with2.2.1 and 2.2.2 may only be carried out by approvedcompanies. Ferrules shall be marked with the codeletter of the manufacturing company.

2.3 Detachable end joints

2.3.1 Cable joints (wedge clamps) may only beused if the ropes are permanently under tension. Theyshall be clearly visible and readily accessible, to facili-tate inspection.

The free end of the rope shall be secured from being pulled through, e.g. by rope sockets. The safeguardconnection of the rope end to the load-bearing part of the

rope shall not be force-transmitting. However, it shall be capable of bearing 10 % of the rope tension Fs.

Cable joints shall correspond to EN 13411-6. Up to a rope

diameter of 8 mm, EN 13411-7 may also be applied.

2.3.2 Rope sockets as per EN 13411-5 are not permitted. This does not apply to the securing of freerope ends to cable joints.

Rope sockets as per standards EN 81-1 to 81-3 are permissible for fixing the rope ends of passenger liftsand small goods lifts.

2.3.3 With regard to the attachment of rope ends towinch drums, the requirements in Section 9, E.2.6 andE.2.7 apply.

E. Tests and Examinations

1. Supervision of manufacture

1.1 Wire rope and fibre ropes

1.1.1 General notes

1.1.1.1 With regard to testing and examination ofropes, the requirements in the GL Rules stated inA.2.1 apply.

1.1.1.2 Instructions for the testing and use of ropes,and an excerpt from the GL Rules for wire ropes andfibre ropes, are to be found on the reverse sides of theGL certificates for ropes.

1.1.2 Tensile testsAfter manufacturing, ropes shall be subjected to atensile test, which is mandatory for the issue of a GLcertificate. The following applies:

1.1.2.1 Ropes shall be loaded to destruction in theirentirety. Where the tensile force of the testing machineis not sufficient to perform a tensile test for the wholerope, individual wires or yarns shall be loaded to de-struction in a prescribed procedure and the breaking

load of the rope determined by calculation.

1.1.2.2 The results of the tensile tests of the ropesshall achieve the values prescribed in the relevant ropestandards.

1.1.2.3 Tensile tests of ropes shall be performed inthe presence of a GL Surveyor, if:

– the manufacturer is not approved by GL to testand issue certificates on his own authority

– special rope designs are not covered by the GLapproval

– the customer requests it

1.1.2.4 Before each tensile test, the protocols on thechecks performed by the manufacturer are to be pre-sented to the GL Surveyor.

1.1.2.5 Following every tensile test, checking the

diameter tolerances, method of manufacture and manu-facturers' protocols, the GL Surveyor will issue a cer-tificate of test and thorough examination of wire rope

or fibre rope using one of the forms stated in F.2.1.

1.1.3 Marking

Ropes are to be marked by woven-in identification bands and coloured identification threads. The follow-ing shall be taken into account:

1.1.3.1 The identification band shall carry the nameor mark of the manufacturer, and in the case of a GLapproval, in addition the manufacturer’s identificationnumber, assigned by GL.

1.1.3.2 The colour of the identification thread givesinformation about the nominal tensile strength ofwires or the type of yarn used (identification colour).

1.1.3.3 The coloured identification thread may be

dispensed with, if the identification band itself carriesthe identification colour.

1.2 End attachments

1.2.1 End attachments which are not standardized,or do not correspond to standards, are subject to anexamination of drawings.

1.2.2 With regard to tests and examinations of ropesockets, cable joints and terminals, the requirements inSection 7, C.5. apply. For terminals, it may be re-quired to produce specimens connected to a smalllength of rope.

1.2.3 In the case of short, ready-made units, therope sockets and terminals can be load-tested togetherwith the rope.

Chapter 2Page 8–6


E



2. Initial testing

Ropes and their end attachments are subject to a visualexamination and a check of the relevant certificateswithin the scope of the initial testing of loading gear.

3. Periodic testing

3.1 Wire ropes and fibre ropes

3.1.1 In the scope of the periodic testing of loadinggear and loose gear, the ropes are to be examined by aGL Surveyor with regard to condition and fitness foruse.

3.1.2 When ropes are examined, attention shall be paid to deformation, crushing, corrosion/rottennessand broken wires. If necessary the ropes have to be

twisted open for an internal examination.

3.1.3 Special attention is to be paid to the end at-tachments. There, broken wires or yarns are to beexpected, with wire ropes also corrosion, especiallywith downward hanging end attachments. Sheathingsshall be removed for examination.

3.1.4 Sheaves used for length compensation withintackle where a rope only seems to be resting, are

particularly prone to wire ruptures caused by regularcompensation motions.

3.1.5 Where splices have become loose, the ropesshall be shortened and spliced again or, where re-quired, replaced.

3.2 End attachments

With regard to end attachments, the requirements in3.1.1 apply. Attention shall be paid to wear, cracksand corrosion.

3.3 Ropes to be discarded

3.3.1 Wire ropes

3.3.1.1 Wire ropes shall be discarded when, over alength equal to 8 times the rope diameter ds, the num-

ber of detected broken wires is greater than 10 %, withLang lay ropes 5 %, of the total number of wires in therope.

3.3.1.2 Wire ropes shall also be discarded when:

– the rope diameter ds being reduced, owing to

friction or wear, by more than 10 % of thenominal diameter, or in case of wear to the core

– corrosion (external or internal)

– deformations of the rope, such as "bird caging",formation of loops, buckling, kinking, crushing,loosening of individual wires or strands, etc.

3.3.1.3 Wire ropes which are regularly employedunder water shall be shortened in the vicinity of theloose gear (e.g. the hook) at least once per year, inorder to enable the cut-off end, which should have aminimum length of 1 m, to be thoroughly examined

and subjected to a tensile test.If the remaining breaking load is below 80 % of theoriginal breaking load, the rope shall be discarded. Ifthe remaining breaking load is 80 % or above theoriginal load, an estimate shall be made, based on thecondition and the period of employment, whether therope may be employed for another year.

3.3.1.4 Wire ropes employed above deck shall bediscarded at the latest after the following periods ofemployment, even when no external damage is visi-

ble:

– running rigging: 10 years

– standing rigging: 15 years

Wire ropes may be employed for a longer period oftime, if a "Certificate of Fitness" has been issued by arecognized rope company or by the rope manufacturerafter a thorough examination.

3.3.2 Fibre ropes

3.3.2.1 Fibre ropes shall be discarded when, over alength equal to 8 times the rope diameter ds, more than

10 % of the total number of yarns in the rope are broken.

3.3.2.2 Fibre ropes shall also be discarded in theevent of:

– breakage of a strand

– mechanical damage or wear

– release of fibre particles

– rotting

– larger fused patches on synthetic fibre ropes

F. Documentation

1. Marking


1.1.1 Ropes are marked by the method described inE.1.1.3.

1.1.2 With regard to ropes, the rope tension "Fs",

calculated according to B.3.2, shall not be less than

the permissible load SWL, stamped on the end at-

tachments.

1.1.3 With regard to ropes with splices, a smallmetal plate, stamped in accordance with Section 7,D.2.3 shall be fastened near an end attachment.

VI - Part 2GL 2012


F



1.2 End attachments

End attachments for wire ropes are stamped like inter-changeable components, see Section 7, D.2.3. Whereapplicable, this is also possible on ferrules or termi-nals, taking account of D.2.3.3.

2. Certificates


After the tension test, approved manufacturers, or incases described in E.1.1.2.3, a GL Surveyor, will issueone of the following GL test certificates:

– wire ropes: Form LA4

– fibre ropes: Form 497

2.2 End attachments

With regard to certification of end attachments, therequirements in Section 7, C.6.1.1 apply.

3. Storage of rope certificates

As described in Section 13, H., test certificates forropes and test certificates for end attachments will beadded initially and after each re-issue to an allocatedRegister book on board.

4. Confirmation of examinations

4.1 Ropes and end attachments which are integral parts of loading gear or loose gear, will be included inthe examination of these devices.

For these devices examination reports will be preparedand the examinations will be confirmed in the Register

book.

4.2 The confirmation of examinations of ropes

and end attachments which cannot be allocated to particular loading gear or loose gear, will be effected by an examination report for these parts.

Chapter 2Page 8–8


F

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-



Section 9

Mechanical Parts

A. General

1. General Notes

1.1 This Section contains requirements for themechanical parts of loading gear and, where required,also loose gear.

1.2 Complementary or more comprehensive require-ments, in particular for mechanical parts not covered

hereafter are to be taken from the following rules:

– GL Rules for Classification and Construction aswell as GL Guidelines, see Section 1, B.2.1

– recognized standards and requirements, whereapplicable to loading gear, unless contrary to the

provisions in this Section.

1.3 The requirements in Section 1 are to be ob-served, if applicable.

1.4 As regards the materials to be used, themanufacture and the safety requirements, the provi-

sions in Sections 2, 11 and 12 apply.

2. Scope of application

2.1 Table 9.1 is a list of the essential mechanical parts which are subject to examination of drawings asdeemed necessary by GL, and which are to be deliv-ered in the designated manner, together with test re-

ports or inspection certificates.

2.2 The requirement for an examination of draw-ings, and the type of certificate, depends on the safetyrelevance of the components, with respect to their

strength and reliability, and on the operational modeand the type of certification of the loading gear.

2.3 Table 9.1 reflects the general requirements ofGL. GL reserves the right to impose additional re-quirements or to permit deviations.

2.4 GL reserves the right to impose additionalrequirements for all kinds of mechanical parts, shouldthis be necessary on account of new findings or opera-tional experience.

3. Differing designs

3.1 Designs differing from the requirements ofthis Section may be approved if examined by GL fortheir suitability and approved as being equivalent.

3.2 Mechanical parts developed on the basis ofnovel technical concepts but not yet sufficiently

proven, require special approval by GL. Such systemsmay be subjected to more stringent supervision, if the

prerequisites as per 3.1 are not applicable.

3.3 In the cases mentioned in 3.1 and 3.2, GL isentitled to demand presentation of additional docu-mentation and performance of special trials.

B. Design Criteria and Operational Require-ments

1. General notes

1.1 Mechanical parts of loading gear and loosegear shall be designed for the environmental condi-tions agreed on or prescribed, and be capable of beingoperated without problem under these conditions.

1.2 The effects of deformation of the supportingstructure on machinery and equipment are to be ob-served.

1.3 Mechanical parts are to be designed in such away that repairs and regular maintenance are easy to

perform using on-board tools.

2. Dimensioning

2.1 Mechanical parts shall be dimensioned insuch a way as to provide adequate strength in respectof dynamic stress peaks, plus adequate fatiguestrength in relation to the load and service life.

With respect to dimensioning, attention is to be paid particularly to the stress peaks arising during accelera-tion and retardation, and if applicable, the dynamicinfluences resulting from lifting and lowering of loads.

Proof of fatigue strength may be provided in accor-dance with the Section I of F.E.M. (see Section 1,B.1.1.1).

2.2 All mechanical parts shall measure up to thespecial circumstances of operation on board ships,such as ship movements and acceleration, increasedcorrosion, temperature changes, etc.

2.3 With regard to structural design and fasten-ing, in general, acceleration of 0,7 g in the frequencyrange from 13 to 100 Hz shall additionally be consid-ered, see also 3.1.

VI - Part 2GL 2012

Section 9 Mechanical Parts Chapter 2Page 9–1

B



3. Effects of vibration

3.1 Machinery and equipment shall not cause anyvibrations and shocks which may unduly stress othercomponents, or the structure of the loading gear and

loose gear. The permissible amplitudes and accelera-tions are stated in the GL Rules for Machinery Instal-lations, see Section 1, B.2.1.1.

3.2 If compliance with the permissible values ofamplitude and acceleration cannot be ensured bystructural measures, damping measures are required.

3.3 Within the frequency ranges which occur,there shall be no resonance phenomena in compo-nents, support- and suspension arrangements - norwithin equipment.

4. Lubrication

4.1 Lubrication of the moving parts of loadinggear and loose gear shall be guaranteed under all oper-ating conditions.

4.2 Each grease-lubricated bearing shall be pro-vided with its own proven type of grease nipple.

4.3 Accessibility to manual greasing points shall be ensured.

5. Corrosion protection

Components at risk of corrosion are to be given suit-able corrosion protection.

C. Power Drives

The requirements in B. are to be observed. In addition,the following applies:

1. Drives in general

1.1 Power drives shall be adequately dimen-sioned for the working conditions laid down, to allow

trouble-free and low-vibration operation.

1.2 For electrical drives and electrical controls ingeneral, the requirements in Section 10 are applicable.

2. Main drives

2.1 Main drives of loading gear shall be dimen-sioned in such a way that the installed power meetsthe requirements in 1.1 for all combinations of motionand speed.

Where the installed power is not sufficient to executeall motions simultaneously at nominal load and at full

speed, the speed shall be reduced automatically.

2.2 Diesel engines shall not be capable of run-ning at excessive speeds or being stalled.

D. Slewing Gears and Slew Rings

1. Slewing gears

1.1 Slewing gears are to be designed for maxi-

mum operating torque and, where the gears are of aself-locking type, they are to be equipped with a slew-ing gear brake.

1.2 Slewing gears on board ships are to be de-signed in such a way that, in the event of the vessel's

permissible inclination being exceeded by 5°, none ofthe materials employed shall be stressed beyond 90 %of its yield point.

1.3 In the case of slewing gears on board ships, itis to be taken into account that it might be necessary inthe "out of operation" condition to reduce the load on

the slewing gear brakes by means of locking devices.

1.4 Slewing gears of offshore cranes are to bedimensioned for at least 1,3 times the design torque,

based on wind, transverse tension and inclination ofthe crane’s base and shall have at least 2 independentdrives.

2. Slew rings

2.1 Large roller bearings

2.1.1 The design of large roller bearings shall,

together with the connecting structures and the bolt-ing, be suitable for the intended operation and theintended environmental conditions.

2.1.2 The connecting flanges on the loading gearand foundations shall be adequately distortion-resistant, their surfaces machined.

Accuracy of plane and distortion shall be within thetolerances stated by the manufacturer.

The mating surfaces shall be steel to steel. Casting ofsynthetic material is permitted only in exceptionalcases and requires GL approval in each individual

case, see Section 4, G.4.1.2.4.

2.1.3 Large roller bearings are to be designed insuch a way that a failure of important runway ele-ments does not result in a total loss of the loadinggear.

With regard to offshore cranes, retaining devices areto be provided where required.

2.1.4 If large roller bearings have to be dismantledduring employment for an internal examination, spe-cial dismantling equipment shall be available whichcan hold the loading gear and raise it after the con-

necting bolts have been unscrewed.As an alternative, the loading gear shall have specialeyebolts for lifting by another appliance, and a safe

place for setting-down.

Chapter 2Page 9–2

Section 9 Mechanical Parts VI - Part 2GL 2012

D



2.1.5 Where an interchange of seals is intended,large roller bearings are to be designed such that thisis enabled without dismantling of the bearings or loos-ening of the connecting bolts.

2.1.6 With respect to the materials to be used, aswell as their heat treatment and proof of mechanical

properties, the requirements in Section 2, D. apply.

2.2 Bolting of large roller bearings

In addition to Section 4, G.4.1 the following applies:

2.2.1 The fixed ring at the foundation or at thecrane column is to be bolted at even intervals aroundits circumference.

2.2.2 For bolting of the rotating ring to the loadinggear, uneven bolt intervals may be applied if the safetyof such bolting is verified by calculation or measure-ment.

2.2.3 The distance between the bolts shall in gen-eral not exceed 6 times the bolt diameter.

2.2.4 The requirements for the bolts are as follows:

2.2.4.1 Up to a diameter of ≤ 30 mm, bolts may be preloaded according to the instructions of the slew

ring's manufacturer by applying a torque.

For larger diameters, preloading shall be by hydraulicelongation. This calls for increased thread tolerances.

2.2.4.2 With respect to the materials to be used forthe bolts as well as the proof of their mechanical prop-erties, the requirements in Section 2, F. apply.

2.3 King pins and support rolls

2.3.1 If not safe by design, loading gear is to be

secured against overturning by king pins and supportrolls, also with rolls which engage from below whererequired.

2.3.2 The rotating system shall meet the followingrequirements:

– support rolls shall be installed in a stationary position.

– support rolls and king pins shall be easily acces-sible for maintenance and inspection, supportrolls also for exchange purposes.

– after failure of one support roll, even under load,the loading gear shall still be capable of beingturned into a secure position.

E. Winches

1. Design notes

1.1 Winches shall be of a reversible type, i.e. the

lowering process shall also be motor-controlled.

1.2 Design features incorporated in each winchshall ensure that the load cannot run back inadver-tently (e.g. by a ratchet wheel, self-locking gears, non-return valves, automatic brakes, etc.).

1.3 The use of belts or friction discs to transmit power between the winch drum and the reverse travel prevention device referred to in 1.2 is not allowed.

2. Rope drums

2.1 The drum diameter shall be determined in accord-

ance with the intended purpose of the winch, in accord-ance with Section 8, B.4.3 or a recognized standard.

2.2 Rope drums shall be provided with flangeswhose outer edges extend above the top layer of rope

by at least 2,5 times the rope diameter unless the ropeis prevented from overriding the flange by a spoolingdevice or other means.

It is to be ensured that ropes can wind onto drums properly and without excessive deviation.

2.3 The number of safety-turns left on the ropedrum shall not be less than 3.

2.4 Rope grooves shall comply with the follow-ing requirements:

– groove diameter : ≥ 1,05 ⋅ rope diameter ds

– groove depth : ≥ 0,33 ⋅ rope diameter ds

2.5 In the case of multiple winding, wedges at theflanges shall facilitate the ropes onto the second layer,unless special measures are provided, such as:

– small lateral deflection ≥ 1,5°

– cable guides

– Lebus grooving

2.6 Rope-end attachments at the winch drum areto be designed in such a way that:

– the ropes are not pulled over edges

– the end fastening cannot be released uninten-tionally

– the end fastening is easy to inspect

If the end attachment of wire ropes is based on clamp-ing at least 3 clamping plates are to be used. The con-struction of end attachments for fibre ropes is to be

agreed with GL.For nominal loads up to 12 t and loading gear which isonly occasionally loaded, spliced rope loops can also

be used.

VI - Part 2GL 2012


E



2.7 The following conditions are to be met for the

minimum required rope tension force "Fa" at the drum:

2.7.1 Loading gear in general:

D1a SF F2 eμαγ≥ ⋅⋅

FS = rope tension as per Section 8, B.3.2

γD1 = safety factor for wire ropes as per Section 8,

Table 8.1 (where applicable, Section 8, B.3.3 is to be observed)

μ = coefficient of friction between rope anddrum. Applicable values are:

– smooth drum : μ ≤ 0,08

– grooved drum : μ ≤ 0,10

α = wrap angle. For 3 turns is

α = 6 ⋅ π

2.7.2 Offshore cranes:

Br a

FF

eμα≥

FBr = rope breaking load according to Section 8,

B.3.1.

GL may also demand this rope tension for other load-

ing gear, if this is employed under similar operationalconditions, e.g. for floating cranes operating offshore.

3. Brakes

3.1 Each winch shall be fitted with a braking device

capable of braking and holding the maximum permitted

load safely under all operating conditions and this action

shall not generate inadmissible dynamic influences.

The minimum friction coefficient of the brake is not toexceed 0,3 in the design calculation.

The winch and its substructure shall be able to safely

withstand the forces set up during braking.

3.2 Having regard to the dynamics of the brakingaction, the braking torque must exceed the maximumload torque by an adequate safety margin. As a guide,the maximum braking torque may be set at about 80 %above the maximum load torque.

3.3 The required braking device may take theform of

− self-locking gear

− mechanical brake with brake pads or brake discs

− a hydraulic or pneumatic device which preventslowering of the load, or

− electromotive brake

and shall be actuated when

– the control returns to the neutral position

– a safety device comes into action

– the power supply fails, or – on hydraulic installations, a non-scheduled pres-

sure loss occurs

3.4 Hydraulic retention brakes shall comply withthe following requirements:

– The shut-off valve of hydraulic motors shallactivate at the low-pressure connection in thecase of pressure loss.

– Hydraulic motors shall have a shut-off valve,hydraulic cylinders a valve according to F.2.4, which is to be fitted directly at the high-pressure

connection.

– A hydraulic motor and cylinder shall always befed with a sufficient quantity of working fluid,also the fluid supply in the event of power fail-ure , e.g. by gravity.

– Shut-off valves and valves according to F.2.4 shall be capable of absorbing the pressure impacts caused by braking.

3.5 Electromotive brakes additionally require amechanical holding brake (drum brake or spring-loaded motor brake).

3.6 Braking devices shall be designed in such a

way that on the one hand they may be adjustable, on the

other the designed braking effect cannot easily be inter-fered with. Due to humidity, oils or impurities, brak-ing power shall not decrease below the design value.

Where a gear box is arranged between brake anddrum, the load-bearing components shall be dimen-sioned like the corresponding components of a brake.

Spring-loaded braking pads or discs shall be loaded by pressure springs.

Checking wear to braking pads or discs shall be possible without dismantling the braking unit.

Self-blocking brakes are only admissible for stowageor idle positions.

37 The following requirements apply for off-shore cranes and floating cranes which transport per-sons, operating offshore.

3.7.1 In addition to the normal working brake,hoisting and luffing winches are to be fitted with asecondary brake which is independent in terms ofmechanical and operational layout.

3.7.2 Secondary brakes shall have their own, independent control circuit and at least be dimensioned towithstand loads as per Section 3, B.5.

Chapter 2Page 9–4


E



4. Winch drives

4.1 Power drives

For power drives, the requirements in C. and F.1.4. apply.

4.2 Manual drives

4.2.1 Manual drives shall incorporate the followingfeatures:

– The crank handle turns in the same direction forall gear ratios.

– Crank handles have a crank radius of approxi-mately 350 mm and a rotatable grip sleeve.

– Detachable crank handles are safeguardedagainst being detached unintentionally.

– The load is hauled in manually with a force ofabout 160 N.

– A speed of about 30 rev/min-1 is not exceeded.

4.2.2 Where winches are constructed for both pow-ered and manual operation, the power- and manualsystems shall be mutually interlocked.

5. Couplings

5.1 Clutch couplings between the drive and therope drum are only permitted where one of the meansto prevent runback stipulated in 1.2 has been provided.

5.2 Where winches have more than one disen-gageable drum, only one drum shall be in operation atany time.

5.3 Control levers shall be safeguarded againstunintentional operation.

6. Gearing

6.1 The design of gearing shall conform to estab-

lished engineering practice; location, positioning andmode of operation are to be taken into account.

6.2 Gearing shall, amongst others, include thefollowing characteristics:

– easy access for maintenance

– facilities for checking the oil level

– ventilation- and oil filler pipes appropriate to thelocation

– inspection openings

7. Controls and monitoring instruments

7.1 The controls and monitoring instrumentsshall be clearly arranged on the control platform.

7.2 Controls and monitoring instruments shall be permanently, clearly and intelligibly marked with thedirection or the function of the movements they con-trol, see Section 12, D.2.

7.3 The arrangement and direction of movementof controls and monitoring instruments shall match thedirection of the movement which they control.

7.4 The operating movement range of controllevers shall be less than 300 mm, and when released,they shall return automatically to the neutral position.

7.5 In the case of push-button controls there shall be a separate button for each direction of movement.

F. Hydraulic Systems


1.1 The dimensioning and design of hydraulicsystems shall conform to the established rules of engi-neering practice. Safe operation under all envisagedservice conditions shall be ensured by suitable equip-ment (e.g. filters, coolers, control devices and primary

pressure control) and by selecting an appropriate hy-draulic fluid.

1.2 Hydraulic systems shall be protected againstoverpressure and against overspeed of the load by acorresponding limitation of flow rate and pressure.

1.3 Instead of pipes, high pressure hoses may beused. These shall comply with the requirements of EN13135-2 or an equivalent standard.

The hoses shall be suitable for the proposed operatingfluids, pressures, temperatures, operating and envi-ronmental conditions and be appropriately laid, and ofan approved design.

1.4 For hydraulically-powered winches, a stand-

still brake to prevent slip is required if necessitated bythe construction of the winch.

Any slip occurring shall generally not exceed theequivalent of one revolution of the drum or 1 m hooklowering per minute, whichever is the lesser.

2. Hydraulic cylinders

2.1 Hydraulic cylinders are to be dimensioned for

1,1 × relief pressure pc and dynamic forces which mayoccur in and out of service.

2.2 The relief pressure pc of the safety reliefvalves is to be set at a sufficiently high level, thatdynamic forces which may occur can be absorbed andhoist load coefficients are considered.

VI - Part 2GL 2012


F



2.3 Piston rods shall be sufficiently rigidly con-nected to the piston or telescopic rod, in order to meetthe requirements for calculation given in Section 3,I.2.3.

The stroke of the piston rods shall be limited by endstops which shall be capable of preventing the push-ing-out of the piston rods, even at the utmost pressureand dynamic load. If necessary, devices for terminaldamping or end limitation are to be provided.

2.4 With telescopic cylinders, extending and run-in of the telescopic rods shall be conducted in a speci-fied order. For lifts, synchronous cylinders may beapplied, provided they meet the requirements in EN81-2 or 81-3.

2.5 Load-bearing hydraulic cylinders, e.g. for

lifting, luffing, folding and telescoping of crane boomsas well as for slewing of loading gear, shall be pro-vided with a device which maintains the position ofthe load, the crane boom or the loading gear in theevent of pressure loss and failure of a pipe or hoseline.

Such a device may be an automatic shut-off brakevalve, a pilot-operated check valve, or a load holdingvalve and shall be installed inside or outside directly atthe cylinder.

2.6 Where 2 cylinders are operating in parallel, itshall be ensured that, in the event of failure of one

cylinder, the second is capable of handling the totalload to a sufficient degree of safety.

Safety against failure shall then be verified for loadingcondition III1 as per Section 4, E.2., taking into ac-

count all dynamic forces and the maximum load.

2.7 The type of fastening and the design of the bearings shall safeguard that no unacceptable external bending moments can be transmitted to the hydrauliccylinders.

3. Hydraulic tanks

3.1 Regarding dimensioning of hydraulic tanks,tasks like e.g. cooling (radiation of heat), eliminatingair and depositing contaminants shall be taken intoconsideration. At the same time the container shall beable to accommodate the total amount of oil in thesystem.

3.2 Hydraulic tanks shall be fitted with:

– fluid level indicator (including minimum andmaximum values)

– access opening

– outlet valve

– ventilation

Design, operational and environmental conditions mayin addition require cooling and/or heating of the tanks.

3.3 Pressure tanks shall be capable of withstand-ing a 2-fold maximum working pressure and shall

have a safety valve against overpressure.

G. Protective Measures and Safety Devices

1. Protective measures

1.1 Moving parts, flywheels, rope and chaindrives, rods and other components which might cometo constitute an accident hazard for the handling staffshall be provided with protection against accidentalcontact. The same applies to hot mechanical parts,

pipes and walls not provided with insulation.

1.2 Measures shall be taken to provide powersupply lines with effective protection against me-chanical damage.

1.3 Cranks for starting internal combustion en-gines shall disengage automatically once the enginestarts running.

1.4 Machinery employed in potentially explosiveareas shall comply with the requirements in EN13463-1.

2. Safety devices

2.1 Winches and drive systems shall be equippedwith adjustable protection devices (e.g. pressure reliefvalves, winding and slip clutch thermal overload re-lays). Following a power failure, drives shall not re-start automatically.

2.2 Devices provided to unlock slewing or hoisting

gear are only permissible for special operational purposes

or as emergency measures, e.g. on offshore cranes.

2.3 Safety devices shall not be rendered unserv-

iceable by environmental conditions at the point ofinstallation, because of dirt or springs breaking. Thereshall be a means of checking the devices.

H. Examination of Drawings and Supervision

of Construction

1. Examination of drawings

1.1 The general requirements in Section 1, D.1. are to be observed.

1.2 In addition to the requirements in Section 1,D.4., the mechanical parts listed in Table 9.1 are sub-

ject to examination of drawings within the scope indi-cated there.

Chapter 2Page 9–6


H




2.1 General notes

2.1.1 Mechanical parts shall be manufactured by

staff qualified in handling the installations and devicesnecessary. During manufacture and before delivery the

parts have to undergo the quality tests required in accord-ance with state-of-the-art technology and experience.

2.1.2 All materials shall be suited to the intended purpose. Proof of the mechanical properties of thematerials used is to be furnished. Identification of thematerials shall be possible on the basis of test certifi-cates or reports.

2.1.3 Mechanical parts which require an inspectioncertificate 3.2 according to Table 9.1, are subject tosupervision of construction by GL, with the restric-tions described in the explanations to Table 9.1 whererequired.

2.1.3.1 The GL inspection in charge decides in coor-dination with the manufacturer on type and scope ofsupervision of production and certification, taking thein-house quality control and/or approval for produc-tion into consideration.

2.1.3.2 With respect to assistance by the manufac-turer during supervision of production by GL, therequirements in Section 13, B.2. are to be observed.

2.2 Tests and examinationsThe following requirements contain general test re-quirements, and in addition, provisions for the super-vision of production by GL.

2.2.1 General notes

2.2.1.1 For the acceptance tests before delivery and,if applicable, also for the supervision of production,the GL Surveyor shall be given material test and inter-nal control certificates, test reports and manufacturingdocuments, in particular approved drawings, includingthe relevant examination reports, as a prerequisite for

the tests and examinations described below.2.2.1.2 Test reports shall include the following in-formation, if applicable:

– designation of type and nominal dimensions

– purchase and order number

– drawing number

– results of internal controls

– certificate numbers of material tests and non-destructive tests

– additional details, as necessary

2.2.1.3 For series-production components, other test procedures may be agreed with GL instead of the prescribed ones, if they are accepted to be equivalent.

2.2.1.4 GL reserves the right to extend the scope oftesting, if necessary, and also to subject such compo-nents to a test, for which testing is not expressly re-quired in these Rules.

2.2.1.5 Where mechanical parts are to be used for theintended purpose for the first time, GL may ask for atype approval.

2.2.2 Winches

2.2.2.1 After completion, winches are to be subjectedto an examination and functional test at nominal ropetension by repeated hoisting and lowering of thenominal load. During the functional test, in particularthe brake and safety devices are to be tested and ad-

justed.

2.2.2.2 Where winches are designed for a holding

force greater than the nominal rope tension, the nomi-nal rope tension is to be tested dynamically and theholding force statically.

2.2.2.3 Where winches are designed with a constanttension device, the maintenance of constant tension isto be proven for all levels of tension set by the design.

2.2.2.4 The above tests, including the setting of theoverload protection, can also be performed on board,together with the functional testing of the loadinggear. In this case, a functional test at available load isto be performed at the manufacturer's.

Testing of winches at test load will be performed

within the scope of initial tests of the loading gear, seeSection 13, C3.

2.2.3 Load-bearing hydraulic cylinders

2.2.3.1 Load-bearing or 1st order components arehydraulic cylinders designed for hoisting, luffing,telescoping and slewing.

2.2.3.2 Load-bearing hydraulic cylinders shall un-dergo a functional test at relief pressure and a pressuretest at test pressure. The test pressure shall be 1,5times relief pressure pc, however with relief pressures

over 200 bar, it need not be higher than pc + 100 bar.

2.2.3.3 With reference to F.2.5, in the case of series- production of loading gear of the same type and withmultiple cylinders, e.g. with slewing cranes with luff-ing, folding and/or telescopic crane booms, a regularcheck on the cylinders at a minimum of 1,25 times therelief pressure may be accepted.

The GL Surveyor is entitled to ask for cylinders to betested which are selected at random, in accordancewith 2.2.3.2.

2.2.4 Large roller bearings

2.2.4.1 The material properties of forged rings shall be

tested according to the GL Rules for Materials by tensile

tests and by notched-bar impact tests and shall comply

with the requirements in the agreed specification.

VI - Part 2GL 2012


H



The manufacturer shall, in addition, ultrasonically testthe rings for internal defects and certify that the mate-rials are free from defects which may impair the per-formance characteristics.

2.2.4.2 Rings shall be heat-treated as appropriate tothe material, and the running surfaces are to be hard-ened additionally. After hardening, the runway sur-faces of the rings shall be crack-tested along theirentire length.

Cracks may be removed by grinding, if by this meas-ure the functional capability of the slewing ring is notimpaired. Residual cracks are not permitted. The GLSurveyor may demand the crack test be performed inhis presence.

2.2.4.3 The hardened runways are to undergo a hard-ness test at least 8 points equally distributed along the

circumference. The hardness values shall be within thespecified range.

Where there are reasonable doubts about the hardeneddepth, proof shall be furnished using specimens whichhave been hardened under the same conditions as thering under consideration.

2.2.4.4 For the acceptance test before delivery, thelarge roller bearing shall be assembled and presentedto the GL Surveyor. The functional capability (slew-ing without load), the bearing clearance and the accu-racy in plane and round travelling are thereby to betested. In addition, the dimensions shall be checked

randomly, as deemed necessary by the Surveyor.

2.2.5 Bolts and nuts for large roller bearings

With respect to tests and examinations of bolts andnuts, the GL Rules for metallic materials, see Section1, B.2.1.2 a pply.

2.2.6 Mechanical and hydromechanical parts

2.2.6.1 With respect to tests and examinations ofmechanical and hydromechanical parts, the Guidelinesstated in Section 1, B.2.1.4 apply, where relevant.

Parts not covered by Guidelines shall be tested andexamined using appropriate procedures agreed withthe GL Surveyor.

2.2.6.2 Instead of testing at the manufacturer's, testscan also be performed on board within the scope ofinitial tests of the loading gear, if practicable.

I. Documentation

1. Marking

1.1 Each mechanical part shall be marked by themanufacturer in a suitable way. The marking shall atleast include the following, if applicable:



– designation of type

– purchase order number or serial number – characteristics such as nominal load, nominal

pressure, nominal voltage, etc.


1.2 If, after the acceptance test before delivery,the requirements for issuing a test certificate of FormF132, F190, F208 are complied with, the tested me-chanical part will be stamped in a prominent position.

The stamp shall include the following information:

– certificate number, together with the code letters

of the examining inspecting office – stamp with the month and year of testing

for hydraulic cylinders additionally:

– working pressure

– testing pressure

for winches additionally:

– rope tension [kN]

– holding force [kN]

for slewing gear rings additionally:

– abbreviation for the material type

– melting charge number

– specimen number

1.3 The winding direction of ropes on rope drumsshall be clearly recognizable on the drums.

Where required, the winding direction shall be indi-cated appropriately on the drum or winch.

2. Certificates

2.1 Table 9.1 shows the required types of certifi-cates for essential mechanical parts.

The loading gear manufacturer shall order the stated parts together with the required certificates, the partsmanufacturer shall include them in the delivery.

2.2 The inspection certificate 3.2 shall be issued by GL. The GL Surveyor uses the following forms:

– hydraulic cylinders F132

– winches F180

– all others F208.

2.3 The certificates listed in Table 9.1 are not part of the loading gear documentation on board.

Chapter 2Page 9–8


I



Table 9.1 Examination of drawings and certification of mechanical parts

Loading gear in general 5 Offshore cranes Classified loading gear

Components Examination

of drawingsCertificate

Examination


Examination


Winch drum Z − Ζ − Ζ −

Winch mounting Z − Ζ − Ζ −

Winch, complete unit I 2.2 Z 3.2 1 Z 3.2 1

Hydraulic cylinder,

load-bearingZ 3.2 Z 3.2 Z 3.2

Large roller bearings Z 3.2 2 Z 3.2 2 Z 3.2

≤ M52 I 2.2 I 3.1 I 3.1Bolts and nuts

for large roller

bearings > M52 I 3.1 I 3.1 I 3.2

King pin/support rolls Z 2.2 Z 3.1 Z 3.2

Slewing gear, complete

unit

I 2.2 Z 3.1 Z 3.2

Cylinder Z 2.2 Z 3.1 Z 3.2Slewing gear

Rack bar Z 2.2 Z 3.1 Z 3.2

Luffing gear

(Cylinder/spindle)Z 3.2 Z 3.2 Z 3.2

Travelling gear, complete

unitZ 2.2 − − Z 3.1

Main drive (diesel) − 2.2 I 3.1 I 3.1

≤ 50 kW − 2.2 I 2.2 Z 3.1Hydromotors

and pumps > 50 kW − 2.2 Z 3.1 Z 3.2

≤ 40 bar

≤ 32 DN

− − I 2.2 I 2.2

Pressure lines> 40 bar

> 32 DN− − I 2.2 I 3.1 3

Safety valves against

pressure lossI 2.2 I 2.2 I 2.2

Hydraulic hose lines − 2.2 I 3.2 4 I 3.2 4

Hydraulic fittings − 2.2 I 2.2 I 2.2

Ventilators/heat exchangers − 2.2 I 3.1 Z 3.2

Sheaves I 2.2 I 3.1 Z 3.2

Swell compensators − − Z 3.2 Ζ 3.2

Damping devices − − Z 3.2 Ζ 3.2

Explanations:

− The column "Loading gear in general" may also be applied to loose gear as and where relevant

− "Z" means drawings and calculations

− "I" means documents for information

− The designation of the certificate types corresponds to EN 10204. The numbers mean the following certificates:

− 2.2 : test report (GL designation: C-type Certificate)

− 3.1 and 3.2 : inspection certificates (GL designation: B- and A-type Certificate)

1 At the manufacturer's at least 1 functional test is required, see H.2.2.2.4

2 Certificate of type 3.1, if the manufacturer is approved by GL

3 The certificate shall confirm the performance of a pressure test at 1,5 times the nominal pressure

4 Certificate of type 3.1, if the manufacturers of both, the hose as well as the hose line are approved by GL and proof is furnished of a pressure test at 2 times the nominal pressure

5 Includes offshore working cranes on wind energy plants

VI - Part 2GL 2012


I





Section 10

Electrical Equipment

A. General

1. General notes

1.1 This Section contains the requirements forelectrical equipment for loading gear and, where ap-

plicable, also loose gear.

1.2 Additional or more comprehensive require-ments, e.g. for switch cabinets and for electrical

equipment not covered hereafter can be taken from thefollowing:

– GL Rules for Classification and Construction, andGL Guidelines, see Section 1, B.2.1

– recognized standards and regulations where appli-cable to loading gear, unless contrary to the re-quirements in this Section.

1.3 The requirements in Section 1 are to be ob-served where relevant.

2. Scope of application

2.1 Table 10.1 is a list of the essential electricalequipment which is subject to examination of draw-ings as deemed necessary by GL, and which is to bedelivered together with test reports or inspection cer-tificates.

2.2 The requirement for an examination of draw-ings and the type of certificate depend on the safetyrelevance of the equipment, with respect to its suitabil-ity and reliability, and on the operational mode and/orthe type of certification of the loading gear.

2.3 In case of founded exceptions also the approval and certification of electrical equipment notlisted in Table 10.1 can be required if they are exceed-ingly relevant for the safety and/or reliable function ofthe loading gear.

3. Deviating designs

3.1 Designs differing from the requirementswhich follow may be approved if examined by GL fortheir suitability and deemed equivalent.

3.2 Electrical equipment developed on the basis

of novel technical concepts but not yet sufficiently proven, requires particular approval by GL. Suchequipment may be subjected to more stringent super-vision, if the prerequisites as per 3.1 are not fulfilled.

3.3 In the cases mentioned in 3.1 and 3.2, GL isentitled to demand presentation of additional docu-mentation and performance of special trials.

3.4 GL reserves the right to impose additionalrequirements for all kinds of electrical equipment,should this be necessary on account of new findings oroperational experience.

B. Design Criteria and Operational Require-ments

1. The electrical control and switch gear, as wellas the motors, shall be designed or arranged in such away that necessary maintenance of contacts, contac-tors, collectors, slip rings, brakes etc. can be carriedout with means available on board.

2. Switch and control cabinets as well as motorsarranged on deck are to be provided with adequateheating for the standstill condition, if sufficient inter-

nal space is available.

3. When choosing electrical equipment, theexpected environmental conditions such as humidity,heat, cold and vibrations shall receive special consid-eration. In addition, the following applies:

3.1 In general, acceleration of 0,7 g in the fre-quency range from 13 to 100 Hz shall also be takeninto account as regards design and mounting.

3.2 Plug-in cards with electronic controls mayhave to have extra fastenings.

4. Where special circuits for lighting, standstillheating, etc. are fed through separate power supplyswitches so that they can also be operated when themain supply to the loading gear is switched off, spe-cial measures shall be taken in the switchgear to pre-vent direct contact with live parts. A double feed is to

be indicated by labels.

5. For supply lines fixed laid to shipborne load-ing gear, including the external fixed cabling, marinecable is to be used, as per GL Rules for ElectricalInstallations, see Section 1, B.2.1.1.

6. An adequate power supply shall be providedon board or, if applicable, onshore. Onshore powersupply is to be adapted to the supply system onboard.

VI - Part 2GL 2012

Section 10 Electrical Equipment Chapter 2Page 10–1

B



C. Drives and Brakes

1. Driving power

1.1 All motors are to be dimensioned in accor-dance with their envisaged purpose and expected use.

1.2 In the case of shipborne loading gear, theworking speeds laid down for the nominal load shall

be maintained, also at the vessel's prescribed mini-mum inclinations.

1.3 The required power for winches is calculatedfrom the rated pull, and the rated rope speed, of thefirst layer of rope on the drum, taking gearing effi-ciency into account.

2. Winch drives

For winch drives, the following operating modes Si

are defined:

2.1 For drives up to about 5 t L Ne started very

frequently (about 160-400 starts per hour) with shortload travel and lifting periods: duty type S5, i.e. in-termittent periodic duty with electric braking, with thestarting process and electrical braking influencing theheating-up of the motor.

2.2 For drives with long load travel and lifting

periods and less frequent starts (up to about 160 starts per hour): duty type S3, i.e. intermittent periodic dutywithout the starting and braking processes having anynoticeable effect on the heating-up of the motor.

2.3 For heavy loads with prolonged load han-dling and lengthy intervals: duty type S2, i.e. short-time duty with an ensuing interval long enough for thedriving motor to cool down approximately to the am-

bient temperature. Preferred duration of duty is 30min.

2.4 In the case of hydraulic drives, the electric

motors driving the pumps are to be matched to thegiven conditions. Possible operating modes are S1(continuous running) or S6 (continuous operation

periodic duty). In the case of mode S6, particularregard has to be paid to the mode of operation of thehydraulic unit, e.g. the power required during idling.

2.5 The driving motors are to be capable of run-ning-up at least 1.3 times against the rated torque.

When designing the motors, the moment of inertia ofthe gearing is to be taken into account. The moment ofinertia of the driven masses shall be based on an iner-tia factor FJ of at least 1.2.

2.6 The duty types S1 to S3, S5 and S6 are de-fined in IEC 60034-1. In addition the following ap-

plies:

2.6.1 When operating in type S5, at least 160 starts per hour shall be possible. This is based on the as-sumption that 50 % of the starts will be without load.

2.6.2 Where the requirements are more stringent

than 2.6.1, the drives shall be designed for 240, 320 or400 starts per hour.

2.7 For operating modes S5 and S3, differingduty times shall be assumed, depending on the serviceconditions. For the operating steps, a total operating

period of 25 % of the overall total is to be considered.In addition the following applies:

2.7.1 In the case of more stringent requirementsthan in 2.7 (shorter intervals between the separate

hoisting operations), duty times of 40 %, 60 % or 75 %

shall be chosen.

2.7.2 In the case of pole changing motors, whereall the speed steps are designed for the rated load andwhere generally the top speed step is reached byswitching through the individual lower steps, theoverall operating period is to be shared out between

the individual switching steps.

2.7.3 If one of the speed steps is intended for light-hook operation only, the overall operating periodapplies only to the operating steps. However, the lighthook step shall be designed for at least 15 % of the

overall operating period.

3. Brakes

3.1 The frequency of operation of the brakesshall correspond to that of the associated motor. It isassumed that when operating, braking will only ever

be effected from a low-speed step.

The braking equipment shall function automaticallyand arrest the load with the minimum possible impact.

3.2 Winches shall, as a matter of principle, be

equipped with safety brakes which brake the loadsafely at any speed if the power supply fails.

D. Cables and Lines

1. Supply line

1.1 As a matter of principle, power is to be supplied via suitable cables, possibly using cable trolleysor cable drums with integral slip rings.

All cables and lines shall be flame-resistant and self-extinguishing. Furthermore, all cables shall be ap-

proved by GL, possibly UV-radiation resistant and,where hydraulic systems are concerned, oil resistant.


Section 10 Electrical Equipment VI - Part 2GL 2012

D



1.2 Devices, e.g. cable drums, introduced to prevent the lines dragging on the floor during opera-tion, shall be designed in such a way that the inner

bend radius of the cables does not remain under thefollowing values unless otherwise stated by the cable

maker:

– in the case of cables with an external diameterup to 21,5 mm: 5 times the cable diameter

– in the case of cables with an external diameterexceeding 21,5 mm: 6,25 times the cable diame-ter

2. Wire cross-sections

2.1 Dimensioning shall take the load into ac-count, possibly giving consideration to an utilisation

factor and the expected ambient temperature.

2.2 For loading gear with only one driving motor, particularly with electro-hydraulic drive systems, the power supply is to be dimensioned as appropriate tothe rated current at the maximum operating stage, forcontinuous operation.

2.3 For loading gear with several motors, forcalculation of the amperage, 100 % of the power ofthe hoisting unit motor, plus 50 % of the power of allremaining drives, may be used as a basis. The amper-age resulting is to be applied as the continuous opera-

tion value.

These values also apply to the dimensioning of slipring bodies and brushes.

3. Laying of cables

3.1 General notes

3.1.1 Fastening for cables shall measure up to thevibrations expected during loading gear operation.

3.1.2 Cables suspended from cable trays or runningvertically shall, if secured by means of plastic straps,as a matter of principle also be fastened in this areawith corrosion-resistant metal clips or metal straps atintervals of at least 1 m where they pass from one trayto another.

3.1.3 Openings for passing through cables shall bedeburred and lined so that the cable sheathing cannot

be damaged by sharp edges.

3.1.4 Leakage of hydraulic oil into control cabi-nets, switchgear and cable boxes is to be avoided;therefore wherever practicable, cables are to be intro-

duced into the boxes or cabinets from below. Wherethey are introduced from above, they may have to beadditionally sealed in areas exposed to the risk of oilleakage in an appropriate way.

3.2 Cable trays

3.2.1 Cables shall be laid on adequately strong,corrosion-resistant cable trays. Exceptions to this are

possible when laying single cables, e.g. to light fit-

tings.

3.2.2 Cable trays are to be arranged so that hydrau-lic oil from hydraulic systems cannot drip onto thecables. Where this is not possible, oil guards shall be

provided.

3.3 Cable bundles

3.3.1 In slewing cranes or in swing cranes with alimited slewing range, all circuits/supply lines may beled in via flexible cable bundles, suitably arranged inthe rotational centre of the crane column.

3.3.2 Suspended cable bundles shall be appropri-ately led at both ends over curved cable trays with aradius of curvature not less than 10 times that ofthe thickest cable, and fastened there in such away that the weight of the bundle is distributed asevenly as possible over all the cables, depending ontheir size.

3.3.3 Cable bundles shall not strike or rub againstanything during slewing and in the event of movement

of the loading gear, loading gear parts, or the ship.

4. Cable drums and cable trolley trays

4.1 Drum-wound cables are to be dimensioned insuch a way that, even with the cable fully wound onand under normal operating power load, the cable doesnot heat up beyond its permitted limit.

4.2 For cable trolleys, minimum bend radii are asfollows:

– cable up to 8 mm outside diameter:

3 times the conductor diameter

– cable up to 12,5 mm outside diameter:


– cable over 12,5 mm outside radii:


4.3 In the case of flat cables, the thickness of thecable corresponds to the outside diameter of roundcables.

VI - Part 2GL 2012


D



E. Switches

1. Crane main switches /crane circuitbreakers

1.1 Loading gear shall be fitted with a manuallyoperated circuit breaking device, with which allmovement can be stopped. It shall be possible to iso-late all the electric equipment from the mains usingthe circuit breaking device. The circuit breaking ca-

pacity shall be sufficient to switch off simultaneously both the power of the largest motor when stalled andthe total power of all other consumers in normal op-eration.

The "OFF"-position shall be capable of being locked.The OFF position shall only be indicated after having

reached the prescribed air and creepage distances.The circuit breaking device shall only have one "on"and "off" position with dedicated arresters.

1.2 A circuit breaking device may also be used asa load switch if it permits the maximum short-circuit

power to be switched off safely. Dimensioning is to be carried out in accordance with IEC Publication60947-4-1 "Type 2".

1.3 In the case of electro-hydraulic loading gear,the load switch shall also switch off power to the hy-draulic pump motor(s).

2. Limit switches

2.1 The control circuits of the safety limitswitches shall be designed on the closed-circuit cur-rent principle, or shall be self-regulating.

2.2 In the case of automated, or programme-controlled motion processes (including use of micro-

processor systems), the continued safe functioningof movement limitation systems is to be ensured,even in the event of a fault or malfunction in the com-

puter.

This may be achieved by using separate control ele-ments or additional, main frame independent, elec-tronic units, insofar as these have been approved byGL, and the switching has been qualified as "safe" byGL as regards its safety aspect (fault elimination as-sessment).

2.3 In programme-controlled movement proc-esses, limit switches may not be used for operationalspeed or movement measurement.

2.4 Where the hazard analysis has shown that asecond movement limiter is to be provided, failureof the first limiter is to be indicated to the cranedriver.

F. Protective Measures and Safety Devices

1. Protective measures

1.1 In general, the operating voltage for motordrives should not exceed 690 volts and for controls,heating and lighting systems, 250 volts. Insulationshall be all-pole.

1.2 All equipment with a working voltage ex-ceeding 50 volts, connected via movable cable, shall

be earthed via a protective conductor inside the cable.The following shall be observed:

1.2.1 For cable cross-sections up to 16 mm2, itscross-section shall match that of the main conductors;for those exceeding 16 mm

2, it shall be at least half

that of the main conductors.

1.2.2 If power is supplied via slip rings, the protec-tive conductor shall be provided with a separate slipring.

1.3 Any non-earthed conductor is to be providedwith overload and short-circuit protection in accor-dance with GL Rules for Electrical Installations (I-1-3), see Section 1, B.2.1.1.

1.4 For motors, monitoring of the winding temperatures is recommended as protection against inad-missible heating. If the admissible temperature or loadis exceeded, power shall be switched off. Switch-offdue to thermal overload should be indicated. Loweringof the load shall be still possible after the electric drivehas been switched off due to overheating.

1.5 Switches, switchgear and control cabinetsshall be located in such a way that work on them, andoperational tests, can be performed safely. For ar-rangements inside the crane column, gratings or plat-forms are to be provided.

1.6 The service passage in front of switchgearand control cabinets shall not be less than 0,5 m widewith 1,80 m headroom. If this headroom cannot bemaintained, it may be reduced to 1,40 m if the passageis at least 0,7 m wide.

1.7 As a minimum, the following protectivesystems (contact-, foreign body- and water protection)shall be provided:

1.7.1 For electrical installations below deck or inthe enclosed spaces of loading gear, the protectivesystem shall be at least IP 44, in dry spaces at least IP20.

1.7.2 For electrical installations on deck, the pro-tective system shall be at least IP 56; under certaincircumstances, e.g. where there is a heightened risk ofdust, even IP 66.



F









turing documents, in particular approved drawings,including the allocated examination reports, if re-quired acc. to Table 10.1, as a prerequisite for the testsand examinations described below.

2.2.1.2 Test reports shall include the following in-formation, if applicable:

– designation of type and nominal dimensions

– purchase and order number

– drawing number

– results of internal controls

– certificate numbers of material tests and non-destructive tests


2.2.1.3 For series-production electrical equipment,

other test procedures may be agreed with GL instead of the prescribed ones, if they are accepted as equivalent.

2.2.1.4 Where electrical equipment is to be used forthe intended purpose for the first time, GL may ask fora type approval.

2.2.2 Electrical equipment

Electrical equipment is to be tested according to GLRules for Electrical Installations (I-1-3), Section 20 and to undergo a functional test, if possible.

H. Documentation

1. Marking

1.1 Any electrical equipment shall be marked by

the manufacturer in a suitable way. The marking shall at least include the following information, if applicable:



– designation of type

– purchase

order number or serial number

– characteristics such as nominal speed, nominalvoltage, etc.


1.2 If after the acceptance test, and before deliv-ery, the requirements for issuing a test certificate FormF 208 are complied with, the electrical equipment will

be stamped in a prominent position.

The stamp shall include the following information:

– certificate number, together with the code lettersof the examining inspecting office

– stamp3with the month and year of testing

2. Certificates

2.1 Table 10.1 shows the required types of cer-tificate for essential electrical equipment.

The loading gear manufacturer shall order the statedequipment, together with the required certificates, andthe equipment manufacturer shall include them in thedelivery.

2.2 The inspection certificate 3.2 shall be issued by

GL. The GL Surveyor uses GL Form F 208 for this.

2.3 The certificates listed in Table 10.1 are not part of the loading gear documentation on board.



H






Table 10.1 Examination of drawings and certification of electrical equipment

Loading gear in general 3 Offshore cranes Classified loading gear

EquipmentExamination

of drawings Certificate

Examination


Examination


≤ 50 kW − − − 2.2 − 2.2Motors

> 50 kW − − Z 3.1 Z 3.2

≤ 50 kW − − − 2.2 − 2.2Frequency

converter > 50 kW − − Ζ 3.1 Z 3.2

Brake ventilators − − − 2.2 − 2.2

Slip rings − − I 3.1 I 3.2

PLC - controlsGL

type approval3.1

GL

type approval3.1

GL

type approval3.1

Emergency

shut-down,

limit switch,

load

measuring

devices,overspeed,

etc.

− − I 2.2 I 3.1

Safety

devices

AOPS/MOPS

/ELRS

AHC/PHC

ART/PRT 1

− − GL

type approval3.1

GL

type approval3.1

Radio controls 2 GL

type approval3.1

GL

type approval3.1

GL

type approval3.1

Switch cabinets − − Z 3.1 Z 3.2

Control consoles − − Z 3.1 Z 3.2

Cables and lines − − − 2.1 − 2.1

Explanations:

− "Z" means drawings

− "I" means documents for information

−The designation of the certificate types corresponds to EN 10204. The numbers mean the following certificates:

− 2.1 and 2.2 : test reports (GL designation for 2.2: C-type Certificate)

– 3.1 and 3.2 : inspection certificates (GL designation: B- and A-type Certificate)

1 AOPS / MOPS = automatic/manual overload protection system

ELRS = emergency load release system

AHC /PHC = active/passive heave compensator

ART / PRT = active/passive rope tension

2 Requires a manual emergency control

3 Includes offshore working cranes on wind energy plants

VI - Part 2GL 2012


H





Section 11

Construction of Steel Components

A. General

1. This Section contains requirements for theconstruction of steel components for loading gear andloose gear with a special focus on welding.

2. Complementary or more comprehensiverequirements and special details are to be taken fromthe following:

GL Rules for Hull Structures (see Section 1,B.2.1.1)

GL Rules for Welding (see Section 1, B.2.1.2)

recognized standards or regulations

3. The requirements in Section 1 are to be ob-served where relevant.

4. With respect to materials to be used, the re-quirements in Section 2 apply.

B. Requirements applied to Manufacturers


1.1 Manufacturers shall be equipped with instal-lations and devices suitable for professional and

proper handling of the individual materials, manufac-turing methods, components, etc.

GL reserves the right to check the production shop in

this respect and to impose requirements concerningthis matter, or to reduce the scale of operations ac-cording to the capabilities of the production shop.

1.2 The manufacturer shall have a sufficientlyqualified staff of experts. The supervising and control-ling personnel is to be indicated to GL, including theirareas of responsibility. GL reserves the right to ask forcertified proof of qualifications.

2. Quality control

2.1 By means of an effective internal quality

control, the manufacturing works shall ensure thatconstruction and assembly comply with these Rules,the approved documents (drawings, specifications,etc.) or with the conditions stated in the approvals.

2.2 It is the responsibility of the manufacturingworks to observe these Rules and to meet the specialrequirements associated with the examination ofdocuments or the conditions imposed with the ap-

proval. Examinations carried out by GL do not releasethe manufacturing works from this responsibility.

2.3 It is the responsibility of the manufacturingworks to make sure that production conditions andquality correspond to those of the approval test. GL

cannot take any responsibility that products complywith these Rules which have been tested in an ap-

proval test or at random during production, in all partsor during the entire production process.

2.4 GL may reject further use of products, proc-esses, etc. which have proved unsatisfactory duringapplication, in spite of an earlier satisfactory approvaltest, and may demand they be improved, including

proper verification.

3. Workmanship

3.1 Details in the production documents

3.1.1 The production documents (workshop draw-ings, etc.) shall include all those details which areessential for quality and functional capability of thecomponent under consideration. This includes – be-sides dimensions – e.g. details on tolerances, surfacefinish quality (reworking), special production proc-esses, as well as tests and requirements as appropriate.

3.1.2 All the important details of the welding, e.g.the types of base material, configuration and dimen-sions of the welds, welding method, welding consum-

ables, heat treatment, tests to be performed and anyspecial requirements imposed, shall be indicated in the production documents (drawings, parts lists, etc.). Inspecial cases, GL may require submission of a weld-ing schedule.

3.1.3 Where quality or functional capability of acomponent is not assured or dubious, GL may ask forsuitable improvements. This also applies, as andwhere relevant, to complementary or additional (e.g.strengthening) components, even if these were notrequired for the examination of drawings, or were notrequired due to poorly detailed presentation.

3.2 Cut-outs, edges of plates

3.2.1 Openings, boreholes and other cut-outs shall be rounded with a sufficiently large radius.

VI - Part 2GL 2012

Section 11 Construction of Steel Components Chapter 2Page 11–1

B







2.1.2 Welded joints and welding sequences shall be designed to minimize residual weld stresses and avoid excessive deformation. Welded joints shall therefore not be over-dimensioned.

2.1.3 All welded connections are to be configuredto achieve a power flow as undisturbed as possiblewithout major internal or external notches or rapidchanges of rigidity, and without impeding expansion.

2.1.4 The requirements in 2.1.3 apply as and whererelevant to the welding of secondary components on

primary structures too, the highly stressed areas ofwhich and the exposed plate or flange edges of whichshall be kept free from notches caused by welded

joints, if possible.

2.1.5 Welded joints shall be designed to ensure that the proposed weld type and quality (e.g. complete root fusion in the case of single- and double-bevel

butt welds) can be satisfactorily achieved under the given fabricating conditions. Failing this, provision shall be made for welds which are easy to execute, and their (possibly inferior) load-bearing capacity shall be allowed for when dimensioning the welds.

2.1.6 Welded joints in girders and profiles (espe-cially field joints) shall not, if possible, be located inan area of high stresses. Welded joints on flanges withcold formed bending positions shall be avoided.

2.1.7 Highly stressed welded joints, which aretherefore normally subject to compulsory inspection,shall be designed to facilitate application of the mostappropriate inspection technique (radiography, ultra-sonic or surface crack inspection, possibly in combi-nation) so that tests offering reliable results can becarried out.

2.2 Welded nodes in tubular structures

2.2.1 Depending on tube wall thickness and angleof intersection, nodes linking relatively small tubes,e.g. in tubular-frame crane jibs, may be designed ei-

ther in the form of fillet welds or of single-bevel weldsas in D.2.4.

2.2.2 The nodes of relatively large tubes, where thewall thickness of the branches exceeds about 8mm,shall be designed in the form of full-penetration single

bevel welds as shown in Fig. 11.1. Where the stress islower, single-bevel welds with a backing strip as inD.2.4 may also be used.

2.2.3 The weld configuration chosen and the effec-tive weld thickness shall be taken into account in thedimensioning (especially in the proof of fatigue

strength) and shown in detail on the drawings. Where proof of fatigue strength is required, the quality ofsurface finish required shall also be specified on thedrawings.

2.3 Transitions between differing dimensions

2.3.1 Differing dimensions are to be made to matchgradually by means of gentle transitions. Where gird-ers or sections have web plates of different heights,the chords or bulbs shall be brought to the same height

by tapering, or by slitting and splaying or reducing theheight of the web plate. The transition length shall bethree times the difference in height.

2.3.2 Where the joint is between plates of differingthicknesses, thickness differences of more than 3 mm(see Fig. 11.2) shall be evened out by bevelling theextending edge with a 1:3 slope, or in accordance withthe notch. Thickness differences of less than 3 mmmay be evened out within the weld.

2.3.3 For connection to plates or other relativelythin-walled elements, steel castings and forgings, asshown in Fig. 11.3, shall be provided with matchingtapered elements or cast, or forged-on welding flanges

respectively.

2.4 Localised closely grouped welds, minimumspacing

2.4.1 Local close grouping of welds and short dis-tances between welds are to be avoided. Adjacent butt

welds shall be separated by at least

50 mm + 4 × plate thickness

Fillet welds shall be separated from each other andfrom butt welds by at least

30 mm + 2 × plate thickness

2.4.2 The width of plate areas (strips) subject toreplacement shall however be at least 300 mm or 10 x

plate thickness, whichever is the greater.

2.4.3 Reinforcing plates, welding flanges, hubs orsimilar components welded into plating shall have thefollowing minimum dimensions:

Dmin = 170 + 3 (t – 10) ≥ 170 mm

Dmin = minimum diameter of round, or length of side

of polygonal, weld-on parts [mm]

t = plate thickness [mm]

The corner radii of polygonal weld-on parts shall be atleast 50 mm.


Section 11 Construction of Steel Components VI - Part 2GL 2012

C





2.6.3 Doubling-plates are to be welded along their(longitudinal) edges by continuous fillet welds with athickness

a = 0,3 × thickness t of the doubling-plate

At the ends of doubling plates, as shown in Fig. 11.5,thickness "a" along the terminal edges shall be

a = 0,5 × thickness t of the doubling plate

though it shall not exceed the plate thickness.

The weld transition angles between the terminal edgeand the plating shall be 45° or less.

Fig. 11.5 Weldings at the ends of doublingplates

Where proof of fatigue strength is required, the con-figuration of the end of the doubling plate shall corre-spond with the detail category selected.

2.7 Welding in cold-formed areas

2.7.1 Welding is permitted at and close to struc-tural areas cold-formed from ship structural andcomparable structural steels, provided that the mini-mum bending radii specified in Table 11.1 are ad-hered-to.

Table 11.1 Minimum bending radii

Plate thickness Minimum inner 1 bending radius

up to 4 mm

up to 8 mm

up to 12 mm

up to 24 mm

over 24 mm

up to 70 mm

1 × plate thickness

1,5 × plate thickness




1 Edge bending operations may necessitate a larger bendingradius.

2.7.2 For steels other than stated in 2.7.1, or othermaterials if applicable, the necessary minimum bend-ing radius shall, in case of doubt, be determined bytests.

2.7.3 In the case of steels with a minimum nomi-

nal upper yield point exceeding 355 N/mm2 and platethicknesses of 30 mm and over, where cold-formingwith 3 % or more permanent elongation has been

performed, proof of adequate toughness after welding

is required in the procedure test and by means of in- production tests.

2.8 Bend reinforcements

2.8.1 Bent structural elements, e.g. the chords ofgirders, where the change of direction means thatforces are generated or have to be transmitted per-

pendicular to the bend, shall be adequately supportedat the bending location. The conditions set out in2.7.1 shall be complied with.

2.8.2 Where welded joints at bending locationscannot be avoided, three-plate welds generally as inD.2.6 may be used. Such connections are to be de-

picted in detail on the drawings.

D. Types of Welds

The chosen type of weld shall be suitable and suffi-ciently dimensioned or favourably designed to trans-fer the type (static, dynamic) and magnitude offorces.

1. Butt joints

1.1 Depending on plate thickness, welding pro-cedure and -position, butt welds shall take the form ofsquare, single- or double-V welds (X welds) in con-formity with the standards (e.g. EN 12345, EN 22553/ ISO 2553, EN ISO 9692-1, -2, -3 or -4).

1.2 Where other forms of weld are envisaged,these are to be depicted specially in the drawings.Weld geometries for special welding processes (e.g.submerged-arc, single-side and electro-gas or electro-slag welding) shall have been tested and approved as

part of a procedure test.

1.3 Butt welds shall, as a matter of principle, begrooved out on the root side and given at least onecapping pass. Exceptions to this rule, e.g. in the caseof submerged-arc welding or the aforementioned

processes also require to be tested and approved as part of a procedure test.

The theoretical throat shall be the thickness of the plate or, where the plates are of differing thickness,the lesser thickness. Where proof of fatigue strengthis required, the detail category depends on the con-figuration (quality) of the weld.

1.4 If the above conditions cannot be fulfilled,e.g. where welds are accessible from one side only,open square-edge joints with back-up bars or perma-



D



nent machined or integrally cast backing, as in Fig.11.6, shall be used.

The calculated weld thickness may be taken as 90 %of the (lesser) plate thickness t, maximum (t-1) mm.Where proof of fatigue strength is required, thesewelds shall be placed in detail category K3.

Fig. 11.6 Single-side welds with permanentweld pool supports (backings)

2. Corner-, T- and double-T- (cross) welds

2.1 Full-penetration corner-, T- and double-T-(cross) welds for the full connection to the abutting

plates shall take the form of single- or double-bevel joints with the minimum possible shoulder and anadequate gap, as shown in Fig. 11.7. The root shall begrooved out and welded from the reverse side.

Fig. 11.7 Single- and double-bevel weldswith full root penetration

The theoretical weld thickness shall be the thicknessof the abutting plate. Where proof of fatigue strengthis required, the detail category depends on the con-figuration (quality) of the weld.

2.2 Corner-, T- and double-T- (cross) weldswith a defined root defect f as shown in Fig. 11.8shall take the form of single- or double-bevel weldsas described in 2.1, with reverse-side welding butwithout grooving-out of the root.

Fig. 11.8 Single- and double-bevel welds withdefined incomplete root penetration

The theoretical weld thickness may be taken as thethickness t of the abutting plate minus f, being equalto 0,2 t up to a maximum of 3 mm. Where proof offatigue strength is required, these welds shall be

placed in detail category K3.

2.3 Corner-, T- and double-T- (cross) weldswith an unwelded root face c and a defined incom-

plete root penetration f to be taken into considerationshall take the general form shown in Fig. 11.9.

Fig. 11.9 Single- and double bevel welds withan unwelded root face and a definedincomplete root penetration

The theoretical weld thickness shall be the thickness tof the abutting plate minus (c + f), f being equal to0,2 t up to a maximum of 3 mm. Where proof offatigue strength is required, these welds shall be

placed in detail category K4.

2.4 Corner-, T- and double-T- (cross) weldsaccessible from one side only may, as shown in Fig.11.10, be made either as butt joints with a weld poolsupport analogous to those described in 1.4, or asone-sided single-bevel welds analogous to those in2.2.

Fig. 11.10 Single-side welded T joints

The theoretical weld thickness shall similarly bedetermined in accordance with 1.4 or 2.2. Where

proof of fatigue strength is required, use of thesewelds shall be avoided if possible.

2.5 In the case of flush corner joints, i.e. where

neither of the plates projects, joint configurations asshown in Fig. 11.11 shall be used with bevelling ofthe plates shown as upright, to avoid the danger oflamellar rupture (stepwise cracking)

VI - Part 2GL 2012


D



Fig. 11.11 Flush fitted corner joints

2.6 Where in T-joints the main stress acts in the plane of the plates shown in the horizontal position inFig. 11.12 (e.g. in plating) and the connection of thevertical (edge-on) plates is of secondary importance,then (except in the case of mainly dynamic stresses)three-plate welds as shown in Fig. 11.12 may beused.

The theoretical weld thickness of the joint connectingthe horizontal plates shall be determined in accor-dance with 1.3. The required "a" dimension is deter-mined by the joint connecting the vertical (edge-on)

plate and shall where necessary be ascertained bycalculation, as for fillet welds.

Fig. 11.12 Three-plate welds

3. Fillet welds

3.1 Fillet welds shall, as a matter of principle, bemade on both sides. Exceptions to this rule (e.g. inthe case of closed box girders and in the case of pri-mary shear stress parallel to the weld) require ap-

proval in every instance. The thickness a (the heightof the inscribed equilateral triangle) shall be deter-mined by calculation.

The leg length "z" of a fillet weld, see Fig. 11.13,shall not be less than 1,4 times the fillet weld thick-

ness "a".

3.2 The thickness of fillet welds shall not exceed0,7 times the lesser thickness of the parts to be

welded (generally the web thickness). The minimum

thickness is defined by:

amin = 1 2t t

3

+[mm] (but not less than 3 mm)

t1 = the lesser plate thickness [mm]

(e.g. the web thickness)

t2 = the greater plate thickness [mm]

(e.g. the chord thickness)

3.3 The aim with fillet welds shall be to have aflat, symmetrical cross-section with good transition tothe base metal. Where proof of fatigue strength isrequired, it may be necessary to carry out machining(grinding-out the notch) depending on the detail cate-gory. The weld shall extend at least to the immediate

proximity of the theoretical root point.

3.4 Where mechanical welding processes areused which produce a deeper penetration going well

beyond the theoretical root point, and capable of being reliably and uniformly maintained under pro-duction conditions, it is permissible to take accountof the deeper penetration when determining the filletweld throat. The mathematical dimension:

[ ]tief 2mine

a a mm3

= +

is to be determined by reference to the configuration

shown in Fig. 11.13 and shall take into account thevalue of "min e" which is to be established for eachwelding procedure by a procedure test. The weldthickness shall, in relation to the theoretical root

point, not be less than the minimum thickness forfillet welds specified in 3.2.

Fig. 11.13 Fillet welds with increased penetration

3.5 Depending on the welding technique used,an increase of the "a" dimension of up to 1 mm may

be stipulated when laying down welds over produc-tion coatings particularly liable to cause porosity.This particularly applies when using fillet welds ofminimum thickness size.

The extent of the increase shall be determined on acase to case basis according to the nature and magni-tude of the stress, based on the results of the produc-

tion-coating tests according to the GL Rules forWelding. The same applies in turn to welding proc-esses too, in which there is a likelihood of insufficientroot penetration.



D



E. Workmanship and Testing of Weld Joints

Welding workmanship shall comply with the GL Rulesfor GL Rules for Welding (see Section 1, B.2.1.2).

1. Weld preparation and assembly

1.1 When preparing and assembling structural parts, care is to be taken to ensure compliance withthe prescribed joint geometry and root face (air) gaps.Where the permissible root face gap is slightly ex-ceeded, it may be reduced by build-up welding at theweld edges. Inserts or wires are not allowed to bewelded into the gap.

1.2 Plates and profiles shall be aligned accu-rately, especially where joints are interrupted bytransverse parts. The magnitude of the permissible

misalignment of plate edges depends on the particularstructural part, the plate thickness and the stress, seeGL Rules for Welding.

1.3 In the welding zone, structural parts shall beclean and dry. Scale, rust, slag, grease, paint (exceptfor production coatings) and dirt shall be removedcarefully prior to welding.

1.4 If plates, profiles or structural parts are givena corrosion-inhibiting coating (shop primer) beforewelding, this shall not impair the quality of the welds.

1.5 Only those weldable production coatingsshall be applied for which a GL report of no objectionexists, based on a pore formation tendency test.

2. Protection against the weather, preheat-ing

2.1 The working area of the welder shall be protected, in particular for outside work, againstwind, dampness and cold. In the case of submerged-arc welding, special care shall be taken to protectagainst draughts. When working outdoors, it is rec-ommended in any case to dry heat the weld edges in

unfavourable weather conditions.

2.2 In low temperatures (component tempera-tures below 5 °C) suitable measures are to be taken(e.g. covering, large-area heating, preheating in par-ticular when welding at relatively low heat input, e.g.with thin fillet welds or with thick-walled compo-nents) to ensure that the welding work can proceedsatisfactorily. If the temperature drops below -10°C,no further welding should be performed if possible.

3. Welding positions and sequence

3.1 Welding work shall be performed in themost favourable welding position. Welding in re-stricted positions, e.g. positions PE or PD (overhead),shall be restricted to unavoidable cases.

3.2 Vertical downward welding of fillet weldsshall not be applied to loading gear components andloading gear, including supporting structure (e.g.crane columns), even after a successful welding pro-cedure test.

3.3 Obstruction of weld shrinkage is to beminimized by the choice of a suitable constructionand welding sequence.

4. Workmanship

4.1 The welds shall have sufficient penetrationand clean, regular weld surfaces with "soft" transi-tions to the base material. Excessive overthicknessand grooves as well as notches at the edges of platesor cut-outs are to be avoided.

4.2 Cracked tacks may not be welded over butshall be removed by machining. In multi-pass weld-ing, the slag from preceding passes is to be removedcompletely. Pores, visible slag inclusions and cracksmay not be welded over, but shall be removed bymachining and repaired.

5. Repair of defects

Repair of major defects of workmanship may only beundertaken after agreement with GL. This appliessimilarly to the repair by welding of worn, broken or

otherwise damaged parts. Prior to repair work onload-bearing structural parts (1st order), a sketch ofthe repair is to be submitted.

6. Preheating

Regarding the requirement for and amount of pre-heating, several decisive criteria exist, e.g. chemicalcomposition, plate thickness, two- or three- dimen-sional heat dissipation, environmental or componenttemperature, heat input due to welding (energy perunit length), see GL Rules for Welding.

7. Heat treatment

7.1 The nature and scope of any heat treatmentwhich may have to be applied to welded structural

parts depends on their residual stress state (weldgeometry and thickness, rigidity of part) and thecharacteristics of the material concerned, i.e. its be-haviour or any change in characteristics to be ex-

pected when subjected to heat treatment. Generally, itis a matter of stress-relieving or annealing treatment.The steelmaker's directions and recommendations areto be followed.

7.2 Depending on the type of material con-cerned, flash butt welds are to be subjected to nor-malising or quenching and tempering treatment.

VI - Part 2GL 2012


E



7.3 The way in which the mechanical propertiesof the weld are affected by subsequent heat treatmentis one of the factors to be investigated in the weld-

procedure test. In addition to this, GL may call for production tests.

7.4 Any non-destructive tests required shall becarried out after heat treatment.

8. Non-destructive tests

8.1 The nature and scope of non-destructivetests depends on the importance and loading of the

part concerned (its component class) and on the pos-sible weld defects or effects on the base metal whichmay arise from the welding technique, position etc.

8.2 By way of example, in Table 11.2, the testsrequired for the important parts of loading gear and

loose gear have been compiled. Additionally, as aguide, requirements imposed on welded connectionsin the form of assessment categories according to ENISO 5817 have been added.

Where proof of fatigue strength is required, the testrequirements in the detail category table used apply.The manufacturing documents (drawings, weldingdiagram, test schedule) shall contain, for each struc-tural component, comprehensive information con-cerning the nature and scope of the tests required.

8.3 Non-destructive tests shall be carried out bysuitably qualified personnel.

8.4 The tests shall be carried out in accordancewith accepted practice. The results shall be presentedto the GL Surveyor at the latest at the acceptancetesting of the components.

Table 11.2 Test specifications for welded connections

Test specifications for welded connections

Components 1 1st Order 2nd Order

Notes See Section 2, Table 2.1 See Section 2, Table 2.1

Butt welds perpendicular to direction of

main stress including weld intersections:

Radiographic and/or ultra-sonic inspec-

tion of 10 % of weld length; in specialcases of 100 % of weld length. Where

necessary, magnetic particle testing.

Butt welds perpendicular to direction of

main stress including weld intersections:


tion randomly. Where necessary, mag-netic particle testing.

Butt welds parallel to direction of main

stress:


tion randomly. In special cases as above.

Where necessary, magnetic particle test-

ing.

Nature and scope of tests

to be applied

Single (HV) or double bevel (DHV-(K))

seams - especially in thicker plates -

perpendicular and parallel to the direc-

tion of the main stress:

Ultrasonic and magnetic particle testing

of at least 10 %; in the case of thicker

plates and rigid structural components as

a rule of 100 % of the weld length

Other welded connections and compo-

nents, as above in cases of doubt.

Recommended:

Magnetic particle testing of single (HV)

or double bevel (DHV-(K) seams on

thick-walled components.

Requirements Assessment category B as per ISO 5817 Assessment category C as per ISO 5817

Remarks:

– With GL consent, dye penetrant testing may be used instead of magnetic particle testing.

– Deviations from the recommended assessment categories - even in respect of individual criteria - may be agreed.

– As regards ultrasonic tests, the assessment criterion will be specified by GL as part of the process of approving and

authorising testing locations and inspectors.

– The GL Surveyor retains the right to determine or alter the position of random tests and to increase the scope of tests, particularly if there is an accumulation of defects.

1 For 3rd order components (see Section 2, Table 2.1) no tests are prescribed.



E



9. Production tests

9.1 If the manufacturing process, or any subse-quent (heat) treatment which may be required, leads tothe expectation of a substantial change in, or indeed

deterioration of, the properties of the material or thewelded connection, GL may stipulate production teststo prove that the mechanical qualities remain ade-quate.

9.2 Production tests during the course of manu-facture shall, as a matter of principle, be performedwhen welding is carried out on cold-formed portionsmade from materials with a minimum nominal upper

yield point of more than 355 N/mm2, with a wallthickness of 30 mm or more and with degrees of de-

formation of 3 % permanent elongation ε and over.

Elongation in the external tensile zone

[ ]100

%1 2r / t

ε =+

r = internal bending radius

t = plate thickness

F. Examination of Drawings and Supervisionof Construction

1. Examination of Drawings

For the examination of drawings of steel componentsthe requirements in Section 1, D. are to be observed.In addition to the welding diagrams and test plansstated there, the following applies:

1.1 Details on welded joints in the documentsto be examined

1.1.1 In the documents to be examined and to besubmitted for approval, production details shall beincluded which are relevant to the quality of the

welded joint and the examination by GL. Besides thematerials and the weld geometry, this requires thefollowing information:

weld preparation procedure (mechanical, ther-mal, etc.)

welding method welding positions

welding consumables and auxiliary material

preheating and heat conduction during weldingwhere required

weld composition and number of layers

welding sequence (in special cases)

root side grooving (method)

possibly finishing (heat) treatment

number and location of production specimens to be welded simultaneously, if required

1.1.2 As long as weld preparation and workman-ship of the welds (in combination with approved weld-ing methods, welding consumables and auxiliary ma-terials) comply with the accepted practice of weldingtechnology, these Rules and recognized standards, GLmay waive a special description or details in the testdocumentation.

1.2 Description of welded joints

1.2.1 The description of welded joints includingthe gap and weld geometry shall e.g. comply with thestandards EN 12345, EN 22553/ISO 2553, EN ISO

9692-1, -2, -3 or -4. The designations in the docu-ments to be examined (drawings, etc.) shall be well-defined e.g. by standard symbols.

1.2.2 Deviating weld geometries or symbols in thedocuments to be examined (drawings, welding dia-grams or specifications) shall be presented or com-mented on in detail and require approval by GL (e.g.in connection with the examination of drawings orwith a procedure test).


Regarding supervision of construction by GL, therequirements in Section 1, A. and the following re-quirements apply.

2.1 Surveillance of production

2.1.1 Steel components shall be surveyed during production with respect to workmanship and compli-ance with the approved drawings. The start of produc-tion is to be indicated in good time to the GL inspec-tion in charge, in order to enable a GL Surveyor tosupervise the complete production process.

2.1.2 Professional, proper and complete executionof the joining processes shall be ensured by means ofthorough controls by the factory.

2.1.3 If the manufacturing process, or any subse-quent (heat) treatment which may be required, maylead to a substantial change in, or deterioration of, the

properties of the material or the welded connection,GL may stipulate in-production tests to prove that themechanical qualities remain adequate.

3. Acceptance test

3.1 Before delivery of steel components, a suit-able date for the acceptance test shall be agreed withthe GL inspection in charge.

VI - Part 2GL 2012


F



3.2 For the acceptance test before delivery, themanufacturer shall have ready the following docu-ments:

– purchase and order documents

– workshop drawings

– GL approved drawings including examinationreports

– results of internal checks

– material test certificates

– certificates or protocols of welding tests

– further documents as required

G. Documentation

1. Marking

1.1 Where the GL acceptance test before deliveryhas not given reason for complaint, the steel compo-nent shall be stamped as follows:

– stamp3 with the month and year of testing

– GL certificate number as per 2.1, together withthe code letter(s) of the examining inspection of-fice

1.2 Where the steel components are produced in

the manufacturer's works for loading gear, a specialstamp and certification of these parts after manufactur-ing will be dispensed with. This will be included in theacceptance test before delivery of the assembled load-ing gear.

2. Certification

2.1 The GL Surveyor will issue a certificateForm 208 for each finished and tested steel compo-nent. This certificate includes the following informa-tion:


– date and reference number of the approveddrawing

– replica of stamp

2.2 The certificate issued according to 2.1 is not part of the loading gear documentation on board.



G



Section 12

Technical and Operational Safety Requirements

A. General

1. This Section contains selected provisions inaddition to the previous Sections as regards safety ofloading gear and the protection of persons, based onthe following requirements for design, fitting andoperation of these devices.

Further requirements or measures are to be taken fromthe relevant standards and regulations, if applicable.

2. A general precondition for the safe operationof loading gear is first of all its dimensioning and itsdesign and equipment in accordance with Sections 2 to 6 of these Rules.

Complementary details regarding rope drives, me-chanical parts and electrical equipment are given inSections 8 to 10.

3. For loose gear, the requirements of this Sec-tion apply similarly, where relevant.

B. Design Requirements

1. Loading gear in general

1.1 Highest crane boom position

1.1.1 General notes

Each crane boom shall be capable of being lowered inthe highest position, with or without useful load.Combinations of different influences are to be taken

into account.

1.1.2 Rope-operated crane booms

1.1.2.1 With rope-operated crane booms, the crane boom weight and the influence of all systems which prevent it remaining in the highest position shall besufficient to overcome all losses due to friction andturning.

1.1.2.2 To prevent remaining in the highest crane boom position a restoring device may be provided,which is to be controlled from the crane drivers cabin.

Alternatively, a warning device for the crane drivermay be installed, which warns of further luffing in duetime. This device is only permissible if it is reasonablefrom a technical and operational point of view.

1.1.3 Cylinder-operated crane booms

With cylinder-operated crane booms, the cylinderforce shall be great enough to comply with the re-quirements of 1.1.2.1.

1.2 Secondary components

Secondary components and auxiliary structures suchas inter alia ladders, consoles, cable trays shall not, if

possible, be welded to highly stressed components.Where appropriate, a proof of fatigue strength is to befurnished.

1.3 Access to crane drivers´ cabins

1.3.1 Crane drivers' cabins shall be designed andarranged in such a way, and be of such a size, thatthey are easily accessible no matter what the positionof the crane. An accident-proof standing position for asecond person shall be provided within the cranedriver’s cabin.

1.3.2 If normal access is impossible when the cabinis occupied, a second entrance of sufficient size,which may also be the emergency exit, shall be pro-vided.

1.3.3 Where the floor of the crane cabin is notmore than 5 m above the deck, it is sufficient if thecabin can be reached without particular danger whenthe crane is in one position but can be left via anemergency exit no matter what the position of thecrane.

1.4 Accesses in general

1.4.1 Unobstructed access to all essential compo-nents of the loading gear shall be ensured for mainte-nance and repair purposes, by means of suitable ac-cesses, platforms, ladders and standing spaces.

1.4.2 The headroom of entrances shall be at least2 m, the clear width at least 0,6 m. The clear height ofthe opening may be reduced by a sill up to 0,6 m high(freeboard convention).

1.4.3 Ladder rungs and climbing irons shall be of

20/20 square steel bar set edgewise, with a footstepwidth of at least approx. 30 cm. From a climbingheight of 2,5 m and above a safety cage or track forsafety harness is to be provided.

VI - Part 2

GL 2012

Section 12 Technical and Operational Safety Requirements Chapter 2

Page 12–1

B



1.4.4 Ladders

1.4.4.1 The inclination of ladders, measured from thehorizontal, shall be at least 65°.

1.4.4.2 Ladder rungs and climbing irons shall be of20/20 square steel bar set edgewise, with a footstepwidth of at least 30 cm. The horizontal distance fromfixed structures shall be at least 15 cm.

1.4.4.3 The distance of the lowest ladder rung fromthe deck or platform shall be between 100 mm and400 mm.

1.4.4.4 Climbing irons shall have a uniform distanceof 300 mm from each other.

1.4.4.5 The minimum distances and spaces to be kept

clear for movement within the reach of a ladder (seealso Figures 12.1 and 12.2) are:

– 750 × 750 mm in front of the climbing irons,

excluding obstacles extending into this space

(in exceptional cases a limit down to 550 × 550is permissible, however in this case obstaclessuch as brackets shall be covered, in order to

prevent injuries)

– 150 mm behind the ladder, measured from theaxis of the climbing iron

– 75 mm as an access clearance for the hands oneach side of the ladder and around vertical handgrips

1.4.4.6 A fall arresting device (safety cage or guiderail for a safety harness) is to be provided if:

a) the mounting height exceeds 2,5 m or

b) a falling height of more than 3,0 m is possible.

Fig. 12.1 Minimum clearances and movementspace

Fig. 12.2 Safety cage

Chapter 2

Page 12–2

Section 12 Technical and Operational Safety Requirements VI - Part 2

GL 2012

B







2. Motion limiter

2.1 General requirements

2.1.1 The end positions of all motions which can be performed by loading gear or its mobile compo-nents shall be limited in an appropriate and safe way.For rotary motions, this is only applicable if they arerestricted by local circumstances.

2.1.2 For conventional derrick boom systems,exceptions from the requirements of 2.1.1 can be per-mitted.

2.1.3 It shall not be possible for end positions to beoverridden. Exceptions, e.g. for maintenance andcrane boom stowage, require written approval by GL.

2.1.4 If required, motion limiters shall also have aninfluence on other motions in order to avoid damage.This may e.g. be required for the highest hook positionof crane booms with luffing ropes, see also 7.2.

2.2 Motion limitation by limit switches

2.2.1 Limit switches shall be designed and posi-tioned in such a way that their efficiency is not af-fected by the weather or by dirt accumulation. Move-ment in the opposite direction shall be possible after

they are activated. Proximity switches shall preferably be used.

2.2.2 Limit switches are to be located and adjustedin such a way that no damage can occur, even if theyare approached at maximum speed and with fullnominal load. If necessary, pre-limit switches are to beused.

2.2.3 Regarding additional requirements for limitswitches see Section 10, E.2.

2.3 Motion limitation by design measures

2.3.1 Limit switches

2.3.1.1 For hydraulically operated loading gear withlow operating speeds and nominal loads up to 1000kg, limit stops, with damping if required, may be per-mitted as a motion limitation.

2.3.1.2 For rope and chain hoists from series- production, the requirements of Section 6, B.3.2.2 apply.

2.3.2 Runway limit

For limit stops of movable cranes the provisions inSection 4, C.4.2 are applicable.

3. Emergency switches/keys

3.1 On control stands, inside cabins or at manualcontrols, an emergency switch or emergency cut-outwith mechanical locking device is to be provided.

3.2 The emergency shut-down shall cut off the power supply and all motions. In the case of hydraulicdrives, the emergency shut-down shall also act on thedrive of the hydraulic pump.

Return to service shall be solely from the zero positionof the respective controls or operating instruments.

3.3 Emergency switches/keys shall meet therequirements of EN 418 and continue to function inthe event of any failure of the control system.

4. Slack rope limiter

4.1 In particular cases, a slack rope limiter may be required, e.g. with fast hoisting speeds withoutautomatic creep hoist, multiple coils, or if required fora special mode of operation.

4.2 For offshore cranes and floating cranes whichare employed offshore, slack rope limiters in the lift-ing and luffing system, as well as a slack rope indica-tion for the crane driver are required.

The slack rope limitation system of offshore cranesshall stop the winch(es) automatically.

5. Secondary brake for offshore cranes

Offshore cranes used for the conveyance of personsshall be equipped with a secondary brake at the hoistand luffing winch. The requirements of Section 9,E.3.7 apply.

6. Alarm devices

6.1 Outside the driver’s cabin on cranes used forthe handling of cargo and offshore supply cranes, a

signal horn is to be provided by which the crane drivercan raise an acoustic signal which can definitely beheard in the working area of the crane.

6.2 Mobile deck cranes shall give an optical andacoustic alarm while moving.

7. Strain of loading gear due to safety devices

7.1 The movements and dynamic loads occurringfollowing the response of safety devices shall be keptto a minimum if possible.

7.2 Motion limiters for the highest crane boom position shall be designed in such a way that, afterdepositing the load, no damage may occur from theunloaded luffing ropes.

VI - Part 2

GL 2012


Page 12–5

D

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-



E. Passive Protective Measures

1. Safety distances

1.1 In accessible areas, the distance betweenfixed parts of the ship and moving parts of the loadinggear shall be at least 0,50 m in all directions and,where passageways adjoin, at least 0,60 m.

If at certain points a distance of 0,50 m cannot be provided, the area concerned shall be identified with prominent black and yellow paintwork. Warning no-tices are to be fitted.

1.2 A distance of at least 0,50 m shall be pro-vided between the lower edge of the crane boom in itslowest working position and fixed parts of the ship.

2. Safety of access and transport

2.1 Working passages, operating platforms, stairsand other areas accessible during operation shall besecured by railings.

2.2 All loading gear shall be fitted with a sign- board forbidding access or ascent by unauthorized persons.

2.3 In utility spaces (on board ships and incranes), adequately-dimensioned securing facilities for

pull-lift hoists or holding devices shall be fitted atsuitable points.

2.4 To permit load tests on loading gear insideutility spaces, eye plates shall be provided at suitable

points, see Section 6, B.3.5.

3. Corrosion protection

3.1 For general requirements regarding corrosion protection, the provisions of Section 11, B.3.5 applyfor steel components and Section 8, B.1.2 for wireropes.

3.2 Components which are employed for hoistingservices under water, e.g. loose gear, shall be designedin such a way that, as far as possible, no seawater caningress.

F. Stowage and Lashing Devices


1.1 It shall be possible for all wheeled loading

gear and mobile components of loading gear to be positioned, or where required, supported, for sea use,as well as to be fastened securely by suitable devicesor guys, see Section 3, C.5.3.

1.2 Supporting or fastening devices shall be de-signed in such a way that inadmissible forces or loadsmay not be transmitted to the loading gear or the com-

ponents thereof, caused by deformations of the ship’shull in a seaway.

2. Wheeled loading gear

2.1 Wheeled loading gear shall be located instowage positions which, as far as possible, are ex-

pected to suffer the least loads in a seaway.

2.2 For free-travelling loading gear , such as e.g.industrial cargo-handling vehicles, suitable stowagespaces and lashing eyes or other suitable devices are to

be provided.

3. Slewing cranes

3.1 Slewing cranes with crane booms or project-ing machinery rooms require supporting structures forthese components and a special blocking device torelieve the slewing gear.

3.2 Where crane booms or projecting machineryrooms with an "out of operation" status shall not bestowed or supported, written GL approval is required.

3.3 Crane booms with luffing ropes shall beguyed downwards, either hanging free or supported.Where the brakes of the loading gear are designed forit, this requirement can be complied with by properfastening of the load hook and prestressing of thehoisting ropes. Prestressing is to be specified by themanufacturer.

Supported crane booms may also be fastened properlyto the crane boom support, see Section 4, G.2.2.

For crane booms with luffing cylinders, the guy orfastening may be dispensed with, provided that a cor-responding approval is at hand.

3.4 Where not serving to guy the crane boomload hooks are to be stowed in special devices at thecrane boom or on deck. Grabs or other large and/orheavy loose gear shall be stowed on deck.

4. Design and dimensioning

4.1 Crane boom supports, supporting, stowageand lashing devices shall be designed and dimen-sioned with the same diligence and to the same criteriawhich apply to loading gear.

4.2 Stowage and lashing devices shall be dimen-sioned like cranes out of operation acc. to Section 4,F.

Chapter 2

Page 12–6


GL 2012

F

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-



G. Operational Requirements

1. Loading gear in general

1.1 Marking of hoisting capacity

1.1.1 All loading gear shall be marked permanentlyand prominently with the nominal load "SWL" and thecorresponding load radius.

In the case of load-radius dependent nominal loads,loading gear shall be marked in several places.

Detailed information regarding marking of loadinggear is given in Section 13, B.5.

1.1.2 All loose gear shall be marked permanentlyand prominently with the nominal load "SWL" and the

dead load "WT", the latter if WT≥

100 kg.Detailed information regarding marking of loose gearis given in Section 7, D.3.

1.2 Ship stability

1.2.1 In the absence of any special measures, theship’s stability alone shall suffice to ensure simultane-ous operation of all loading gear for transhipment,handling or transport of cargo under all operationalconditions of the ship.

In doing so, the inclinations and/or motions of the ship

which are the basis for dimensioning the loading gear,shall not be exceeded.

1.2.2 Special measures as per 1.2.1 can be e.g.:

– operational restrictions

– ballasting by water or weights

– supporting the ship ashore

– utilization of stabilizing pontoons

Special measures always require instructions recordedin writing, and supervisory personnel, and where re-

quired also additional supervising devices. Theserequirements also apply to fully automated operation.

1.2.3 The influence of loading gear on the ship’sstability shall be verified by calculation. These calcu-lations shall be included in the stability documentationof the ship.

1.3 Failure of the drive power

1.3.1 A design is to be employed, auxiliary meansshall be available, and measures are to be taken to setdown suspended loads as safely as possible, in the

event of a failure of the drive power.Mobile loading gear and/or mobile loading gear com-

ponents may for this purpose possibly be transferredinto a more favourable load position.

1.3.2 If no other loading gear is available, the follow-ing auxiliary means/measures may e.g. be employed:

– plug-on auxiliary drives/manual pumps

– eye plates attached to the loading gear for use by

pull-lift hoists for small loads

– mechanical ventilation of brakes or opening ofvalves

Mechanical ventilation of brakes or opening of valvesis only permissible if the design conditions regardingintake of the released energy allow for it. Requiredwaiting periods for cooling-down shall be observed.

1.3.3 Loading gear used for the conveyance of persons shall be equipped with suitable rescue equip-ment. Descender devices may be employed for thedescent from work-baskets.

1.4 Conveyance of persons

Loading gear used for the conveyance of persons shallcomply with the requirements according to Section 3,B.5. with regard to dimensioning, control and opera-tion.

Persons may only be transported at daylight and underenvironmental conditions (wind/seaway), which are con-sidered to be acceptable by the supervisor in charge.

1.5 Communication

1.5.1 Crane drivers shall have an unobstructed

view of the load and the working area under all work-ing conditions, or else personnel guiding them, seealso C.2.1.

1.5.2 If necessary, equipment shall be provided ormeasures taken which allow safe transmittance ofinstructions from the guiding person(s) to the cranedriver or the person handling the crane.

2. Wheeled loading gear

For wheeled cranes, the operational requirements ofB.2, D.6.2 and E.1 apply.

3. Floating cranes

3.1 Where pontoons carrying floating cranesunder load are operated in calm water, a safety dis-tance of at least 0,50 m shall be maintained betweenthe deck edge at the lowest corner and the surface ofthe water. When working in unprotected waters, asafety distance of at least 1,00 m shall be maintained.

3.2 The transport of loads suspended from thecrane hook across unprotected waters is subject ineach case to approval by GL, who may for this pur-

pose issue a "Conveyance Certificate" if necessary.

3.3 In the event of the floating structure beinggrounded, the cranes located on it may only be oper-ated if the structure is designed for that situation.

VI - Part 2

GL 2012


Page 12–7

G



4. Responsibility of the ship's management

4.1 Special working conditions, operational re-strictions, release and safety measures shall be re-corded in writing and included with the corresponding

loading gear documentation.

4.2 Maintenance and control measures performed by the ship's management and/or external personnelare to be confirmed properly in the loading geardocumentation or added to it.

In the GL Register book of loading gear, Form LA 1, part 4 is provided for entries of this kind, see Section13, G.

4.3 If the limit values for wind, ship inclination,

ship motion or temperature, specified in Section 3, B.4. and Section 5, B., are reached, loading gear shall be put out of operation and, where required, be stowed ina special way and/or be lashed for sea, see F.

Deviating limit values may be specified for loadinggear operating in a seaway or at low temperatures.

Chapter 2

Page 12–8


GL 2012

G



Section 13

Testing and Examination of Loading Gear

A. General

1. Description of content

1.1 Subsections B. to E. contain requirements fortesting, examination, marking and certification ofloading gear used for cargo handling.

These provisions apply analogously to loading gear onoffshore installations, which are only expressly men-tioned if required.

1.2 The requirements in G. apply for the evalua-tion and treatment of worn-out or damaged loadinggear components.

1.3 The loading gear documentation described inH. includes the following items:

– types and systems of certification

– compilation of test certificates in Register books(certification of loading gear)

– confirmation of investigations, inspections bythe ship's management, replacement of compo-nents, as well as repair and maintenance activi-ties

– rigging plans

– operating and maintenance instructions

2. Supplementary requirements

Supplementary/deviating requirements apply to thefollowing loading gear, equipment and means of

transport:

2.1 Loading gear

– goods lifts and lifting platforms (Section 5)

– rope and chain hoists (Section 6, B.)

– ramps and car decks (Section 6, C.)

– loading gear for research work (Section 6, D.)

– industrial cargo-handling vehicles (Section 6, E.)

2.2 Equipment

– interchangeable components (Section 7)

– wire and fibre ropes (Section 8)

– mechanical parts (Section 9)

– electrical equipment (Section 10)

2.3 Means of transport

– loose gear (Section 7)

– shipborne working baskets (Section 6, F.1.)

– landing booms (Section 6, F.3.)

3. Independent requirements

Independent requirements exist for testing, examina-tion and certification of the following loading gear:

– passenger lifts and small goods lifts (Section 5)

4. Definitions

In addition to Section 1, C., the following definitionsapply:

4.1 Tests

4.1.1 Function test

The designation "function test" is applied to testing ofall possible movements or functions, as well as tocontrol, limiting and safety equipment.

This test shall generally be carried out with availableweights.

To test and, if applicable, to adjust load monitoringequipment, calibrated weights or, if permitted, calibrated force measuring devices shall be made avail-able.

4.1.2 Load test

The designation 'load test' is given to the test with the prescribed test load LPdyn or LPstat.

The purpose of the load test is to prove adequatestrength, safety against hidden defects and - if appli-cable - adequate safety against overturning.

4.2 Examination

4.2.1 Thorough examination

A thorough examination means a detailed visual ex-amination, supplemented if necessary by other suitablemeans or measures in order to arrive at a reliable con-clusion as to safety.

VI - Part 2GL 2012

Section 13 Testing and Examination of Loading Gear Chapter 2Page 13–1

A

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-



If deemed necessary by the GL Surveyor, parts of theinterchangeable components, the loose gear or theloading gear are to be dismounted and, where re-quired, dismantled.

4.2.2 Inspection

The term "inspection" means a visual inspection,whereby - as far as is possible by this means - it shall be determined whether continued use can safely be permitted.

B. Supervision of Construction

In addition to the following provisions, the generalrequirements in Section 1, A. and, for steel construc-tion, the requirements in Section 11, F.2. shall beobserved.

1. General

1.1 Supervision of construction is required in principle. GL may however dispense with it for load-ing gear manufactured in series, which is not used forcargo handling and which fufils the requirements foromitting examination of drawings, see Section 1,D.1.3. In this case, manufacturer’s test reports may beaccepted, deviating from the certificates stated in 7.1

1.2 Commencement of construction of a loadinggear is to be advised to the respective GL InspectionOffice in sufficient time for a GL Surveyor to attendthe construction process from the very beginning.

1.3 The basis for the supervision of constructionat the manufacturer of the loading gear is the approveddocumentation according to Section 1, D., plus, ifapplicable, further documentation, certificates, reportsand information from the manufacturer which the GLSurveyor needs for assessment of the parts to be ex-amined.

1.4 Regarding supervision of construction andloading gear documentation, subcontracting firmsshall provide certificates and test reports in the scopespecified in Sections 5 to 10.

2. Participation by manufacturers

2.1 As far as necessary and advisable, the workswill have to check all components during and aftermanufacture for completeness, dimensional accuracyand proper workmanship.

2.2 Following checking and, if required, repair

by the works, the components are to be presented tothe GL Surveyor for inspection during appropriate phases of construction, normally in easily accessibleand unpainted condition.

Certificates for components and equipment delivered by subcontractors shall be submitted.

2.3 The GL Surveyor may reject components notadequately pre-checked, and stipulate that they be

presented again following checking by the works and,if required, repair.

2.4 Components to be tested are to be indicatedto the GL Inspection in charge in good time for ex-amination.

2.5 In order to enable the GL Surveyor to per-form his duties, he is to be given access to the work-shops in which components for testing are manufac-tured and assembled. Manufacturers are to makeavailable to the Surveyor the personnel and materialsupport required to carry out the prescribed tests.


3.1 The GL Surveyor examines the componentsconstructed at the manufacturer's, or supplied, withregard to condition, marking and certification. Hesupervises the assembly of the loading gear and exam-ines workmanship and agreement with approveddocuments, and witnesses the test runs and functionaltests as appropriate or agreed.

3.2 Testing of materials for the manufacture shall be proven to the GL Surveyor in accordance with the

GL Rules for Materials.

The certificates/reports for the materials used, as wellas proofs on welding and non-destructive materialtests, shall be submitted.

3.3 Components which are not type-tested butsubject to tests and examination shall, as far as possible, be tested at the manufacturer's test plant in the presence of the GL Surveyor in an agreed scope or as prescribed by these Rules.

Regarding series production, instead of the prescribedtests, other testing methods can be agreed with GL,

provided that they are accepted to be equivalent.

3.4 Where machines, devices or electrical equip-ment are provided for the intended purpose for thefirst time, GL may demand a type-test.

4. Acceptance testing

4.1 General notes

4.1.1 Loading gear assembled ready for operation,or completely equipped assembly groups, shall be presented to the GL Surveyor before they leave themanufacturer's works.

4.1.2 After completion of agreed test runs or tests,loading gear or loading gear assembly groups shall be


Section 13 Testing and Examination of Loading Gear VI - Part 2GL 2012

B



subjected to a thorough examination. The testingmethods applied are at the discretion of the GL Sur-veyor. Following tests on the test plant, lubricatingand hydraulic oil filters shall be checked for impurity.

4.2 Tests and examinations to be carried out

4.2.1 General test and examination

– checking of documentation

– examination in respect of workmanship, compli-ance with the approved documents and for completeness

– checking of safety clearances and passive pro-tection measures

– examination of accesses, ladders, rails and plat-forms

– examination of the cabin or the control standand the control equipment

– examination of the manufacturer's plate, on which

at a minimum shall be permanently indicated:



– serial number

– where applicable, type designation

– nominal load(s) and load radius (radii)

– examination of marking, see 5.

– additional tests and/or examinations as required

4.2.2 Test run

4.2.2.1 Newly designed loading gear shall be test-runin the presence of the GL Surveyor according to a programme approved by GL. If possible, this shalltake place at the manufacturer's, but with GL's con-sent, it may also take place elsewhere, or at the placeof operation.

4.2.2.2 Loading gear subject to special operatingconditions shall undergo test runs under these condi-tions. At least one of every different type of gear shall be tested in this way.

For shipborne loading gear, this for instance meansthat the test run shall be performed with the ship alsoat the stipulated inclination.

4.2.2.3 A test run may cover the following, insofar asapplicable:

– checking the interaction of all movable parts andfunctions

– function test under available load

– brake test with dynamic test load according to

Table 13.2 by releasing the operator's control 1

– emergency brake test with dynamic test load

according to Table 13.2 (see also C.3.2.4) 1

– checking the emergency load release device

– endurance tests on all power units under nomi-

nal load, with heating measurement

– noise measurement (also in the cabin)

– measurement of power consumption and con-tractually agreed speeds under nominal load

– additional measurements, including electricalones, if necessary

– checking and adjustment of all valves and con-trol equipment

– pressure tests

– testing and adjustment of all safety devices andlimit stops

– testing of lighting, ventilation, intercom, etc.

– testing of fire protection system

– further tests as required

4.2.2.4 Easing of testing requirements is to be agreedwith GL.

4.2.3 Proof of stability against overturning

For the proof of stability against overturning forwheeled loading gear, the requirements in Section 3,E.2.2 and Section 6, E.1.2 apply.

5. Marking of the loading gear

5.1 Loading gear number

5.1.1 The sequential numbering of shipborne liftingappliances shall agree with the details in the certifi-cates and rigging plans.

5.1.2 The following rule for numbering shall be

applied: – first all loading gear for cargo-handling, starting

from the fore and arranged in pairs, progressingfrom port to starboard, starting on deck, then be-low deck

– next all loading gear needed for operating theship, but none of the gear exclusively forlaunching life-saving equipment. Here also:starting on deck, then below deck.

5.1.3 The number of the loading gear shall be pre-ceded by "Nr." or also "No.".

––––––––––––––1 Brake tests with test load shall be restricted to the required

number. Emergency tests shall as far as possible be performedonly once.

VI - Part 2GL 2012


B



5.2 Nominal load(s)

5.2.1 The nominal load(s) of loading gear forcargo-handling shall be indicated in metric tonnes "t",On other loading gear, especially with lower nominal

loads, the indication may also be in kilograms "kg".

The nominal load(s) of loading gear shall be preceded by the letters "SWL", where applicable with the fol-lowing additions:

– SWL (P) for pairs of loading gear

– SWL (G) for loading gear with grabs

Table 13.1 Examples of markings

Loading gear with crane boom

Item No.

on board the shipNominal load Load radius

Loading gear

typeMeaning of the marking

No. 3 SWL 40 t 2,4 – 32 mIn the indicated area of load radius,

loads up to 40 t may be transported

No. 2

SWL 250 t

SWL 120 t

SWL 60 t

3,5 – 12 m

3,5 – 25,5 m

3,5 – 34 m

Crane with 3 load steps. The load

radius limits of the allocated nominal

loads shall not be exceeded 1

No. 4SWL (G) 26,4 t

SWL 30 t

2,8 – 28 m

2,8 – 28 m

In the indicated area of load radius,loads up to 26,4 t can be transported

during grab operation, up to 30 t in

general cargo operation 2

Nos. 2 + 3 SWL (P) 60 t 2,6 – 31 m

slewing cranes

In the indicated area of load radius,

loads up to 60 t may be transported by2 cranes slewing jointly

No. 1 SWL 50 t

gantry crane

with foldabletrolley girders

In the whole operating range of the

gantry crane and the trolley, loads upto 50 t may be transported

SWL 50 t

SWL 18,6 t

3,6 – 14 m

3,6 – 40 m

Marking indicates nominal loads

when the platform is hoisted 3 No. 2

SWL 5 t 4,4 – 42 m

offshore

slewing craneMarking for the auxiliary hoist

Loading gear without crane boom

No. 10 SWL 16 t bridge crane,

lifting platform Nominal load of the loading gear

Nos. 3 + 4 SWL (P) 28 t goods lift

A nominal load of 28 t may be

transported by 2 goods lifts arranged

side-by-side

No. 18 SWL 3 – 6 t rope hoist

Where the hoisting rope has a single

reeve, loads up to 3 t may be lifted, up

to 6 t in the case of double reeve 4

1 In the crane driver's cabin, a load radius diagram shall be visibly displayed.

2 The difference between SWL (G) and SWL results from the different hoist load coefficients, see Section 4, Table 4.2.

The nominal load SWL (G) includes the dead load of the grab. As an example a grab may be marked as follows:SWL 24 t, underneath WT 2,4 t

3 Information about the curve-type variation of the nominal loads of platform or ship hoists can be taken from the load radius diagram

displayed in the crane driver´s cabin, see Section 4, Fig.4.4.

4 The types of reeve shall be marked properly on the loading gear. In the case of more than double reeve, an operating instruction isrequired.



B





C. Initial Test and Examination

1. General notes

1.1 Prior to commissioning, an initial test and

examination within the scope described in 2. to 4. atthe place of operation is required.

The sequence of steps for the test and examination isas deemed necessary by the GL Surveyor, who alsodecides the scope of his examination.

1.2 During practical testing of loading gear dependent on an external power supply, care is to betaken to ensure that the test is carried out using thetype of power supply envisaged from the ship's main.

Where ships are fitted for shoreside power supply,shore and ship power shall be compatible.

1.3 The certificates and rigging plans stated in4.1.2 shall be presented as proof of supervision ofconstruction, and as an integral part of the loadinggear documentation.

2. Function test

2.1 This test serves to provide proof of the goodworking order of all components, installed systemsand safety devices. The test procedure is at the GLSurveyor's discretion.

2.2 In the case of permanently installed loadinggear, the function test amongst other things serves toverify whether parts of the ship's structure or the ship'sequipment restrict the working range or impede theworking process.

2.3 The function test to be carried out for the GLSurveyor does not normally serve to check whether all possible operations wanted by the operator can beeffected. Proving this is the responsibility of themanufacturer or supplier.

2.4 With the exception of the test on the overload protection devices, the function test may be carried outwith any given load, see also A.4.1.1.

2.5 A function test using a test load requires themanufacturer’s consent.

3. Load test

3.1 General requirements

3.1.1 All loading gear shall undergo a load testwith weights prior to being put into service. The testshall be carried out at the place of operation, in orderthat their respective foundations or driveways be in-cluded in the test.

3.1.2 In the case of loading gear below deck whichis difficult to access, load tests may alternatively be

conducted using approved load measuring deviceswith a tolerance limit of ≤ 2,5 %.

3.1.3 Loading gear is to be subjected to a dynamicload test.

The size of the test load shall be taken from Table13.2.

Table 13.2 Dynamic test loads for loading gear

Nominal loads (LNe) Test loads (LPdyn) 1

up to 20 t

20 t to 50 t

over 50 t

SWL + 25 %

SWL + 5 t

SWL + 10 %

1 If applicable to be multiplied with f d according to Section 7,

C.3.4

3.2 Load test performance

For the dynamic load test to be performed for the GLSurveyor, the test load is to be lifted slowly, and if possible also slewed and luffed. In detail, the follow-ing applies:

3.2.1 For loading gear generally, the test load is to be lowered rapidly and braked in various positionsand/or settings. Braking is to be effected by releasingthe control levers.

3.2.2 Cranes under test load shall run the full trav-elling distance, or at maximum load radius, slowlycover the full swinging or slewing range. Additionally,the minimum load radius is to be tested, and in thecase of cranes with radius dependent nominal loads,also an intermediate value.

3.2.3 Regarding crane columns and their integra-tion into the ship's hull, as well as loading gear foun-dations in general, tests according to 3.2.1 are requiredin longitudinal and transverse directions of the ship,i.e. to fore and aft and to port and starboard each.

3.2.4 For loading gear used for cargo handling, oneemergency brake test with the test load, by operatingthe emergency switch or button, is to be carried outeither at the manufacturer's or at the place of opera-tion.

3.2.5 When carrying out the load test, care shall betaken to ensure that all movable parts are able to oper-ate freely in all the loading gear and/or derrick boom's positions, all ropes are unobstructed by any other parts, and the ropes can wind satisfactorily onto thewinch drums.

3.2.6 In the case of goods lifts, lifting platformsand ramps, the test load arrangement shall conform tothe intended operating mode.



C



3.3 Requirements for hoisting winches

3.3.1 If the pull of the hoisting-winch is insuffi-cient to lift the test load, a second winch or other load-ing gear may be brought in to assist with the hoist.

Braking and holding the test load, however, has to beaccomplished using solely the winch belonging to theloading gear.

3.3.2 Where hoisting-winches have not lifted thetest load by themselves, proof is to be obtained bytesting that with the maximum number of layers ofrope on the winch drum, the nominal load is hoistedsatisfactorily by the winches.

3.3.3 The ability of the winch to hold the test loadwith the drive to the winch switched off shall be proved. In doing so, no slip shall occur, with the ex-ception of hydraulic winches without standstill brakes,

see F.8.2.4.

3.3.4 Hydraulic cranes

If hydraulic cranes are unable to lift a test load 25 %greater than the nominal load because of the pressurelimit, lifting the maximum possible load is sufficient.This shall however exceed the nominal load by at least10 %.

4. Examination

4.1 Documentation check

4.1.1 Priority shall be given to checking if theexamination of drawings for loading gear, crane col-umns, crane boom supports and lashing equipment,foundations, runways and all supporting structures has been concluded successfully and if all structural modi-fications or changes, possibly resulting therefrom,have been carried out.

4.1.2 Supervision of construction shall be docu-mented by test certificates. The loading gear docu-mentation remaining onboard shall include:

– rigging plans

– test certificates for interchangeable componentsand loose gear

– test certificates for ropes

4.1.3 Regarding the certificates stated in 4.1.2,their correct correlation to the certified structural partsor components shall be checked by comparing thestamping and/or properties of these parts.

The certificates shall be checked with respect to cor-rectness in form and content.

4.2 General visual inspection

The general visual inspection may e.g. refer to thefollowing checks:

– general condition, completeness and correctrigging

– assembly interfaces between components con-structed on site and components supplied

– undisturbed power transmission through trans-versely arranged plates such as deck plates.(Where required, this shall be checked by means

of drilling holes, which have to be welded up af-ter the check)

– inscription of number, SWL and, where re-quired, load radius

– warning and indication signboards as well aswarning paintwork where required

– accesses to loading gear and to control stands

– accesses to driver cabins and working and con-trol platforms inside and outside the loadinggear and to crane boom supports

– emergency descents – condition and equipping of control stands and

driver cabins

– working area of the loading gear

– range(s) of sight for the operator from inside thedriver cabin

4.3 Examination after the load test

After the load test, the load-bearing components ofloading gear are to undergo a visual examination.

This examination shall, if possible, exclude the forma-tion of possibly permanent deformations or cracks atforce application points or at special design details.

5. Stamping

5.1 If the initial tests and examinations have notgiven rise to any objections, the loading gear is to bestamped before the relevant certificates are issued.

5.2 Cranes with a crane boom are to be stampedat the bottom end of the right-hand jib member andnext to the point where that member is connected to

the crane housing, and in a prominent position on allother loading gear.

5.3 The stamp shall contain the following infor-mation:

– shipboard number of the loading gear

– stamp with the month and year of test

– nominal load of the loading gear in [t] or where re-quired in [kg] and the permissible minimum and

maximum crane load radius in [m]. Where the no-minal load varies with the load radius, the nomi-

nal load and the corresponding load radius is to be stated for the maximum and minimum values

– certificate number and distinguishing letters ofthe GL Inspection Office in charge

VI - Part 2GL 2012


C



6. Certification of the initial tests and exami-nations

6.1 Following performance of the tests and ex-aminations and stamping, the GL Surveyor issues the

certificate Form LA2 for the load-tested loading gear.

This certificate may include several sets of loadinggear.

6.2 The tests and examinations of the loadinggear are confirmed by the GL Surveyor in a Register book of Form LA1, to which the certificate and thesurvey report are added.

6.3 The certification and documentation systemfor loading gear is described in H.

D. Periodic Tests and Examinations

1. General notes

1.1 Loading gear subject to periodic supervision by GL shall be examined at regular intervals by a GLSurveyor and subjected to load tests in his presence.

1.2 The intervals between examinations, and

between the load tests, described below are customaryinternationally. Deviating national requirements are to be taken into account if applicable.

1.3 In cases where loading gear dependent on anexternal power supply is tested, the requirements inC.1.2 apply.

2. Due dates

2.1 Examinations

2.1.1 Loading gear and loose gear shall be exam-ined annually by a GL Surveyor, unless other intervalsare required by national regulations.

The operator is, as a matter of principle, obliged togive GL due notice of the examination.

2.1.2 The following examinations vary, dependingon type and scope:

– annual examinations, see 3.

– five-yearly examinations, see 4.

2.1.3 For offshore cranes during the construction phase of the offshore installation, half-yearly examina-tions may be required. These correspond fully to theannual examinations.

2.2 Load tests

2.2.1 No later than five years after the load test, afurther load test is required for loading gear, to be performed in the GL Surveyor's presence.

The operator is, as a matter of principle, obliged togive GL due notice of the load test.

2.2.2 For practical reasons, load tests shall coincideif possible with the five-yearly examination.

2.3 Exceeding the due date

2.3.1 In the case of loading gear and loose gearsubject to the regulations of ILO, the intervals of oneand five years regarding examinations and load testsshall not be exceeded, with the exception of 4.1.3.

No exceptions are permitted for offshore cranes.

2.3.2 In the case of loading gear not subject to theILO regulations and which are no offshore cranes, theinterval stated in 2.3.1 may be exceeded by up to threemonths. This applies also to related loose gear.

This does not, however, postpone the due date of thenext examination. The same applies inversely to tests performed before the due date.

2.3.3 Where the intervals stated in 2.3.1 and 2.3.2are exceeded, the validity of entries on examinations performed and the validity of test certificates expiresin the Register book.

In the case of classified loading gear, the class is suspended once the five year interval has been exceeded by more than three months.

3. Annual examinations

The purpose of annual examinations is to confirmtechnical safety of operation within the periods offive-yearly examinations.

In due consideration of national (flag state) regula-tions, GL may recognize annual examinations which

have been performed by authorized persons. 2 Thisapplies in particular to loading gear on offshore wind

energy plants.

3.1 Scope of examinations

3.1.1 The scope of examinations depends on age,condition and frequency of use of loading gear.

Normally, loading gear need not be unrigged and dis-mantled for the performance of yearly examinations.

3.1.2 Essentially, the scope of examination comprises:

– checking documentation and certificates for

completeness and validity and with reference to

––––––––––––––2 Crane maker or service company/personnel authorized by the

crane maker



D

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-



maintenance and inspection measures, arrangedor performed by the ship’s management

– checking for completeness and correct riggingor reeving respectively, using the rigging plans

– checking for damage, wear, deformation, corro-sion, soiling, oil leakage, etc.

– checking for proper marking

– function test using available load

– random examination of the interchangeablecomponents and correlation to the relevant cer-tificates based on the stamps applied

– verification of newly-fitted parts

– recording the examination carried out in the

Register book or, where required, in a corre-sponding certificate

– preparation of a survey report

3.1.3 The list in 3.1.2 is by way of an example. Theactual scope of tests and examinations is at the discre-tion of the GL Surveyor, whereby negative findingsmay require further examinations or measures, see 4.2.

3.2 Dealing with components

3.2.1 Use of steels liable to age is not permitted as

a matter of principle, so that heat treatment of compo-nents at regular intervals is not required.

3.2.2 Components which do not comply with theserules, or which are worn to the permitted limits, shall be replaced by new ones with the prescribed dimen-sions.

3.2.3 Any parts renewed since the last examinationare to be submitted to the GL Surveyor, together withthe certificates required.

4. Five- yearly examinations

4.1 General notes

4.1.1 The purpose of five-yearly tests and examina-tions is to confirm or generate a solid technical basisfor the upcoming annual examinations.

4.1.2 Five-yearly examinations and load tests shall be performed if possible at the time of Class Renewal,i.e. during the period in shipyard refit, to have avail-able sufficient technical equipment, test weights andinterchangeable components, if necessary.

4.1.3 In order to harmonize the five-yearly testsand examinations with the Class Renewals, GL may, based on an inspection of the loading gear by a GLSurveyor, postpone the due dates by up to 3 months, if

the technical condition of the loading gear permitsthis.

This does not, however, postpone the due date of thenext tests and/or examinations.

4.2 Scope of examinations

In accordance with these Rules, five-yearly examina-tions shall extend and complement the examinationsdescribed in 3.1 and, where required, the measuresdescribed thereafter, which may, if necessary, be ex-tended:

4.2.1 Examination of structural and inter-

changeable components

4.2.1.1 If deemed necessary by the GL Surveyor,individual parts shall be dismantled and, if necessary,unrigged for the examination. All parts found to beunsafe to operate shall be repaired or replaced.

4.2.1.2 The GL Surveyor is entitled to demand a loadtest or a load test repeat for loading gear, interchange-able components or loose gear, if deemed necessary.

4.2.2 Examination of slew rings

4.2.2.1 Slew rings shall be examined with respect to bearing clearance, noise, lubrication and corrosion.

The tight fit of the pins is to be checked by at least onerandom hammer test.

Where increased internal wear is suspected, extrudedgrease is to be checked by an appropriate method forabraded particles.

4.2.2.2 Slew rings of offshore cranes which are notequipped with special control and measuring devicesshall be checked regularly by special control meas-ures, agreed with the manufacturer.

Where increased internal wear becomes apparent, itmay be required to remove the slew ring and to dis-mantle it for examination.

4.2.2.3 The associated drives and brakes shall be

checked with respect to wear, function and generalcondition.

4.2.3 Examination of hydraulic cylinders

Apart from a thorough visual examination with respectto straightness, oil leakage, bearing clearance andabsence of cracks in the connecting structures, a func-tion test of pipe burst safety valves or similar safetycomponents with available load is required.

4.2.4 Examination of winches

Winches shall be examined with respect to:

– condition, fastening and function

– wear to brakes, rope grooves and flanged discs

– sufficient lubrication

VI - Part 2GL 2012


D





1.3 Any essential modification and any repair orrenewal of load-bearing components, with the excep-tion of ropes and interchangeable components, is to becarried out under the supervision of GL. Where this isnot possible in individual cases because of the circum-

stances, a re-examination is to be carried out on asuitable date.

1.4 Extraordinary load tests and examinationsmay be credited towards the periodic tests and exami-nations, if they comply with the prescribed conditionswith respect to type and scope.

1.5 All load tests shall be performed usingweights, in the manner described in D.5.

Regarding certification of tests and examinations, therequirements in D.6. apply.

2. Essential modifications

2.1 Essential modifications are subject to thesame tests and examinations as the initial manufac-ture.

2.2 Essential modifications include, besides re-newal of load-bearing components, modifications of:

– nominal load

– load radius

– hoisting and/or luffing systems

– cable tackle system, unless different types ofreeve are provided in the design

– load-bearing components

2.3 Non-essential modifications include modifi-cations which will in no way affect safety and/or func-tion of loading gear or loose gear. Such modificationsshall be presented to the GL Surveyor on his first visitto the ship after the modification has been carried out.

3. Damage

3.1 The requirements in F. are to be observedwhen an evaluation is made whether damage undulyaffects the safety of loading gear or loose gear.

3.2 Damage affecting safety requires an examina-tion of the damage and a repair plan with specificdetails, which is subject to approval by GL.

Following repair, an examination within the necessaryscope and a load test are required.

3.3 Depending on the evaluation of the damage,loading gear or loose gear shall be put out of operationor, where required, be operated at reduced nominalload and/or load radius.

Regarding repairs and operation at reduced nominalload, the requirements in F.9. apply.

3.4 Damage which does not affect safety shall be presented to the GL Surveyor at the first visit to the

ship after the occurrence of the damage.

4. Renewals

4.1 Following each renewal of load-bearingcomponents of loading gear and loose gear, a load testand an associated examination of this gear is required.

4.2 The requirements of 4.1 do not apply to ropesand interchangeable components, because these aretested, examined and certified independently.

Renewal of axes, pins, rope-sheaves, etc. do not, in

general, require a new load test.

The renewal of all parts mentioned shall be pointedout to the GL Surveyor on the occasion of the follow-ing examination.

4.3 Following replacement or repair of winches,a load test is required, unless the winch has been load-tested on a test plant and certified accordingly.

4.4 Special occasions

GL reserves the right to ask for extraordinary loadtests and/or examinations in specially justified cases.

F. Wear, Damage, Repair

1. General notes

1.1 The details which follow regarding deforma-tion, wear, tolerances, etc. are to be considered asreference values to assess the remaining margin ofsafety of damaged, corroded or worn components.

In the case of major damage, or in cases of doubt, GLHead Office shall be consulted.

1.2 Any damaged, worn or corroded part whichis not replaced shall, once the tolerances have beenexceeded, be restored to the original dimensions usingequivalent materials.

Regarding an alternative reduction of the nominalload, see 9.1.

1.3 For worn or corroded parts which are close toreaching the tolerance limits, the GL Surveyor maydetermine a time period for repair or replacement.

1.4 Regarding loose gear, interchangeable components and ropes, reference is also made to Section 7,E. and Section 8, E.3.3.

VI - Part 2GL 2012


F



2. Acceptable reduction of plate thickness

2.1 For plates, profiles and pipes, the acceptablereduction of plate thickness is 10 %.

2.2 In cases of limited local corrosion or wear, areduction of plate thickness of up to 20 % is accept-able provided this does not result in a reduction of theload-bearing capacity of the cross-section.

2.3 In cases of isolated pitting, a reduction of plate thickness of up to 30 % is acceptable.

2.4 Due to the above reductions of plate thick-ness, the characteristic values of a cross-section underconsideration may be weakened at the most by 5 %.

3. Acceptable cracks

3.1 In Category 1 components (see Section 2,Table 2.1), no cracks can be tolerated.

3.2 In lateral wind bracing, latticework crosspieces and similar stiffeners, or knee plates whose purpose is to reduce the slenderness ratio or stiffenload-bearing structures, cracks up to the followinglengths are acceptable, if there is evidence that they donot extend into the load-bearing structure:

– 10 % of the connection length

– 3 x plate thickness,

the lower of the two values applying.

In the case of pipes, the connection length is the cir-cumference.

In the case of box girders or beams, each chord, weband flange width is to be considered separately as aconnection length.

4. Acceptable deformations

4.1 Deflections

4.1.1 Compression bars4.1.1.1 Under the maximum permissible loading,compression bars may not display uniform deflectiongreater than the equivalent of the bar length divided by250.

4.1.1.2 Unstressed compression bars, or thosestressed only by their own weight, which are Category1 components, may not display uniform deflectiongreater than the equivalent of the bar length divided by500.

4.1.1.3 Unstressed compression bars, or thosestressed only by their own weight, which are Category

2 components, such as lateral wind bracing or lattice-work crosspieces, may not display uniform deflectiongreater than the equivalent of the bar length divided by350.

4.1.2 Tension bars

Tension bars shall not, when unstressed, display uni-form deflection greater than the equivalent of the barlength divided by 50.

4.1.3 Crane booms

4.1.3.1 For crane booms subject to compressivestress under permissible load, the requirements in4.1.1.1 apply. The uniform deflection due to the deadweight alone shall not be greater than the equivalent ofthe crane boom length divided by 350.

4.1.3.2 The lowering of the top of the crane boomunder load and/or dead weight is not limited when the permissible load is observed.

4.2 Deformation of chords and flanges

4.2.1 I-Beams

Each half-flange may individually or together be de-formed by up to 15 % of its breadth, measured fromweb to outer edge.

4.2.2 Angle profiles

Flanges of angle profiles may individually or together be deformed by up to 15 % of their breadth, measuredfrom flange to outer edge.

5. Acceptable indentations

The following requirements presuppose smooth transi-tion pieces and apply provided that no bends, folds,cracks or thinning have developed.

5.1 Compression bars

5.1.1 Cylindrical pipes

5.1.1.1 Pipes forming Category 1 components

The following conditions are to be observed:

d

b 0,25 d

f 0,5 t

where

= length of indentation measured in the longitudi-

nal direction of the pipe

b = breadth of indentation

f = depth of indentation (depth gauge)

d = outer diameter

t = wall thickness



F



5.1.1.2 Pipes forming Category 2 components

The following conditions are to be observed:

a) central range (1/3 ) b) outer range

≤ d ≤ 1,5 d

b ≤ 0,5 d b ≤ 0,7 d

f ≤ t f ≤ 2 ⋅ t

5.1.2 Rectangular tubes and box girders

5.1.2.1 In the case of rectangular tubes and box gird-ers, indentations at the corners may have a depth cor-responding to 8 % of the smallest side dimension.

5.1.2.2 For acceptable indentations of plates, therequirements for cylindrical pipes similarly apply.

Instead of the diameter, the side dimension of the plateunder consideration is to be taken.

5.1.3 I-Beams

The webs of I-beams may not have any indentations.

5.1.4 Angle profiles

Angle profiles may not have any indentations at thecorners.

5.2 Tension bars

In the case of tension bars, the indentation depth may be up to one third of the indentation length. The outerdimensions of hollow profiles, however, shall not bereduced by more than 25 % in the indentation area.

If necessary, the requirements of Section 3, C.5.2 shall be observed.

5.3 Girders subject to bending

5.3.1 Indentations at bearing or load introduction points are not acceptable.

5.3.2 In areas other than mentioned in 5.3.1, therule is that indentations up to the dimensions in 5.1.1and 5.1.2 are acceptable on the tension side; on the

compression side, only dimensions of half that size.

6. Acceptable wear on rope-sheaves

6.1 The side wall thickness of rope sheaves madefrom normal-strength materials shall meet the follow-ing condition at the bottom of the groove:

St 0,85 F≥ ⋅

t = side wall thickness mm

FS = static rope pull according to Section 8, B.3.2

[kN]

6.2 The details at 6.1 apply to disc, or spoked,rope-sheaves.

Rope-sheaves of grey cast iron are not permitted.

6.3 The wall thickness according to 6.1 mayreduce in an upward direction to 1/3 at the outermostedge.

6.4 Rope imprints located at the bottom of therope groove require a change to the pairing of ropeand rope-sheave.

7. Acceptable wear on pins / Increase of bear-ing clearances

7.1 Pins

From the point of view of load-bearing capacity areduction in diameter of 10 % is acceptable.

7.2 Bearing clearance

7.2.1 Foot bearings

The tolerable increase of bearing clearance is twotimes the initial clearance.

7.2.2 Bearings in general

Greater clearances than stated in 7.2.1 are acceptableif the pin’s load-carrying capacity and ability to func-tion are not adversely affected, and if no alternatingload exists.

7.2.3 Rope-sheave bearings

The following bearing clearances are acceptable:

– 1 mm in antifriction bearings

– 2 mm in sliding bearings

8. Acceptable wear of mechanical parts

8.1 Gearings

8.1.1 In the case of toothed racks and other "open"drives, the width of the teeth on the pitch circle (roll-ing circle) may not be less than 55 % of that at the rootof the teeth.

8.1.2 In the case of "enclosed" gears, parts or theentire set of gearing shall be renewed if the materialon the pressure lines/working faces starts to break

away (pitting).

8.1.3 Wedges or fitting keys shall be renewed ifthere are visible signs of wear.

VI - Part 2GL 2012


F



8.2 Brakes

8.2.1 Wear on all types of brakes, in so far as visible, may only have reached the point where, in all probability, they can be used for one more year.

In the case of band brakes with riveted-on linings, therivets may not make contact with the braking surface.

8.2.2 Electric or hydraulic winches with automaticstandstill brakes may not have any slip, not even undertest load.

8.2.3 Winches with manually-applied standstill brakes may not have any slip when the brake has beenapplied, not even under test load.

8.2.4 Hydraulic winches without standstill brakesmay not, under nominal load, show more slip per

minute than one meter travelling distance of the hook,or one full rotation of the drum. The lower of the twovalues applies.

9. Reduction of nominal load(s) / load radius(radii)

9.1 If a repair or replacement is not performedimmediately, a reduction of nominal load(s)/loadradius (radii) because of damage, unacceptable wear,corrosion or for other reasons is principally permissible as an alternative to putting out of service.

This measure may be temporary or, if permissibleaccording to an appropriate evaluation, also unlimited.

9.2 A reduction according to 9.1 requires a loadtest and certificate for the modified working condi-tions, plus a corresponding entry in the Register bookand a note in the survey report.

9.3 The marking on the loading gear or loosegear shall be correspondingly changed for the time ofreduction of the nominal load(s)/load radius (radii).

Where the reduction is intended to last an unlimited

period of time, the rigging plans of the affected load-ing gear shall also be modified accordingly.

10. Repairs

10.1 If the acceptable limiting values describedabove have been achieved, or are expected to beachieved soon, the components are to be properlyrepaired or replaced.

10.2 In the case of repairs, care shall be taken torestore the initial condition as far as possible and toavoid any adverse microstructure changes in the mate-

rials involved as a result of heating.

10.3 Any repairs shall be entered into the Register book and the survey report.

G. Loading Gear Documentation

1. General notes

1.1 The central element of all loading geardocumentation is a Register book, in which all appropriate certificates and information are collected and/ornoted.

1.2 The different Register books and certificatesto be issued by the GL Surveyor are based on interna-tional or national regulations, in a form as interpreted by GL.

1.3 Secure storage of the loading gear documen-tation throughout the entire working life of the loadinggear, and the presentation of Register books, certifi-

cates, rigging plans and survey reports to the GL Sur-veyor or authorized persons before the start of any testand/or examination, is the responsibility of the ship’smanagement.

1.4 When the Register book, Form LA1 is full,another Register book shall be issued and suppliedwith the certificates and information still effectivefrom the expired Register book.

The ship's management shall store the expired Regis-ter book for at least 5 years.

1.5 When ships in operation receive GL Class,Register books and certificates of recognized societiesor organizations may be accepted and continued.

2. Register books

2.1 Explanatory notes

2.1.1 The purpose of Register books for loadinggear is to provide information at any time about theactual situation as regards general data, plus the test,examination and maintenance status.

2.1.2 On completion of successful initial tests andexaminations, the Register books described below arehanded over by the GL Surveyor to the shipyard or theship’s management after the stipulated certificateshave been added and the examinations made have been confirmed in it.

2.1.3 In the Register books, certificates, results ofexaminations and, where required, survey reports andother information are collected. They are to be storedat the place of operation and submitted to the GLSurveyor or to authorized persons on demand.

2.1.4 If a Register book is lost, a new one can be produced on the basis of a test and examination andwith the help of GL Head Office (supply of CertifiedTrue Copies, etc.).



G



2.1.5 A Register book normally includes severalsets of loading gear. If it is reasonable, Register booksmay also be issued individually for loading gear, in-terchangeable crane boom systems on board floatingcranes, loose gear, etc.

2.1.6 Special versions differing from the Register books described below may be issued by GL or theoperator (e.g. authority), if this is required or desired.

2.2 Register book for loading gear used forcargo-handling (Form LA1)

2.2.1 For loading gear used for cargo-handling, theGL Surveyor issues a "Register of Ship's Cargo Han-dling Gear", Form LA1, which is based on a modelILO Register book.

2.2.2 Together with the relevant certificates, the

Register book is handed over in a protective cover which also contains the rigging plans described in 4. and further serves to accommodate the survey reports.

2.2.3 Parts 1 and 2 of the Register book are re-served for entries by the GL Surveyor, whereas theinspection of loose gear in part 3 and maintenancemeasures in part 4 are to be confirmed by the ship'smanagement.

Entries by the GL Surveyor refer to the recording ofnewly added certificates, the confirmation of examina-tions carried out and to special notes.

2.3 Register books for loading gear not used

for cargo-handling

2.3.1 GL documentation folder

If no special Register book is required, certificates,survey reports and confirmations of inspection and/ormaintenance measures by the ship’s management arecompiled in a GL documentation folder and stored.

2.3.2 Register book, Form LA1

As an alternative to 2.3.1 or 2.3.2 a "Register book forhandling equipment" may be issued. This Register book shall be issued if required by national regula-tions.

For practical reasons, it is recommended that a secondRegister book, Form LA1, is kept, in addition to theone kept for loading gear used for cargo-handling.

3. Certificates

3.1 Recognition of certificates

Certificates for loading gear, interchangeable compo-nents and ropes, as well as for loose gear, shall be

issued using the forms described in the following.In special cases or by agreement, GL may recognizedeviating forms or certificates not issued by GL Sur-veyors.

3.2 Certificates for loading gear used forcargo-handling

3.2.1 The following forms of certificates are basedon ILO model certificates:

– Form LA2

Lifting Appliances for Cargo Handling, TestCertificate

– Form LA2 (U)

Derricks used in Union Purchase, Test Certifi-cate

– Form LA3

Accessories and Lifting Attachments, Test/Examination Certificate

– Form LA4

Certificate of Test and Thorough Examinationof Wire Ropes

3.2.2 Load tests are confirmed by Forms LA2 toLA3, tensile tests by Form LA4.

In addition, Forms LA3 and LA4 confirm an examina-tion after the test.

3.2.3 Forms LA2 to LA3 are issued anew aftereach load test of loading gear or loose gear used forthis equipment.

Interchangeable components used in the tests receiveno new certificate.

3.2.4 The certificates, Forms LA2 to LA3, mayinclude several sets of loading gear, interchangeablecomponents or loose gear.

3.2.5 The certificate, Form LA4, is issued after thestipulated tensile breaking test and examination by GLSurveyors or by GL-approved firms.

3.2.6 Newly procured interchangeable components,loose gear and ropes shall be taken on board togetherwith their certificates.

3.2.7 The numbers of all certificates issued onforms LA2 to LA3 are to be entered by a GL Surveyorin the appropriate parts of the Register book, FormLA1. This provides the connection between Register book and certificates.

3.3 Certificates for loading gear not used forcargo-handling

3.3.1 GL certification system

3.3.1.1 When no special requirements are to be ob-served, the following form of certificate will be is-sued:

– Form 494

Lifting Appliances Not Handling Cargo, Test/Examination Certificate

VI - Part 2GL 2012


G



3.3.1.2 The purpose of certificate Form 494 is toconfirm a load test and associated examination.

Subsequently, the following annual examinations willalso be confirmed by this certificate.

3.3.1.3 Form 494 applies to a single piece of loadinggear and will be issued anew after each periodic loadtest.

3.3.1.4 The certificates required in addition for inter-changeable components, loose gear and ropes arelisted in 6.2.2.

3.3.22 ILO certification system

The application of the certification system describedin 3.2 may be prescribed or agreed.

3.4 Special certificate forms

3.4.1 Certificate of Class for Loading gear

3.4.1.1 If the Classification of a set of loading gear,as described in Section 1, A.4.2, is agreed or pre-scribed, GL issues the following certificate forms, inaddition to the certificates described above:

– Form 480

Certificate of Class for Loading Gear

3.4.1.2 On completion of all tests and examinations,and following receipt of copies of the certificates andthe survey report, the class certificate is issued by the

Head Office and sent to the ship’s owner.The owner shall have the Certificate of Class added tothe Register book on board the ship.

3.4.2 Certificates for fibre ropes

3.4.2.1 For fibre ropes, the following certificate formis provided:

– Form F497

Certificate of test and examination of fibre ropes

3.4.2.2 The certificate, Form F497, is issued by theGL Surveyor or by GL approved manufacturers, fol-

lowing the stipulated tensile breaking test and exami-nation.

3.4.3 GL test certificate

3.4.3.1 The following GL certificate form is issued toconfirm tests and/or examinations of all kinds:

– Form F208

Test certificate

3.4.3.2 The certificate Form F208 is also issued inconjunction with load tests of loose gear and inter-changeable components , insofar as these are not put

into use on ships, or if the ship is not known.3.4.3.3 In special cases, e.g. for particular Register books issued by authorities, Form F208 may replaceall certificates described in 3.2 and 3.3.1.

3.4.4 Gear and Tackle Certificate

3.4.4.1 Following an inspection of the loading gearused for cargo-handling, a GL Surveyor may on appli-cation issue the following form of certificate:

– Form 470Gear and Tackle Certificate

3.4.4.2 The certificate Form 470 is based on thenational regulations of various countries for shipsmore than 15 years old.

3.4.4.3 On request by the ship’s management, theinspection may be expanded accordingly and countedas the annual examination.

4. Rigging plans

4.1 Rigging plans are required by the ILO forloading gear used for cargo-handling. Loading gearnot used for cargo handling, is not covered there.

They contain information useful for operation andmaintenance, and for the procurement of spare partsand repair.

4.2 Rigging plans, for instance, have informationon nominal loads and load radii, ropes, reeving ofropes, marking, arrangement of the loading gear on board the ship, working ranges, etc.

4.3 In the rigging plan examples given in Annex D:

– arrangement of loading gear, and

– reeving of ropes for loading gear,

the necessary nominal sizes of the individual parts, theminimum breaking load of the ropes and the specialconditions for operation of the lifting applianceswhere required are to be indicated clearly.

4.4 For construction of the ship, the plans for thearrangement of loading gear shall be prepared by theyard, the plans for the reeving of ropes for the loadinggear by the loading gear manufacturer.

5. Survey reports

5.1 For each test and/or examination of loadinggear and loose gear, a survey report is prepared by theGL Surveyor in the form of a "Survey Statement".

This report may be part of the overall report for the ship.

5.2 Each survey report number which refers toloading gear and loose gear is entered into a list in theRegister book, Form LA1.

5.3 A copy of the survey report is added to the

Register books in the form described in 2.3.1 and 2.3.2 if specific findings have resulted from the examinationor if special measures have been or shall become nec-essary.



G

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-



6. Documentation for the operator

6.1 General notes

6.1.1 For shipborne loading gear and loading gear

on offshore installations, the documentation handedover by GL consists of the Register books includingcertificates, rigging plans, lists and survey reports inthe scope described below.

6.1.2 Flag state requirements may prescribe devi-ating national Register books, and authorities maykeep their own Register books.

6.2 Scope of documentation

6.2.1 GL Register book, Form LA1 (Cargogear)

In accordance with its intended purpose, this Register book contains:

– GL certificate(s), Form LA2,

where required additionally Form LA2 (U)

– GL certificate(s), Form LA3

– GL certificate(s), Form LA4

– rigging plans

– where required, additionally Form(s) 480

– survey reports

6.2.2 GL documentation folder (Lifting appli-ances not handling cargo)

In accordance with its intended purpose, this Register book contains:

– GL certificate(s), Form 494

– Form LA3 for interchangeable components

– Form LA4 for ropes

– where required, Form LA3 for loose gear

– where required, rigging plans

– survey reports, if issued

VI - Part 2GL 2012


G





Annex A

Calculation of Dynamic Forces due to Motions of the Ship

1. General

1.1 Dynamic forces due to motions in the seawaymay be calculated by hydrodynamic methods from themovements of the floating bodies under consideration,alternatively also simplified as per 1.2 or 1.3.

1.2 For the sake of simplification the calculationof the dynamic forces can be conducted according to2.1.2 and 2.2.2 with the ship's inclinations in Table

A.1 or with agreed ship's inclinations.

1.3 Where calculated or agreed values for the

ship's inclinations and natural periods exist, the dy-namic forces may be calculated using the values ac-cording to 2.1.3 and 2.2.3, see also Annex B, 5.

1.4 The dynamic forces for rolling and pitchingeach including also a force component of 20 % forheaving are to be considered separately, i.e. as notacting simultaneously.

1.5 The following approaches apply to monohullships. With regard to other ship forms such as semi-submersibles, it is recommended that GL be consulted.

2. Dynamic forces generated by ships and

similar floating bodies

2.1 Dynamic forces due to rolling

2.1.1 Designations of the dimensions and forcesare shown in Fig. A.1.

Fig. A.1 Vertical and horizontal forces due torolling

LE = dead load [kN]

αsee = roll angle acc. to Table A.1 [°]

b = distance from centre line of ship [m]

h = height above waterline [m]

2.1.2 Calculation of dynamic forces acc. to 1.2

[ ]

[ ]

seeEVR E see 3 2

seeEHR E see 3 2

b LL L 1,2 cos kN

10 B

h LL L 1,2 sin kN

10 B

α ⋅ ⋅⎛ ⎞≈ ⋅ ⋅ α +⎜ ⎟

⋅⎝ ⎠

α ⋅ ⋅⎛ ⎞≈ ⋅ ⋅ α +⎜ ⎟

⋅⎝ ⎠

B = breadth of ship [m]

L = length of ship between perpendiculars [m]


[ ]

[ ]

seeEVR E see2 2

T R

seeEHR E see2 2T R

bLL L 1 cos kN

20 T 14,3 T

hLL L 1 sin kN

20 T 14,3 T

⎡ ⎤α ⋅⎛ ⎞= ⋅ + ⋅ α +⎢ ⎥⎜ ⎟⋅ ⋅⎢ ⎥⎝ ⎠⎣ ⎦

⎡ ⎤α ⋅⎛ ⎞= ⋅ + ⋅ α +⎢ ⎥⎜ ⎟⋅ ⋅⎢ ⎥⎝ ⎠⎣ ⎦

TT = natural period of heaving [s]

TR = natural period of rolling [s]

2.2 Dynamic forces due to pitching

2.2.1 Designations of the dimensions and forcesare shown in Fig. A.2.

Fig. A.2 Vertical und horizontal forces due topitching

βsee = pitch angle acc. to Table A.1 [°]

= distance from midship section, ahead or

astern [m]

V.L. = fore perpendicular

VI - Part 2GL 2012

Annex A Calculation of Dynamic Forces due to Motions of the Ship Chapter 2Page A–1

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-

http://-/?-




[ ]

[ ]

seeEVS E see

seeEHS E see

L L 1,2 cos kN3,6 L

hL L 1,2 sin kN3, 6 L

β ⋅⎛ ⎞≈ ⋅ ⋅ β +⎜ ⎟⋅⎝ ⎠

β ⋅⎛ ⎞≈ ⋅ ⋅ β +⎜ ⎟⋅⎝ ⎠


[ ]

[ ]

seeEVS E see2 2

T S

seeEHS E see2 2

T R

LL L 1 cos kN

20 T 14,3 T

hLL L 1 sin kN

20 T 14,3 T

⎡ ⎤β ⋅⎛ ⎞= ⋅ + ⋅ β +⎢ ⎥⎜ ⎟⋅ ⋅⎢ ⎥⎝ ⎠⎣ ⎦

⎡ ⎤β ⋅⎛ ⎞= ⋅ + ⋅ β +⎢ ⎥⎜ ⎟⋅ ⋅⎢ ⎥⎝ ⎠⎣ ⎦

TS = natural period of pitching [s]

3. Dynamic forces due to pontoons or barges

The following requirements are based on the calcula-tions in 2.1 and 2.2.

3.1 Dynamic forces due to rolling

Regarding pontoon-type ship forms, calculation ofdynamic forces shall be based on specified values forthe natural periods and dynamic inclination of heeling(calculation according to 2.1.3).

3.2 Dynamic forces due to pitching

For the calculation of dynamic forces due to pitching,the approaches in 2.2.3 apply with laid down valuesfor natural periods and for the dynamic inclination of pitching.

Table A.1 Dynamic ship inclinations

Type of floating body Heel angle see Trim angle see

Ships and similar floating bodies 1 ± 30° ± 12 · e (-L / 250)

Pontoons/ barges ± (3° + Δαsee)2 ± (1,5° + Δβsee)

3

Semi-submersibles 4 ± 6° ± 6°

1 also applicable to floating production , storing and offloading stations (FPSO)

2 Δαsee is the smaller value of heel, either causing immersion of the deck or emerging of the bilge in calm water.

3 Δβsee ist he smaller value of trim, either causing immersion of bow or stern, or emerging of stem or stern frame in calm water.

4 Basic values for calculation by GL, see 1.3

Chapter 2Page A–2

Annex A Calculation of Dynamic Forces due to Motions of the Ship VI - Part 2GL 2012



Annex B

Hook Load for Subsea Operations

1. General

1.1 Preferably, forces on submerged loads caused by ship motions and crane lifts during underwateroperations are to be assessed by performing suitablehydrodynamic analyses. Alternatively, these forcesmay be estimated by following the procedure de-scribed in 3. to 5.

1.2 The procedure in 3. to 5. is applicable to

single hull ships. For other hull shapes, such assemisubmersible platforms, GL should be consulted.

1.3 To explicitly distinguish between harbor andopen sea operations, loads, forces and coefficients areidentified by index ”u“ plus an additional numeral 1 or2. Numeral 1 identifies these loads, forces and coeffi-cients when the load is being lowered through the seasurface; numeral 2, when the load is fully submerged.

1.4 The following relation applies:

L = F/g L in [t] F in [kN]

2. Design loads

2.1 Hoist load LHu

LHu = LEA + L Nu [t]

LEA = dead load of crane [t]

L Nu = safe working load for underwater operations [t]

= (Fstat + Fhyd)/g

Fstat = hydrostatic force component according to 3.1

or 4.1 [kN]

Fhyd = hydrodynamic force component according to

3.1 or 4.1 [kN]

2.2 Hoist load coefficient u

ψu =stat hyd g

stat stat

F F F

F F

+=

Fg = total force acting on load according to 3.1 or

4.1 [kN]

2.3 Condition to be complied with

Ne N see N usee uL L L⋅ ψ ≥ ⋅ ψ ≥ ⋅ ψ

3. Forces on load when lowered throughwater surface

3.1 Total force on load LNu1

The total force acting on the load when lowered

through the water surface may be estimated as follows:

Fg1 = Fstat1 ± Fhyd1

Fg1

= total force on load [kN]

Fstat1 = hydrostatic submerged weight of load [kN]

Fhyd1 = hydrodynamic force on submerged part of load

[kN]

3.2 Hydrostatic force Fstat1

The hydrostatic force acting on the load when loweredthrough the water surface may be estimated as follows:

Fstat1 = m g – ρ Vd g

m = mass of load [t]

g = acceleration of gravity [m/s2]

ρ = density of water [t/m3]

Vd = displaced volume of submerged part of load [m3]

3.3 Hydrodynamic force Fhyd1

The hydrodynamic force acting on the load when lowered

through the water surface may be estimated as follows:

Fhyd1 = Fslam + Fmk + FD + FI

Fslam = slamming impact force [kN]

Fmk = impulsive mass force [kN]

FD = hydrodynamic drag force [kN]

FI = hydrodynamic inertia force [kN]

3.3.1 Slamming impact force Fslam

The slamming impact force acting on the bottom ofthe load when lowered through the water surface may be estimated as follows:

Fslam = 0.5 ρ k s A p2sv

k s = slamming coefficient

= 3.0 for smooth circular cylinders

= 5.0 for other shapes

VI - Part 2GL 2012

Annex B Hook Load for Subsea Operations Chapter 2Page B–1



A p = projected area of load elements penetrating

the water surface [m2]

vs = vertical slamming impact velocity [m/s]

The vertical slamming impact velocity may be esti-mated as follows:

0.20

hs h r0

r0

vv v 0.44 v

v

−⎛ ⎞

= + ⎜ ⎟⎝ ⎠

vh = crane tip velocity (typical = 0.5 m/s)

vr 0 = vertical relative velocity between load and

water particles at the water surface [m/s]

The vertical relative velocity between load and water particles at the water surface may be estimated as

follows:

2r0 1/3Av v g H= + π

vA = highest value of vertical crane tip velocity

[m/s]

H1/3 = significant wave height [m]

Alternatively, the slamming coefficient s

k may be

determined experimentally.

3.3.2 Impulsive mass force Fmk

The impulsive mass force acting on the load may beestimated as follows:

mk r

cF m g v

m

⎛ ⎞= +⎜ ⎟⎜ ⎟

⎝ ⎠

m = mass of load in air [t]

vr = vertical relative velocity between load and

water particles [m/s]

c = stiffness constant of lifting appliance and itsfoundation [kN/m]

The vertical relative velocity between load and water particles may be estimated as follows:

2 2r A dv v v= +

vA = crane tip vertical velocity according to 5.2

[m/s]

vd = vertical velocity of water at center of gravity

of submerged part of load [m/s]

= ( )0.34d/H1/ 3 1/ 3

g H

e−

π

d = distance from water surface to center of grav-ity of submerged part of load [m]

3.3.3 Hydrodynamic drag force FD

The hydrodynamic drag force depends on the relativevertical velocity between load and water particles andmay be estimated as follows:

2D d p r F 0.5 C A v= ρ

Cd = drag coefficient (see GL Rules for Structural

Design (IV-6-4), Section 2)

A p = horizontal projected area of load [m2]

3.3.4 Hydrodynamic inertia force FI

The hydrodynamic inertia force depends on the verti-cal acceleration of the load and may be estimated asfollows:

FI = (m + mhyd) aA

mhyd = hydrodynamic added mass of load [t]

= ρ Vd Cm

Vd = volume of displaced water [m3]

Cm = hydrodynamic added mass coefficient (see

GL Rules for Structural Design (IV-6-4), Sec-tion 2)

For aA, see 5.3.

4. Forces on submerged load

4.1 Total force on submerged load LNu2

The total force acting on the submerged load may beestimated as follows:

Fg2 = Fstat2 ± Fhyd2

Fg2 = total force acting on submerged load [kN]

Fstat2 = hydrostatic submerged weight of load [kN]

= m g – ρ V g

V = volume of water displaced by submerged

load [m3]

Fhyd2 = hydrodynamic force acting on submerged

load [kN]

4.2 Hydrodynamic force on submerged loadFhyd2

The hydrodynamic force acting on the submerged loadmay be estimated as follows:

22

hyd m D2F F F= +

Fm = hydrodynamic mass force [kN]

FD = hydrodynamic drag force [kN]

Chapter 2Page B–2

Annex B Hook Load for Subsea Operations VI - Part 2GL 2012




















4.2.1 Hydrodynamic inertia force Fm

The hydrodynamic mass force, caused by the accelera-tion of the submerged load and the acceleration of thesurrounding water, may be estimated as follows:

Fm = (m + mhyd) aA + ρ V aw + mhyd aw

For m, see 3.3.2.

For mhyd, see 3.3.4.

aw = vertical water particle acceleration at center

of gravity of the submerged load [m/s2]

The vertical water particle acceleration may be esti-mated as follows:

21/ 3

w

1/ 3

g Ha

H d

π=

+

H1/3 = significant wave height [m]

d = distance from water surface to center of grav-ity of submerged load [m]

4.2.2 Hydrodynamic drag force FD

To estimate the hydrodynamic drag force, see 3.3.3.

5. Crane tip dynamics of offshore cranes

The following procedure applies to cranes having a

lifting capacity L Ne ≥ 60 t.

5.1 Crane tip vertical motion

The crane tip’s vertical motion may be estimated asfollows:

2 2 2A 3 see sees s (bsin ) (lsin )= + α + β

sA = highest value of vertical motion amplitude of

crane tip [m]

s3 = highest value of heave amplitude [m]

(for an estimate: s3 ≈ 1/ 3H4

)

b = horizontal distance from ship centerline tocrane tip [m]

l = horizontal distance from amidships to cranetip [m]

αsee = roll angle [°]

βsee = pitch angle [°]

For roll and pitch angles, see Table 3.1 unless ob-tained from a motion analysis or agreed upon other-

wise.

5.2 Crane tip vertical velocity

The crane tip’s vertical velocity may be estimated asfollows:

22 23 see see

AT R S

s bsin lsinv 2

T T T

⎛ ⎞⎛ ⎞ ⎛ ⎞α β= π + + ⎜ ⎟⎜ ⎟ ⎜ ⎟⎝ ⎠ ⎝ ⎠ ⎝ ⎠

vA = highest value of vertical crane tip velocity

[m/s]

TT = heave natural period [s]

TR = roll natural period [s]

TS = pitch natural period [s]

Natural periods of heave, roll, and pitch may be esti-mated as follows:

TT = TS

TR =T

B[s]

1,9 g M

π ⋅

⋅ ⋅

(for an estimate: MT ≈ 0,0075 ⋅ L)

TS =L

L[s]

3,7 g M

π ⋅

⋅ ⋅

(for an estimate: ML ≈ L)

L = ship length between perpendiculars [m]

B = ship breadth [m]

g = acceleration of gravity [m/s2]

MT = transverse metacentric height [m]

ML = longitudinal metacentric height [m]

Alternatively, these natural periods may be obtainedfrom a separate sea-keeping analysis of the ship in

waves.

5.3 Crane tip vertical acceleration

The crane tip’s vertical acceleration may be estimatedas follows:

22 2

2 3 see seeA 2 2 2

T R S

s bsin lsina 4

T T T

⎛ ⎞⎛ ⎞ ⎛ ⎞α β= π + + ⎜ ⎟⎜ ⎟ ⎜ ⎟⎜ ⎟ ⎜ ⎟ ⎜ ⎟

⎝ ⎠ ⎝ ⎠ ⎝ ⎠

aA = highest value of vertical crane tip accelera-

tion [m/s2]

VI - Part 2GL 2012

Annex B Hook Load for Subsea Operations Chapter 2Page B–3





Annex C

Wind Loads, Form and Sheltering Coefficients

1. General

1.1 For the determination of wind loads actingon loading gear onboard ships, it is normally suffi-cient to use simplified form coefficients and to con-sider wind load reductions of areas arranged behindone another according to Section 3, B.4.5.4 and4.5.5.

1.2 Using form and sheltering coefficients from

this Annex, which depend on various parameters,may lead to a reduction of wind loads, if compared tothe statements in Section 4.

2. Form coefficients cf

2.1 The form coefficients for individual struc-tural components and lattice frames, as well as forenclosed superstructures such as e.g. machine houseson a solid bottom plate, are given in Table C.1.

2.2 The form coefficients in Table C.1 depend

on the aerodynamic slenderness ratio, see Fig. C.1.

2.3 Where, in the case of lattice constructions,the distance between nodes is defined as the length ofthe individual structural elements, see Fig. C.2, nor-mally dimensioned gusset plates need not be consid-ered.

2.4 The wind load on lattice beams can be calcu-lated using the form coefficients in Table C.1. In thiscase, the aerodynamic slenderness ratio of each indi-vidual lattice bar shall be considered.

2.5 As an alternative to 2.4, the global formcoefficients in Table C.1 may be used for lattice beams, if the lattice bars consist of round profiles orof profiles with flat sides.

3. Sheltering coefficients

3.1 Where components are arranged in such away that they shelter one another, the wind loads onthe sheltered components may be calculated bymultiplication with the applicable sheltering coeffi-

cient η acc. to Table C.2.

3.2 Where several components are arranged atthe same distance in a row so that they shelter one

another, the sheltering effect increases up to the 9th component and then remains constant.

3.3 The wind load on areas arranged one afteranother is calculated as follows:

– first area: W1 f wL q c A= ⋅ ⋅

(Section 3, B.4.5.2)

– second area: W2 W1L L= ⋅η

– nth area:( )n 1

Wn W1 W1L L L 0,1−

= ⋅η ≥ ⋅

– 9th and following areas:

8W9 W1 W1L L L 0,1= ⋅ η ≥ ⋅

Fig. C.1 Aerodynamic slenderness ratio andsection ratio

Fig. C.2 Area ratio

VI - Part 2GL 2012

Annex C Wind Loads, Form and Sheltering Coefficients Chapter 2Page C–1



Table C.1 Form coefficients c

Aerodynamic slenderness ratio /h or /d 1 Compo-

nent

groups

Description5 10 20 30 40 ≥ 50

rolled profiles such as

box profiles

square h < 0,4 m

rectangular h < 0,5 m

1,3 1,35 1,6 1,65 1,7 1,8

0,7 0,75 0,8 0,85 0,9 1,0

round profiles 2

d ⋅ v < 6 m2/s

d ⋅ v ≥ 6 m2/s 0,6 0,65 0,7 0,7 0,75 0,8

h/b 1

≥ 2 1,55 1,75 1,95 2,10 2,2

1 1,5 1,55 1,75 1,85 1,9

0,5 1,0 1,2 1,3 1,35 1,4

Compo-

nents

box profiles

square

h ≥ 0,4 m

rectangular

h ≥ 0,5 m 0,25 0,8 0,9 0,9 1,0 1,0

profiles with flat sides 1,7

1,1

Global

form coef-

ficients for

lattice

beams

round profiles 2

d ⋅ v < 6 m2/s

d ⋅ v ≥ 6 m2/s 0,8

Machine

houses,

etc.

rectangular, enclosed

constructions on a solid

bottom plate

1,1

1 see Fig. B.12 v = wind speed according to Section 3, B.4.5.3

Table C.2 Sheltering coefficients

Area ratio AB/AU 1 Distance ratio

A/H or a/h 2 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6

0,5 0,75 0,4 0,32 0,21 0,15 0,1

1,0 0,92 0,75 0,59 0,43 0,25 0,1

2,0 0,95 0,8 0,63 0,5 0,33 0,2

4,0 1,0 0,88 0,76 0,66 0,55 0,45

5,0 1,0 0,95 0,88 0,81 0,75 0,68

6,0 1,0 1,0 1,0 1,0 1,0 1,0

1 see Fig. B.22 see Fig. B.3

Chapter 2Page C–2

Annex C Wind Loads, Form and Sheltering Coefficients VI - Part 2GL 2012



Fig. C.3 Distance ratio

VI - Part 2GL 2012

Annex C Wind Loads, Form and Sheltering Coefficients Chapter 2Page C–3





Annex D

Rigging Plan

VI - Part 2GL 2012

Annex D Rigging Plan Chapter 2Page D–1



Chapter 2Page D–2

Annex D Rigging Plan VI - Part 2GL 2012